2003 Mercedes Benz e Class

E 320
E 500
Our company and staff congratulate you 앫 Please read this manual carefully be-
on the purchase of your new fore putting it aside. Then return it to
Mercedes-Benz. your vehicle where it will be handy for
your reference.
Your selection of our product is a demon-
stration of your trust in our company 앫 Please follow the recommendations
name. Further, it exemplifies your desire to contained in this manual. They are de-
own an automobile that will be as easy as signed to acquaint you with the opera-
possible to operate and provide years of tion of your Mercedes-Benz.
service.
앫 Please pay attention to the warnings
Your Mercedes-Benz represents the ef- and cautions contained in this manual.
forts of many skilled engineers and crafts- They are designed to help improve the
men. To help assure your driving pleasure, safety of the vehicle operator and oc-
and also the safety of you and your passen- cupants.
gers, we ask you to make a small invest- We extend our best wishes for many miles
ment of time: of safe, pleasurable driving.
Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC
A DaimlerChrysler Company
Contents
Problems while driving.................... 48

Introduction .......................................... 9 At a glance .......................................... 19 Parking and locking.............................. 50
Product information................................ 9 Cockpit................................................. 20 Parking brake ................................. 50
Operator’s Manual ............................... 10 Instrument cluster ................................ 22 Switching off headlamps................. 51
Service and warranty information .. 10 Multifunction steering wheel ................ 24 Turning off the engine..................... 51
Important notice for California Center console ..................................... 25
retail buyers and lessees of Upper part ...................................... 25
Mercedes-Benz automobiles .......... 11 Lower part ...................................... 26 Safety and Security ........................... 55
Maintenance .................................. 12 Overhead control panel ........................ 27 Occupant safety ................................... 56
Roadside Assistance ...................... 12 Door control panel................................ 28 Airbags ........................................... 57
Change of address or ownership.... 12 Seat belts ....................................... 61
Operating your vehicle outside Children in the vehicle .................... 65
the USA or Canada......................... 13 Getting started ................................... 29 Blocking of rear door window
Where to find it.................................... 14 Unlocking ............................................. 30 operation ........................................ 71
Symbols............................................... 15 Unlocking with the SmartKey.......... 30 Panic alarm .......................................... 72
Operating safety .................................. 16 Unlocking with KEYLESS-GO*......... 32 Activating........................................ 72
Proper use of the vehicle ............... 16 Adjusting .............................................. 34 Deactivating.................................... 72
Problems with your vehicle.................. 17 Seats............................................... 34 Driving safety systems ......................... 73
Reporting safety defects...................... 18 Steering wheel ................................ 37 ABS................................................. 73
Reporting safety defects ................ 18 Mirrors ............................................ 38 BAS................................................. 74
Driving .................................................. 40 ESP ................................................. 75
Fastening the seat belts.................. 40 The SBC brake system.................... 77
Starting the engine ......................... 43 Anti-theft systems ................................ 81
Switching on headlamps ................. 46 Immobilizer ..................................... 81
Turn signals and high beam ............ 46 Anti-theft alarm system .................. 82
Windshield wipers........................... 47 Tow-away alarm .............................. 82
Contents
Lighting.............................................. 112 One-touch gearshifting ................ 152

Controls in detail ............................... 85 Exterior lamp switch..................... 112 Gear ranges ................................. 153
Locking and unlocking ......................... 86 Combination switch ..................... 115 Gear selector lever position ......... 154
Keys ............................................... 86 Hazard warning flasher ................ 115 Program mode selector switch .... 155
SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO*......... 89 Interior lighting............................. 116 Accelerator position..................... 156
Opening the doors from the inside . 93 Door entry lamps ......................... 117 Emergency operation
Opening the trunk from the inside.. 94 Trunk lamp ................................... 117 (Limp home mode)....................... 156
Opening the trunk .......................... 96 Instrument cluster ............................. 118 Good visibility .................................... 157
Closing the trunk............................ 96 Instrument cluster illumination .... 118 Rear view mirror .......................... 157
Trunk lid emergency release .......... 97 Coolant temperature display........ 119 Headlamp cleaning system* ........ 158
Separately locking the trunk .......... 98 Trip odometer .............................. 119 Sun visors .................................... 158
Separately unlocking the trunk ...... 99 Tachometer.................................. 120 Rear window sunshade* .............. 160
Automatic central locking .............. 99 Outside temperature indicator ..... 120 Roller sunblind* in the rear doors 161
Locking and unlocking from Control system .................................. 121 Climate control.................................. 162
the inside ..................................... 100 Multifunction display.................... 121 Setting the temperature............... 165
Seats.................................................. 102 Multifunction steering wheel........ 122 Adjusting air distribution.............. 166
Easy-entry/exit feature* .............. 102 Menus .......................................... 124 Adjusting air volume .................... 166
Head restraints............................. 103 Standard display menu ................ 126 Defrosting .................................... 167
Multicontour seat* ....................... 104 AUDIO menu ................................ 126 Air recirculation mode.................. 167
Dynamic driving seat* .................. 105 NAVI*........................................... 128 Rear window defroster................. 169
Heated seats* .............................. 107 Distronic* menu........................... 128 Deactivating the climate
Seat ventilation* .......................... 108 Malfunction memory menu .......... 129 control system ............................. 170
Memory function................................ 109 Settings menu .............................. 130 Air conditioner ............................. 170
Storing positions into memory ..... 110 Trip computer menu..................... 145 Residual heat and ventilation* ..... 171
Recalling positions from memory . 110 TEL menu* ................................... 147 Automatic climate control* ............... 172
Storing parking position ............... 111 Automatic transmission..................... 151 Setting the temperature............... 176
Contents
Adjusting air distribution.............. 177 Roof rack ...................................... 216 Driving off ..................................... 252
Adjusting air volume .................... 177 Ski sack* ...................................... 216 Parking ......................................... 252
Defrosting .................................... 178 Split rear bench seat*................... 219 Tires.............................................. 252
Air recirculation mode.................. 178 Folding front passenger seat* ...... 222 Aquaplaning.................................. 253
Charcoal filter .............................. 180 Expanding the cargo area* ........... 223 Tire traction .................................. 253
Rear window defroster ................. 180 Loading instructions ..................... 224 Tire speed rating........................... 254
Air conditioner ............................. 181 Cargo tie-down rings..................... 225 Winter driving instructions............ 254
Residual heat and ventilation ....... 182 Useful features ................................... 226 Standing water ............................. 255
Rear air conditioning .................... 182 Interior storage spaces ................. 226 Passenger compartment............... 255
Power windows.................................. 184 Ashtrays........................................ 231 Traveling abroad ........................... 255
Opening and closing the windows 184 Cigarette lighter............................ 232 Control and operation of radio
Synchronizing power windows ..... 186 12-V socket* ................................ 232 transmitter.................................... 256
Sliding/pop-up roof* ......................... 187 Heated steering wheel* ................ 233 Catalytic converter ....................... 256
Opening and closing the slid- Telephone* ................................... 233 Emission control ........................... 257
ing/pop-up roof* ......................... 187 Tele Aid*....................................... 234 Coolant temperature .................... 258
Synchronizing the Garage door opener...................... 243 At the gas station ............................... 259
sliding/pop-up roof...................... 189 Check regularly and before
Panorama sliding/pop-up roof*......... 190 a long trip ..................................... 260
Panorama sliding/pop-up roof* ... 190 Operation .......................................... 247 Engine compartment .......................... 261
Solar panel*................................. 193 The first 1000 miles (1500km) ........... 248 Hood............................................. 261
Driving systems ................................. 194 Driving instructions ............................ 249 Engine oil ...................................... 262
Cruise control .............................. 194 Drive sensibly – save fuel.............. 249 Transmission fluid level ................ 264
Distronic* .................................... 197 Drinking and driving...................... 249 Coolant level................................. 264
AIRMATIC DC (Dual Control)* ...... 209 Pedals ........................................... 249 Battery.......................................... 266
PARKTRONIC system* ................. 212 Power assistance.......................... 250 Windshield washer system and
Loading.............................................. 216 Brakes........................................... 250 headlamp cleaning system* ......... 267
Contents
Tires and wheels ................................ 268 Replacing bulbs ................................. 332

Important guidelines .................... 268 Practical hints.................................. 287 Bulbs............................................ 332
Life of tire..................................... 269 What to do if … .................................. 288 Replacing bulbs for front lamps ... 334
Direction of rotation ..................... 269 Lamps in instrument cluster ........ 288 Replacing bulbs for rear lamps .... 336
Checking tire inflation pressure ... 269 Lamp in center console................ 294 Replacing wiper blades...................... 337
Rotating wheels............................ 272 Messages in the display ............... 295 Replacing wiper blades ................ 337
Winter driving..................................... 273 Where will I find ...? ........................... 324 Flat tire .............................................. 338
Winter tires................................... 273 First aid kit ................................... 324 Preparing the vehicle ................... 338
Block heater (Canada only) .......... 274 Spare wheel ................................. 324 Mounting the spare wheel ........... 338
Snow chains ................................. 274 Luggage box................................. 325 Batteries............................................ 343
Maintenance ...................................... 275 Vehicle tool kit ............................. 326 Disconnecting the battery............ 344
Flexible Service System PLUS (FSS Unlocking/locking in an emergency .. 327 Removing the battery................... 344
PLUS) ........................................... 275 Unlocking the vehicle................... 327 Charging and reinstalling the
Clearing the service indicator....... 275 Locking the vehicle ...................... 328 battery ......................................... 344
Service term exceeded................. 276 Changing batteries....................... 328 Reconnecting the batteries.......... 345
Calling up the service indicator .... 276 Fuel filler flap emergency release 329 Jump starting ..................................... 346
Resetting the service indicator..... 276 Manually unlocking the Towing the vehicle............................. 348
Setting the date for special works 278 transmission selector lever .......... 330 Towing the vehicle ....................... 348
Calling up the service data Opening/closing in an emergency..... 331 Installing towing eye bolt ............. 350
information................................... 279 Sliding/pop-up roof* or Fuses................................................. 352
Vehicle care ....................................... 280 panorama sliding/pop-up roof* ... 331 Fuse box in passenger
Cleaning and care of vehicle ........ 280 compartment ............................... 352
Contents
Fuels, coolants, lubricants etc............ 366

Technical data ................................. 355 Capacities ..................................... 366 Technical terms ............................... 375
Spare parts service............................ 356 Engine oils .................................... 368
Warranty coverage............................. 357 Engine oil additives ....................... 368
Loss of Service and Warranty Air conditioner refrigerant............. 368 Index ................................................. 381
Information Booklet ..................... 357 Brake fluid..................................... 368
Identification labels ........................... 358 Premium unleaded gasoline.......... 369
Layout of poly-V-belt drive................. 359 Fuel requirements......................... 369
E 320/E 500 ............................... 359 Gasoline additives......................... 369
Engine................................................ 360 Coolants ....................................... 370
Rims and tires.................................... 361 Windshield and headlamp washer
Same-sized tires........................... 361 system .......................................... 372
Minispare wheel........................... 362 Consumer information........................ 373
Sport package.............................. 362 Uniform tire quality grading .......... 373
Electrical system ............................... 363
Main dimensions ............................... 364
Weights.............................................. 365
Contents
Introduction
Product information
Product information
Please observe the following in your own We are unable to make an assessment for Mercedes-Benz original parts as well as
best interest: other products and therefore cannot be conversion parts and accessories ap-
held responsible for them, even if in indi- proved by us are available at your autho-
We recommend using Mercedes-Benz orig-
vidual cases an official approval or authori- rized Mercedes-Benz Center where you will
inal parts as well as conversion parts and
zation by governmental or other agencies receive comprehensive information, also
accessories explicitly approved by us for
should exist. Use of such parts and acces- on permissible technical modifications,
your vehicle model.
sories could adversely affect the safety, and where proper installation will be per-
We have tested these parts to determine performance or reliability of your vehicle. formed.
their reliability, safety and their special Please do not use them.
suitability for Mercedes-Benz vehicles.
9
Introduction
Operator’s Manual
Operator’s Manual
This Operator’s Manual contains a great We continuously strive to improve our Service and warranty information
deal of useful information. We urge you to product, and ask for your understanding
read it carefully and familiarize yourself that we reserve the right to make changes The Service and Warranty Information
with the vehicle before driving. in design and equipment. Therefore, infor- Booklet contains detailed information
mation, illustrations and descriptions in about the warranties covering your
For your own safety and longer service life
this Operator’s Manual might differ from Mercedes-Benz, including:
of the vehicle, we urge you to follow the in-
your vehicle. 앫 New Car Limited Warranty,
structions and warnings contained in this
manual. Ignoring them could result in dam- Optional equipment is also described in 앫 Emission System Warranty,
age to the vehicle or personal injury to you this manual, including operating instruc-
or others. Vehicle damage caused by fail- tions wherever necessary. Since they are 앫 Emission Performance Warranty,
ure to follow instructions is not covered by special-order items, the descriptions and 앫 California, Maine, Massachusetts, and
the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty. illustrations herein may vary slightly from Vermont Emission Control System
the actual equipment of your vehicle. Warranty
Your vehicle may have some or all of the
equipment described in this manual. If there are any equipment details that are (California, Maine, Massachusetts, and
Therefore, you may find explanations for not shown or described in this Operator’s Vermont only),
optional equipment not installed in your Manual, your authorized Mercedes-Benz 앫 State Warranty Enforcement Laws
vehicle. If you have any questions about Center will be glad to inform you of correct (Lemon Laws).
the operation of any equipment, your au- care and operating procedures.
thorized Mercedes-Benz Center will be The Operator’s Manual and Service Book-
glad to demonstrate the proper proce- let are important documents and should be
dures. kept with the vehicle.
10
Introduction
Operator’s Manual
Important notice for California retail (1) the same substantial defect or mal- (3) the vehicle is out of service by reason
buyers and lessees of Mercedes-Benz function results in a condition that is of repair of the same or different sub-
automobiles likely to cause death or serious bodily stantial defects or malfunctions for a
injury if the vehicle is driven, that de- cumulative total of more than
Under California law you may be entitled to fect or malfunction has been subject to 30 calender days. Written notification
a replacement of your vehicle or a refund repair two or more times, and you have should be sent to us, not a dealer, at
of the purchase price or lease price, if directly notified Mercedes-Benz USA, Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC, Customer
Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC and/or its au- LLC in writing of the need for its repair, Assistance Center, One Mercedes
thorized repair or service facilities fail to fix Drive, Montvale, NJ 07645-0350.
(2) the same substantial defect or mal-
one or more substantial defects or mal-
function of a less serious nature than
functions in the vehicle that are covered by
category (1) has been subject to repair
its express warranty after a reasonable
four or more times and you have direct-
number of repair attempts. During the pe-
ly notified us in writing of the need for
riod of 18 months from original delivery of
its repair, or
the vehicle or the accumulation of
18 000 miles (approx. 29 000 km) on the
odometer of the vehicle, whichever occurs
first, a reasonable number of repair at-
tempts is presumed for a retail buyer or
lessee if one or more of the following oc-
curs:
11
Introduction
Operator’s Manual
Maintenance Roadside Assistance Change of address or ownership
The Service Booklet describes all the nec- The Mercedes-Benz Roadside Assistance If you change your address, be sure to
essary maintenance work which should be Program provides factory trained technical send in the "Change of Address Notice"
performed at regular intervals. help in the event of a breakdown. Calls to found in the Service and Warranty Informa-
the toll-free Roadside Assistance number tion Booklet, or simply call the
Always have the Service Booklet with you
Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance
when you take the vehicle to your autho- 1-800-FOR-MERCedes (in the USA)
Center (in the USA) at
rized Mercedes-Benz Center for service. 1-800-387-0100 (in Canada)
1-800-FOR-MER-Cedes, or Customer Ser-
The service advisor will record each ser-
will be answered by Mercedes-Benz Cus- vice (in Canada) at 1-800-387-0100. It is in
vice in the booklet for you.
tomer Assistance Representatives your own interest that we can contact you
24 hours a day, 365 days a year. should the need arise.
For additional information refer to the If you sell your Mercedes, please leave all
Mercedes-Benz Roadside Assistance Pro- literature with the vehicle to make it avail-
gram brochure in your glove box. able to the next operator.
If you bought this vehicle used, be sure to
send in the "Notice of Purchase of Used
Car" found in the Service and Warranty In-
formation Booklet, or call the
Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Cen-
ter (in the USA) at 1-800-FOR-MERCedes,
or Customer Service (in Canada) at
1-800-387-0100.
12
Introduction
Operator’s Manual
Operating your vehicle outside the USA Certain Mercedes-Benz models are avail-
or Canada able for delivery in Europe under our Euro-
pean Delivery Program. For details, consult
If you plan to operate your vehicle in for- your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center or
eign countries, please be aware that: write to:
앫 service facilities or replacement parts In the USA:
may not be readily available,
앫 unleaded gasoline for vehicles with cat- European Delivery Department
alytic converters may not be available; One Mercedes Drive
the use of leaded fuels will damage the Montvale, NJ 07645-0350
catalysts,
In Canada:
앫 gasoline may have a considerably low-
Mercedes-Benz Canada, Inc.
er octane rating, and improper fuel can
European Delivery Department
cause engine damage.
849 Eglinton Avenue East
Toronto, Ontario M4G 2L5
13
Introduction
Where to find it
Where to find it
This Operator’s Manual is designed to pro-
vide comprehensive support information Controls in detail Technical data
for you, the vehicle operator. For you to Here you will find detailed information All important technical data for your vehi-
find information quickly each section has about the equipment installed in your vehicle can be found in this section.
its own reference color: cle. This section expands on the "Getting
started" section and also describes techni-
cal innovations. If you are already familiar Indexes
At a glance with the basic functions of your vehicle, The glossary provides explanations of the
Here you will find an overview of all the this section will be of particular interest to most important technical terms.
controls that can be operated from the you.
driver’s seat. The table of contents and the index are de-
signed to help you find information quickly
Operation and easily.
Getting started Here you will find all the information you The following publications are part of your
Here you will find all the information you need for the proper operation of your vehi- vehicle documentation:
need for your first drive. You should read cle. 앫 this Operator’s Manual
this section first if this is your first
앫 the Service Booklet
Mercedes-Benz vehicle or if you are rent-
ing or borrowing this vehicle. Practical hints Separate operating instructions will be
This section provides fast assistance for provided as required depending on the
dealing with problems you may encounter. equipment options installed in your vehi-
Safety and Security cle.
Here you will find descriptions of the safety
features of your vehicle.
14
Introduction
Symbols
Symbols
The following symbols are found in this 왘 This symbol points to instructions for
Operator’s Manual: Warning! G you to follow.
* Optional equipment is identified 왘 A number of these symbols appearing
Warning notices draw your attention to haz-
with an asterisk. Since standard ards that may endanger your health or life, in succession indicates a multiple-step
equipment varies between models, or the health or life of others. procedure.
the descriptions and illustrations in
컄 Page This symbol tells you where to
this manual may differ slightly from
! look for further information on a
the actual equipment of your vehi-
topic.
cle. Highlights hazards that may result in
damage to your vehicle. 컄컄 This continuation symbol marks
an interrupted procedure which
will be continued on the next
i
page.
Helpful hints or further information you
may find useful. -> In the glossary of technical
terms, this symbol is used to
cross-reference term defini-
tions.
Display Words appearing in the multi-
function display are printed in
the type shown here.
15
Introduction
Operating safety
Operating safety
Proper use of the vehicle
Warning! G
Proper use of the vehicle requires that you
Work improperly carried out on electronic are familiar with the following information
components and associated software could and rules:
cause them to cease functioning. Because
앫 the safety precautions in this manual
the vehicle’s electronic components are in-
terconnected, any modification made may 앫 the "Technical data" section in this
produce an undesired effect on other sys- manual
tems. 앫 traffic rules and regulations
Electronic system malfunctions could seri-
앫 motor vehicle laws and safety stan-
ously impair the operating safety of your ve-
dards
hicle.
Ensure that any repairs or modifications to
electronic components are carried out by an
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
Other improper work or modifications on the
vehicle could also have a negative impact on
the operating safety of the vehicle.
Some safety systems only function while the
engine is running. You should therefore nev-
er turn off the engine while driving.
16
Introduction
Problems with your vehicle
Problems with your vehicle
If you should experience a problem with your vehicle, particularly one that you believe may affect its safe operation, we urge you to
immediately contact your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center to have the problem diagnosed and corrected if required. If the matter is
not handled to your satisfaction, please discuss the problem with the Mercedes-Benz Center management, or if necessary contact us
at one of the following addresses:
In the USA:
Customer Assistance Center
One Mercedes Drive
Montvale, NJ 07645-0350
In Canada:
Customer Relations Department
Mercedes-Benz Canada, Inc.
849 Eglinton Avenue East
Toronto, Ontario, M4G 2L5
17
Introduction
Reporting safety defects
For the USA only:
The following text is published as required of manufacturers under Title 49, Code of U.S. Federal Regulations, Part 575 pursuant to the
"National Traffic and Motor Vehicle Safety Act of 1966".
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a crash or could cause injury or death, you should immediately inform
the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA) in addition to notifying Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it
may order a recall and remedy campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in individual problems between you, your dealer,
or Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC.
To contact NHTSA, you may either call the Auto Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-888-327-4236 (or 366-0123 in Washington, D.C. area) or
write to: NHTSA, U.S. Department of Transportation, Washington, D.C. 20590. You can also obtain other information about motor ve-
hicle safety from the Hotline.
18
At a glance
Cockpit
Instrument cluster
Multifunction steering wheel
Center console
Overhead control panel
Door control panel
19
At a glance
Cockpit
Cockpit
20
At a glance
Cockpit
Item Page Item Page Item Page

1 Parking brake pedal 45, 50 8 Headlamp washer button* 158 14 Starter switch 31
2 Hood lock release 261 9 Cruise control lever 15 Front Parktronic* warning 212
3 Steering wheel adjustment 38 앫 Cruise control 201 indicator
stalk 앫 Distronic* 197 16 Overhead control panel 27
Heated steering wheel* 233 10 Instrument cluster 22, 17 Mobile phone/Glasses box 226
4 Parking brake release 45 118 18 Glove box lid release, glove 226
5 Combination switch 11 Multifunction steering 24, box lock
앫 Turn signals 46 wheel 122 19 Glove box 226
앫 Windshield wipers 47 12 Horn 20 Center console 25
앫 High beam 47 13 Lever for voice recognition

system*, see separate
6 Door control panel 28 operating instructions
7 Exterior lamp switch 112
21
At a glance
Instrument cluster
Instrument cluster
22
At a glance
Instrument cluster
Item Page Item Page Item Page

1 L Left turn signal indi- 7 Coolant temperature dis- 10 Clock with:
cator lamp play with: ; Brake warning 291
2 v Electronic Stability 288 • Coolant tempera- 292 lamp, except
Program (ESP) ture warning lamp Canada
warning lamp 8 Tachometer with: 3 Brake warning 291
3 Speedometer 1 Supplemental 290 lamp, Canada only
4 Multifunction display restraint system ? Engine malfunction 293
with: indicator lamp indicator lamp
Basic display with outside 126 - Antilock Brake Sys- 289 11 Fuel display with:
temperature display tem (ABS) malfunc- A Fuel reserve warn- 293
Status indicator with mal- tion indicator lamp ing lamp
function warning message < Seat belt nonusage 293 12 Reset knob for:
Trip odometer 119 warning lamp
앫 Resetting trip 119
5 l Distance warning 289 A High beam head- 115 odometer
lamp1 lamp indicator
앫 Adjusting instrument 118
6 K Right turn signal in- 9 Main odometer with: cluster illumination
dicator lamp 앫 Selector lever position 43 앫 Confirming new time 136
1
Vehicles without Distronic*: Warning lamp without 앫 Program mode 155 settings
function. It illuminates with key in starter switch
position 2. It should go out when the engine is run-
ning.
23
At a glance
Item Page Item Page
1 Multifunction display in 121 4 Menu systems: Press but-
speedometer ton
Operating control sys- 122 è for next system
tem ÿ for previous system
2 Selecting the submenu or 5 Moving within a menu:
setting the volume Press button
ç down/to decrease j for next display
æ up/to increase k for previous display
3 Telephone*: Press button
í to take a call
to dial a call
ì to end a call
to reject an incom-
ing call
24
At a glance
Center console
Center console
Upper part Item Page Item Page
1 Automatic climate control* 172 8 Electronic Stability Pro- 76
2 Audio system, see sepa- gram (ESP) control switch
rate operating instructions 9 Seat heater*, driver’s side 107
3 Seat heater*, front passen- 107 10 Hazard warning flasher 115
ger side switch
4 Rear window sunshade* 160 11 PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF 67
5 Central locking switch 100 warning lamp
6 Opening/closing button 227

for storage tray or CD
changer*, see separate op-
erating instructions
7 Rear seat head restraints 104
switch, folding down
25
At a glance
Center console
Lower part Item Page Item Page

1 Ashtray 231 6 Vehicle level control 209
2 KEYLESS-GO* start/stop 33 switch*
button 7 Thumbwheel for setting 204
3 Selector lever for automat- 43, distance for Distronic*
ic transmission 151 8 Distance warning func- 205
4 Parking assist (Parktronic 212 tion* on/off switch
system)* deactivation 9 Program mode selector for 155
switch automatic transmission
5 Adaptive damping system 209
(ADS)* switch
26
At a glance
Item Page Item Page
1 Rear interior lighting 116 7 Tele Aid (emergency call 234
on/off system) button
2 Automatic interior lighting 116 8 Rear view mirror 157
3 Front interior lighting 116 9 Reading lamps 116
on/off 10 Garage door opener 243
4 Temperature sensor 11 Tow-away alarm button 82
5 Right reading lamp on/off 116 12 Ambient lighting 140
6 Sliding/pop-up roof* or 187, 13 Interior lighting
panorama sliding/pop-up 190
roof* 14 Left reading lamp on/off 117
27
At a glance
Door control panel
Door control panel
Item Page
1 Door handle 93
2 Seat adjustment 35
3 Memory function (for stor- 109
ing seat, mirror and steer-
ing wheel settings)
4 Exterior rear view mirror 39
adjustment
5 Switches for opening/ 184
closing front and rear side
windows, rear window
override switch
6 Trunk lid release switch, 94
Trunk lid opening/closing
system*
28
Getting started
Unlocking
Adjusting
Driving
Parking and locking
29
Getting started
Unlocking
Unlocking
The "Getting started" section provides an Unlocking with the SmartKey 왘 Press unlock button Œ on the key.
overview of the vehicle’s most basic func-
All turn signal lamps blink once. The
tions. First-time Mercedes-Benz owners
locking knobs in the doors move up.
should pay special attention to the infor-
mation given here. 왘 Get in the vehicle and insert the key in
the starter switch.
If you are already familiar with the basic
functions described here, the "Controls in More information can be found in the
detail" section will help you with further in- "Controls in detail" section (컄 page 86).
formation. The corresponding page refer-
ences are at the end of each segment.
SmartKey with remote control

1 ‹ Lock button
2 Š Unlock button for trunk lid
3 Œ Unlock button
4 Â Panic button (컄 page 72)
30
Getting started
Unlocking
Starter switch positions !

Warning! G If the key is left in starter switch
position 0 for an extended period of
When leaving the vehicle always remove the
time, it can no longer be turned in the
key from the starter switch, take the Smart-
starter switch.
Key with KEYLESS-GO* (if so equipped) with
you and lock the vehicle. Do not leave chil- 왘 Remove the key from the starter
dren unattended in the vehicle, or with ac- switch and reinsert.
cess to an unlocked vehicle. Unsupervised If the key can still not be turned, the
use of vehicle equipment may cause serious battery may not be sufficiently
personal injury. charged.
Starter switch
왘 Check the battery and charge it
0 For removing key i if necessary (컄 page 266).
1 Power supply to some electrical con- The SmartKey can only be removed
왘 Get a jump start (컄 page 346).
sumers, such as seat adjustment from the starter switch with the gear
2 Ignition (power supply for all electrical selector lever in position P. To prevent accelerated battery dis-
consumers) and driving position charge or a completely discharged bat-
3 Starting position tery, always remove the key from the
starter switch.
31
Getting started
Unlocking
Unlocking with KEYLESS-GO* i 왘 Grasp the door handle.

To unlock the vehicle, the SmartKey The turn signal lamps blink once. The
Your vehicle comes supplied with two
with KEYLESS-GO must be outside the locking knobs on the doors move up.
SmartKeys with remote controls and a re-
vehicle, no further than approx. 3 feet
movable mechanical key. The locking tabs Pressing the KEYLESS-GO start/stop but-
(1 meter) away from the door.
for the mechanical key portion of the two ton on the selector lever corresponds to
keys are a different color to help distin- turning the key to the various starter
switch positions.
guish each key unit.
Warning! G
The function of the SmartKey overrules the
KEYLESS-GO function. When leaving the vehicle always take the
key and the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO
If you have the KEYLESS-GO function, your
with you, and lock the vehicle. Do not leave
vehicle checks whether the SmartKey with
children unattended in the vehicle, or with
KEYLESS-GO is valid when you grasp the
access to an unlocked vehicle. Unsuper-
door handle. If your key is valid, the doors
vised use of vehicle equipment may cause
will unlock, and you can open them.
serious personal injury.
32
Getting started
Unlocking
Make sure the gear selector lever is set Ignition (or position 2)
to P.
왘 Press the KEYLESS-GO start/stop but-
Do not depress the brake pedal. ton twice.
This supplies power to all electrical
Position 1
consumers. All the lights in the instru-
왘 Press the KEYLESS-GO start/stop but- ment cluster light up.
ton once.
i
This supplies power to some electrical
If you now press the KEYLESS-GO
consumers, such as seat adjustment.
1 KEYLESS-GO start/stop button start/stop button once, the power sup-
Before you press the KEYLESS-GO i ply is again switched off.
start/stop button, the vehicle’s on-board If you now press the KEYLESS-GO
start/stop button twice, the power More information can be found in the
electronics have status 0 (as with key re-
supply is again switched off. "Controls in detail" section (컄 page 89).
moved).
For information on starting the engine us-
ing the KEYLESS-GO start/stop button,
see "Starting with KEYLESS-GO"
(컄 page 44).
33
Getting started
Adjusting
Adjusting
Warning! G Your seat must be adjusted so that you can

correctly fasten your seat belt (컄 page 40).
Warning! G
All seat, head restraint, steering wheel, and Never place hands under the seat or near Children 12 years old and under must never
rear view mirror adjustments, as well as fas- any moving parts while a seat is being ad- ride in the front seat, except in a
tening of seat belts, must be done before justed. Mercedes-Benz authorized BabySmartTM
the vehicle is put into motion. compatible child seat, which operates with
the BabySmartTM system installed in the ve-
Seats Warning! G hicle to deactivate the passenger front air-
bag when it is properly installed. Otherwise
When leaving the vehicle always remove the they will be struck by the airbag when it in-
Warning! G key from the starter switch, take the Smart- flates in a crash. If this happens, serious or
Key with KEYLESS-GO* (if so equipped) with fatal injury will result.
Do not adjust the driver’s seat while driving. you, and lock your vehicle.
According to accident statistics, children
Adjusting the seat while driving could cause The power seats can also be operated with are safer when properly restrained in the
the driver to lose control of the vehicle. the driver’s or passenger door open. Do not rear seating positions than in the front seat-
Never ride in a moving vehicle with the seat leave children unattended in the vehicle, or ing positions. Infants and small children
back reclined. Sitting in an excessively re- with access to an unlocked vehicle. Unsu- must ride in back seats and be seated in an
clined position can be dangerous. You could pervised use of vehicle equipment may appropriate infant or child restraint system,
slide under the seat belt in a collision. If you cause serious personal injury. which is properly secured with the vehicle’s
slide under it, the belt would apply force at seat belt, fully in accordance with the child
the abdomen or neck. That could cause se- seat manufacturer’s instructions.
rious or fatal injuries. The seat back and seat
belts provide the best restraint when the
wearer is in an upright position and belts are
properly positioned on the body.
34
Getting started
Adjusting
Seat adjustment 왘 Open the driver’s or passenger door.

Infants and small children must be seated in
an appropriate infant or child restraint sys- The seat adjustment switches are located
Seat height
tem, which is properly secured with the ve- in each door.
hicle’s seat belt, fully in accordance with the 왘 Press the switch up or down in the di-
child seat manufacturer’s instructions. rection of arrow 2.
A child’s risk of serious or fatal injuries is
significantly increased if the child restraints Seat fore and aft adjustment
are not properly secured in the vehicle and 왘 Press the switch forward or backward
the child is not properly secured in the child in the direction of arrow 1.
restraint.
Adjust to a comfortable seating posi-
tion that still allows you to reach the
accelerator/brake pedal safely. The
1 Seat fore and aft adjustment position should be as far to the rear as
2 Seat height possible, consistent with ability to
3 Seat cushion tilt properly operate controls.
4 Backrest tilt
i
5 Head restraint height
When moving the seat, be sure that
왘 Turn the key in the starter switch to there are no items in the footwell or be-
position 1 or 2. hind the seats. Otherwise you could
or damage the seats.
왘 Press the KEYLESS GO* start/stop
button once or twice.
or
35
Getting started
Adjusting
Seat cushion tilt 왘 Press the switch up or down in the di-

왘 Press the switch up or down in the di-
rection of arrow 5. Warning! G
rection of arrow 3 until your upper legs For safety reasons, always drive with the
Front head restraint tilt
are lightly supported. rear head restraints in the upright position
when the rear seats are occupied.
Backrest tilt
Keep the area around head restraints clear
왘 Press the switch forward or backward of articles (e.g. clothing) to not obstruct the
in the direction of arrow 4 until your folding operation of the head restraints.
arms are slightly angled when holding
the steering wheel.
!
Front head restraint height The rear seat head restraints cannot be
adjusted.
Warning! G 왘 Manually adjust the angle of the head
restraint. Push or pull on the lower
For your protection, drive only with properly edge of the head restraint cushion.
positioned head restraints. More information can be found in the
Adjust head restraint to support the back of "Controls in detail" section (컄 page 102).
the head approximately at ear level.
Do not drive the vehicle without the seat Rear seat head restraints
head restraints. Head restraints are intend-
ed to help reduce injuries during an acci- The rear seat head restraints can be folded
dent. backward for increased visibility.
36
Getting started
Adjusting
Folding rear head restraints back with Placing rear head restraints upright Steering wheel
switch in the center console
Warning! G
Do not adjust the steering wheel while driv-
ing. Adjusting the steering wheel while driv-
ing could cause the driver to lose control of
the vehicle.
왘 Pull the head restraint forward until it Key with KEYLESS-GO* (if so equipped) with
1 Head restraint release switch locks into position. you and lock your vehicle.
왘 Turn the electric key in starter switch The electrical steering wheel adjustment
to position 1 or 2. feature can also be operated with the driv-
er’s door open. Do not leave children unat-
왘 Press the symbol-side on rocker
tended in the vehicle, or with access to an
switch 1 to release the head restraints.
unlocked vehicle. Unsupervised use of vehi-
The head restraints will fold backward. cle equipment may cause serious personal
injury.
37
Getting started
Adjusting
Steering wheel adjustment Steering column, lengthen or shorten Mirrors

The stalk is located on the steering column 왘 Move stalk forward or backward in the
Adjust the inside and exterior rear view
(lower left). direction of arrow 1 until a comfortable
mirrors before driving so that you have a
steering wheel position is reached with
good view of the road and traffic condi-
your arms slightly bent at the elbow.
tions.
Steering column, height
왘 Move the stalk up or down in the direc-
Warning! G
tion of arrow 2. Make sure that your In the case of an accident liquid electrolyte
legs can move freely and that all the may escape the mirror housing if the mirror
displays (including malfunction and in- glass breaks.
dicator lamps) on the instrument clus-
ter are clearly visible. Electrolyte has an irritating effect. Do not al-
1 Steering column stalk, adjusts length low the liquid to come into contact with
2 Steering column stalk, adjusts height eyes, skin, clothing, or respiratory system.
왘 Turn the key in the starter switch to In case it does, immediately flush affected
position 1 or 2. area with water, and seek medical help if
or necessary.
왘 Press the KEYLESS GO* start/stop

Inside rear view mirror
button once or twice.
or 왘 Manually adjust the inside rear view
mirror.
왘 Open the driver or passenger door.
More information can be found in the
"Controls in detail" section (컄 page 157).
38
Getting started
Adjusting
Exterior rear view mirror The buttons are on the driver’s door. !
If an exterior rear view mirror housing
Warning! G is forcibly pushed forward or backward,
reposition it by applying firm pressure
Exercise care when using the passenger until it snaps into place. The mirror
side exterior rear view mirror. The mirror housing is now properly positioned and
surface is convex (outwardly curved surface you can adjust the mirror normally.
for a wider field of view). Objects in mirror
are closer than they appear. Check your in- i
side rear view mirror or glance over your
At low ambient temperatures, the mir-
shoulder before changing lanes.
1 Passenger side mirror rors will be heated automatically.
2 Adjustment button
! 3 Driver’s side mirror More information can be found in the
Electrolyte drops coming into contact "Controls in detail" section (컄 page 157).
왘 Make sure that the ignition is switched
with the vehicle paint finish can only be
on.
completely removed while in their liq-
uid state and by applying plenty of wa- All the lights in the instrument cluster
ter. light up.
왘 Press button 3 for the left mirror or
button 1 for the right mirror.
왘 Push adjustment button 2 up, down,
left or right according to the setting de-
sired.
39
Getting started
Driving
Driving
Fastening the seat belts
Warning! G In the same crash, the possibility of injury or
death is lessened if you are wearing your
Do not lay any objects in the driver’s foot- Warning! G seat belt. The airbags can only protect as ex-
pected if the occupants are using their seat
well. Be careful that floor mats or carpets in
the driver’s footwell have sufficient clear- belts (컄 page 61).
Always fasten your seat belt before driving
ance for the pedals. off. Always make sure your passengers are
properly restrained, even those sitting in the
During sudden driving or braking maneuvers
rear and pregnant women. Warning! G
the objects could get between the pedals.
You could then no longer brake or acceler- Failure to wear and properly fasten and po- Children 12 years old and under must never
ate. sition your seat belt greatly increases your ride in the front seat, except in a
risk of injuries and their likely severity in an Mercedes-Benz authorized BabySmartTM
accident. You and your passenger should al- compatible child seat, which operates with
ways wear seat belts. the BabySmartTM system installed in the ve-
If you are ever in an accident, your injuries hicle to deactivate the passenger front air-
can be considerably more severe without bag when it is properly installed. Otherwise
your seat belt properly buckled. Without they will be struck by the airbag when it in-
your seat belt buckled, you are much more flates in a crash. If this happens, serious or
likely to hit the interior of the vehicle or be fatal injury will result.
ejected from it. You can be seriously injured
or killed.
40
Getting started
Driving
According to accident statistics, children

are safer when properly restrained in the
Warning! G
rear seating positions than in the front seat- Never ride in a moving vehicle with the back-
ing positions. Infants and small children rest reclined. Sitting in an excessively re-
must ride in back seats and be seated in an clined position can be dangerous. You could
appropriate infant or child restraint system, slide under the seat belt in a collision. If you
which is properly secured with the vehicle’s slide under it, the belt would apply force at
seat belt, fully in accordance with the child the abdomen or neck. That could cause se-
seat manufacturer’s instructions. rious or even fatal injuries. The backrest and
A child’s risk of serious or fatal injuries is seat belt provide the best restraint when the
significantly increased if the child restraints wearer is in an upright position and the belt
are not properly secured in the vehicle and is properly positioned on the body.
the child is not properly secured in the child
restraint.
Warning! G
Warning! G Read and observe the additional warning no-
tices printed in the “Safety and security”
Never let more people ride in the vehicle section (컄 page 61).
than there are seat belts available. Be sure 1 Retractor
everyone riding in the vehicle is correctly re- 2 Latch plate
strained with a separate seat belt. 3 Buckle
4 Release button
41
Getting started
Driving
왘 Place the belt over your shoulder. Proper use of seat belts 앫 Position the lap belt as low as possible
on your hips (over hip joint) and not
왘 Push latch plate 2 into buckle 3 until it 앫 Do not twist the belt when fastening.
across the abdomen.
clicks.
앫 Adjust seat belt so that the shoulder
앫 Place the seat backrest in a nearly up-
왘 If necessary, tighten the lap portion to portion is located as close as possible
right position.
a snug fit by pulling shoulder portion to the middle of the shoulder (it should
up. not touch the neck or pass under the 앫 Each seat belt should never be used for
arm). more than one person at a time.
Belt outlet height adjustment 앫 Do not fasten a seat belt around a per-
son and another object at the same
time.
앫 Check your seat belt during travel to
ensure that it is properly positioned.
앫 Ensure that the seat belt is always fit-
ted snugly. You should avoid wearing
bulky clothing, such as winter coats,
when traveling in the vehicle.
1 Release button
왘 Press release button 1 and move the
seat belt height adjuster upward or
downward.
42
Getting started
Driving
Starting the engine Automatic transmission

Warning! G
Do not pass belts over sharp edges. They Warning! G
could tear.
Do not allow the belt to get caught in the Inhalation of exhaust gas is hazardous to
door or in the seat adjustment mechanism. your health. All exhaust gas contains carbon
This could damage the belt. monoxide, and inhaling it can cause uncon-
sciousness and lead to death.
Never attempt to make modifications to
seat belts. This could impair the effective- Do not run the engine in confined areas
ness of the belts. (such as a garage) which are not properly
ventilated. If you think that exhaust gas Gearshift pattern for automatic
Damaged seat belts or belts that were highly transmission
fumes are entering the vehicle while driving,
stressed in an accident must be replaced by P Park position with selector lever lock
have the cause determined and corrected
an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. R Reverse gear
immediately. If you must drive under these
conditions, drive only with at least one win- N Neutral
dow fully open. D Drive position
왘 Make sure that the gear selector lever
is set to P.
43
Getting started
Driving
Starting with the key Starting difficulties

왘 Turn the key in the starter switch to !
position 3 and hold until the engine
Ensure that the brake pedal is de-
starts (컄 page 31).
pressed when starting the engine.
i
You can also use the "touch-start" func- If the engine does not start as described,
tion. Turn the key to position 3 and re- carry out the following steps:
lease it again immediately. The engine 왘 If you are starting the engine with the
then starts automatically. key, turn key in starter switch to
1 KEYLESS-GO start/stop button position 0 and repeat starting proce-
왘 Depress the brake pedal. 왘 Depress the brake pedal during the dure.
The selector lever lock is released. starting procedure. Do not depress ac- 왘 If you are starting the engine with
celerator. KEYLESS-GO*: Close any doors that
For information on turning off the engine
The selector lever lock is released. may be open to allow for better detec-
with the key, see “Turning off the engine”
tion of the SmartKey with
(컄 page 51). 왘 Press KEYLESS-GO start/stop
KEYLESS-GO*.
button 1 once.
Or:
Starting with KEYLESS-GO*
The engine starts automatically. Start the engine with the key as radio
You can start your vehicle without a key signals from another source may be in-
For information on turning off the engine
using the KEYLESS-GO start/stop button terfering with the SmartKey with
with KEYLESS-GO, see “Turning off with
on the gear selector lever. KEYLESS-GO*.
KEYLESS-GO*” (컄 page 53).
왘 Repeat the starting procedure
(컄 page 43). Remember that extended
starting attempts can drain the battery.
44
Getting started
Driving
왘 Get a jump start (컄 page 346). i

If the engine does not start after several
Warning! G Wait for the gear selection process to
starting attempts, there could be a mal- complete before setting the vehicle in
function in the engine electronics or in the motion.
fuel supply system. Key with KEYLESS-GO* (if so equipped) with
왘 Release the brake pedal.
왘 Notify an authorized Mercedes-Benz you and lock the vehicle. Do not leave chil-
Center. dren unattended in the vehicle, or with ac- 왘 Carefully depress the accelerator
cess to an unlocked vehicle. Children could pedal.
Parking brake release the parking brake, which could re-
Once the vehicle is in motion, the automat-
sult in an accident or serious injury.
ic central locking system engages and the
locking knobs drop down.
왘 Release the parking brake by pulling on
handle 2. i
The indicator lamp ; (USA only) or You can open a locked door from the
3 (Canada only) in the clock goes inside. Open door only when conditions
out. are safe to do so.
Driving !
1 Parking brake pedal 왘 Depress the brake pedal. If you hear a warning signal when driv-
2 Parking brake release handle ing off, you have forgotten to release
왘 Move selector lever to position D or R. the parking brake.
Release the parking brake.
45
Getting started
Driving
After a cold start the automatic transmis- More information on driving can be found Turn signals and high beam
sion engages at a higher revolution. This al- in the "Operation" section (컄 page 249).
lows the catalytic converter to reach its The combination switch is on the left of the
operating temperature earlier. Switching on headlamps steering column.
Warning! G
On slippery road surfaces, never downshift
in order to obtain braking action. This could
result in drive wheel slip and reduced vehi-
cle control. Your vehicle’s ABS will not pre-
vent this type of loss of control.
Combination switch
Warning! G Exterior lamp switch
1 Turn signals, right
1 Off
It is dangerous to shift the selector lever out 2 Turn signals, left
2 Low beam headlamps on
of P or N if the engine speed is higher than 왘 Press the combination switch up 1 or
idle speed. If your foot is not firmly on the 왘 Turn the switch to B.
down 2.
brake pedal, the vehicle could accelerate More information can be found in the
quickly forward or in reverse. You could lose "Controls in detail" section (컄 page 112). i
control of the vehicle and hit someone or To signal minor directional changes,
something. Only shift into gear when the en- move combination switch to point of
gine is idling normally and when your right resistance only and release. The turn
foot is firmly on the brake pedal. signal blinks three times.
46
Getting started
Driving
High beam Windshield wipers 0 Windshield wipers off

왘 Push the combination switch forward. I Intermittent wiping (interval depen-
The combination switch is on the left of the
dent on wetness of windshield)
The high beam headlights are switched steering column.
on. II Normal wiper speed
The high beam symbol A in the III Fast wiper speed
tachometer lights up.
More information can be found in the i
"Controls in detail" section (컄 page 115). The intermittent wiping interval is de-
pendent on wetness of windshield.
Wiping will not occur with a door open.
Do not leave windshield wipers in inter-
mittent setting when vehicle is taken to
an automatic car wash or during wind-
Combination switch shield cleaning. Wipers will operate in
1 Single wipe the presence of water sprayed on the
2 Switching on windshield wipers windshield, and wipers may be dam-
aged as a result.
The switch should not be left in inter-
on.
mittent setting as the wipers will wipe
the windshield once every time the en-
Switching on windshield wipers
gine is started. Dust that accumulates
왘 Turn the combination switch to the de- on the windshield might scratch the
sired position depending on the inten- glass when wiping occurs on a dry
sity of the rain. windshield.
47
Getting started
Driving
Single wipe ! Problems while driving

왘 Press switch briefly in the direction of If leaves, snow, etc. block the wind-
arrow 1. shield wipers, switch off the wipers. The engine runs erratically and misfires
The windshield wipers wipe one time 앫 For safety reasons, withdraw key 앫 An ignition cable may be damaged.
without washer fluid. from starter switch. Remove block-
앫 The engine electronics may not be op-
age.
erating properly.
Wiping with windshield washer fluid 앫 Turn the windshield wipers on
앫 Unburned gasoline may have entered
왘 Push switch in the direction of arrow 1 again.
the catalytic converter and damaged it.
past the resistance point. If windshield wipers fail to function at
왘 Give very little gas.
The windshield wiper operates with all in switch position I,
washer fluid. 왘 Have the problem repaired by an au-
앫 Set the combination switch to the
next highest wiper speed. thorized Mercedes-Benz Center as
Information on filling up the washer reser-
soon as possible.
voir can be found in the "Operation" sec- 앫 Have the windshield wipers
tion (컄 page 267). checked at the nearest authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center.
48
Getting started
Driving
The coolant temperature is over 248°F In case of accident If no damage can be determined on the
(120°C)
If the vehicle is leaking gasoline: 앫 major assemblies
The coolant is too hot and is no longer
왘 Do not start the engine under any cir- 앫 fuel system
cooling the engine.
cumstances. 앫 engine mount
왘 Stop the vehicle as soon as possible 왘 Notify local fire and/or police authori-
and turn off the engine. Allow engine 왘 Start the engine in the usual manner.
ties.
and coolant to cool.
If the extent of the damage cannot be de-
왘 Check the coolant level and add cool-
termined:
ant if necessary (컄 page 264).
왘 Notify an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center.
49
Getting started
Parking and locking
Parking and locking
You have now completed your first drive. Parking brake
You have properly stopped and parked Warning! G
your vehicle. End your drive as follows.
Do not park this vehicle in areas where com-
bustible materials such as grass, hay or
Warning! G leaves can come into contact with the hot
exhaust system, as these materials could be
Wait until the vehicle is stationary before re-
ignited and cause a vehicle fire.
moving the key from the starter switch. The
vehicle cannot be steered when the key is To reduce the risk of personal injury as a re-
removed. sult of vehicle movement, before turning off
the engine and leaving the vehicle always:
앫 Keep right foot on brake pedal. 1 Parking brake
Warning! G 앫 Firmly depress parking brake pedal. 2 Release handle
앫 Move the selector lever to position P. 왘 Step firmly on parking brake 1.
With the engine not running, there is no
power assistance for the brake and steering 앫 Slowly release brake pedal. When the engine is running, the indica-
systems. In this case, it is important to keep 앫 When parked on an incline, turn front tor lamp ; (USA only) or 3
in mind that a considerably higher degree of wheel towards the road curb. (Canada only) in the instrument cluster
effort is necessary to stop or steer the vehi- 앫 Turn the key to starter switch position 0 will be illuminated.
cle. and remove, or press start-/stop button
(vehicles with KEYLESS-GO*).
앫 Take the key or the SmartKey with KEY-
LESS-GO* (if so equipped) and lock ve-
hicle when leaving.
50
Getting started
Parking and locking
Switching off headlamps

Warning! G Warning! G
왘 Turn the switch to M (컄 page 46).
When leaving the vehicle always remove the Getting out of your vehicle with the selector
key from the starter switch, take the Smart- lever not fully engaged in position P is dan-
Key with KEYLESS-GO* (if so equipped) with gerous. Also, when parked on an incline,
you and lock the vehicle. Do not leave chil- position P alone may not prevent your vehi-
Turning off the engine
dren unattended in the vehicle, or with ac- cle from moving, possibly hitting people or
cess to an unlocked vehicle. Children could objects.
왘 Place the gear selector lever in
release the parking brake and/or move the Always set the parking brake in addition to position P.
gear selector lever from position P, either of shifting to position P.
which could result in an accident or serious
When parked on an incline, turn front wheels
i
injury. Always set the parking brake in addi-
towards the road curb.
tion to shifting to position P.
On steep slopes, turn the front wheels
towards the curb.
51
Getting started
Parking and locking
Turning off with the key

왘 Turn the key in the starter switch to
position 0 and remove it. To prevent possible personal injury, always When leaving the vehicle always remove the
The immobilizer is activated. keep hands and fingers away from the door key from the starter switch and lock your ve-
왘 Press the seat belt release button openings when closing the doors. Be espe- hicle. Do not leave children unattended in
(컄 page 41). cially careful when small children are the vehicle, or with access to an unlocked
around. vehicle. Unsupervised use of vehicle may
i cause serious personal injury.
Before closing doors, ensure that there is no
The SmartKey or the SmartKey with possibility of someone getting caught in a
KEYLESS-GO* (if so equipped) can only door during closing. More information can be found in the
be removed from the starter switch "Controls in detail" section (컄 page 86).
with the gear selector lever in
왘 After exiting the vehicle press the lock
position P.
button ‹ on the key (컄 page 30).
! The locking knobs on the doors move
With the SmartKey removed and the down. The turn signal indicators light
driver’s door open, a warning sounds if up briefly.
the vehicle’s exterior lamps are not
switched off.
52
Getting started
Parking and locking
Turning off with KEYLESS-GO*

왘 Place the gear selector lever in P.
Warning! G
왘 Press the KEYLESS-GO start/stop but- To prevent possible personal injury, always
ton until the engine shuts off. keep hands and fingers away from the door
openings when closing the doors. Be espe-
With the driver's door closed, the start-
cially careful when small children are
er switch is now in position 1. With the
around.
driver’s door opened, the starter switch
is set to position 0, same as key re- Before closing doors, ensure that there is no
moved from starter switch possibility of someone getting caught in a
(컄 page 31). door during closing. 1 Lock button on the door handle
왘 Press the seat belt release button 왘 After exiting the vehicle, press lock
(컄 page 41). button 1 on the door handle or on the
trunk lid.
! The locking knobs on the doors move
If you hear a warning signal you have ei- down. The turn signal indicators light
ther up briefly
앫 forgotten to turn off the lights, or
앫 not put the gear selector lever in P
before opening the driver’s door.
Turn off the lights or place the gear se-
lector lever in P.
53
Getting started
Parking and locking
Warning! G
you, and lock your vehicle. Do not leave chil-
dren unattended in the vehicle, or with ac-
cess to an unlocked vehicle. Unsupervised
use of vehicle equipment may cause serious
personal injury.

54
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
Panic alarm
Driving safety systems
Anti-theft systems
55
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
Occupant safety
In this section you will learn the most im- The 1 warning lamp in the instrument
portant facts about the restraint systems cluster lights up for about 4 seconds when Warning! G
of the vehicle. you turn the key in the starter switch to
position 1 or 2 or press the KEYLESS-GO* In the event that the SRS malfunction indica-
The restraint systems are tor lamp lights up during driving or does not
(if so equipped) start/stop button once or
앫 Seat belts twice. It goes out when you start the en- come at all, the SRS may not be operational.
gine. This shows that the restraint systems For your safety, we strongly recommend
앫 Emergency tensioning device
are operational. that you visit an authorized Mercedes-Benz
앫 Airbags Center immediately to have the system
If the lamp does not come on at all or if it checked; otherwise the SRS may not be ac-
앫 Child seats fails to extinguish after approximately tivated when needed in an accident, which
앫 Child seat recognition 4 seconds or if it comes on thereafter, a could result in serious or fatal injury, or it
malfunction in the system has been de- might deploy unexpectedly and unnecessar-
As independent systems their protective
tected. ily which could also result in injury.
effects work in conjunction with each oth-
er. More information can be found in the Improper work on the restraint systems, in-
"Practical hints" section (컄 page 290). cluding incorrect installation and removal,
i can lead to possible injury through an unin-
For information on infants and children tended activation of the SRS.
traveling with you in the vehicle and re-
In addition, through improper work there is
straint systems for infants and chil-
a risk of rendering the SRS inoperative or
dren, see “Children in the vehicle”
causing unintended airbag deployment.
(컄 page 65).
Work on the SRS must therefore only be per-
formed by an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center.
56
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
Airbags
Warning! G 앫 Adjust the driver seat as far as possible
rearward, still permitting proper opera-
tion of vehicle controls. The distance
Warning! G To reduce the risk of injury when the front
from the center of the driver’s breast-
airbags inflate, it is very important for the bone to the center of the airbag cover on
Airbags are designed to reduce the potential driver and front passenger to always be in a the steering wheel must be at least ten
of injury in certain frontal (front airbags) improperly seated position and to wear your inches (25 cm) or more. You should be
pacts, or side (side impact and head protec- seat belt. able to accomplish this by a combina-
tion window curtain airbags) impacts which For maximum protection in the event of a tion of adjustments to the seat and
may cause significant injuries. However, no steering wheel. If you have any prob-
collision always be in normal seated position
system available today can totally eliminate lems, please see your authorized
with your back against the backrest. Fasten
injuries and fatalities. Mercedes-Benz Center.
your seat belt and ensure that it is properly
앫 Do not lean with your head or chest
The activation of the SRS temporarily releas- positioned on your body.
close to the steering wheel or dash-
es a small amount of dust from the airbags. Since the airbag inflates with considerable board.
This dust, however, is neither injurious to speed and force, a proper seating and hands
your health, nor does it indicate a fire in the 앫 Keep hands on the outside of steering
on steering wheel position will help to keep wheel rim. Placing hands and arms in-
vehicle. The dust might cause some tempo- you at a safe distance from the airbag. Oc- side the rim can increase the risk and
rary breathing difficulty for people with asth- cupants who are unbelted, out of position or potential severity of hand/arm injury
ma or other breathing trouble. To avoid this, too close to the airbag can be seriously in- when driver front airbag inflates.
you may wish to get out of the vehicle as jured by an airbag as it inflates with great 앫 Adjust the front passenger seat as far as
soon as it is safe to do so. If you have any force in the blink of an eye: possible rearward from the dashboard
breathing difficulty but cannot get out of the
앫 Sit properly belted in an upright position when the seat is occupied.
vehicle after the airbag inflates, then get
with your back against the backrest.
fresh air by opening a window or door.
57
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
앫 Occupants, especially children, should

never lean their heads in the area of the
Warning! G result in serious injuries or death should
the side airbag be activated.
door where the side airbag inflates. This
Accident research shows that the safest (2) Always sit upright, properly use the seat
could result in serious injuries or death
should the airbag be triggered. Always place for children in an automobile is in the belts and use an appropriately sized in-
sit upright, properly use the seat belts rear seat. Should you choose to place a child fant or child restraint system for all chil-
and appropriate size infant or child re- 12 years old or under in the front passenger dren 12 years old or under.
straint system. seat of your vehicle, you must properly use (3) Always wear seat belts properly.
앫 Children 12 years old and under must a BabySmartTM child restraint which will
turn off the passenger front airbag. BabyS- If you believe that, even with the use of
never ride in the front seat, except in a
martTM will not, however, turn off any side these guidelines, it would be safer for your
Mercedes-Benz authorized
rear seat occupants to have the rear mount-
BabySmartTM compatible child seat, impact airbag.
which operates with the BabySmartTM ed side airbags deactivated, then deactiva-
It should be noted that with respect to both tion can be accomplished upon your written
system installed in the vehicle to deacti-
front and rear side impact airbags there is a request to do so at your authorized Mer-
vate the passenger front airbag when it
possibility for a side airbag related injury if cedes-Benz Center at an additional cost.
is properly installed. Otherwise they will
be struck by the airbag when it inflates occupants, especially children, are not prop-
erly seated or restrained when next to a side Please contact your local authorized
in a crash. If this happens, serious or fa-
airbag which needs to deploy rapidly in a Mercedes-Benz Center or call our Customer
tal injury will result.
side impact in order to do its job. Assistance Center at 1-800-FOR-MERCedes
Failure to follow these instructions can re- (1-800-367-6372) for details.
sult in severe injuries to you or other occu- To help avoid the possibility of injury, please
pants. follow these guidelines:
If you sell your vehicle you are responsible (1) Occupants, especially children, should
to make the buyer aware of these points. Be never place their bodies or lean their
sure to give the buyer this Operator’s Manu- heads in the area of the door where the
al. side airbag inflates. This could
58
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
i We caution you not to rely on the pres- Safety guidelines for the seat belt,
Airbags are designed to activate only in ence of the airbags in order to avoid emergency tensioning device and
certain frontal impacts (front air bags), wearing your seat belt. airbag
side impacts (side impact and head Your vehicle was originally equipped
protection window curtain airbags) with airbags that are designed to acti- Warning! G
which exceed preset thresholds and in vate in certain impacts exceeding a
rollovers (head protection window cur- preset threshold to reduce the poten- 앫 Damaged seat belts or belts that were
tain airbags). Only during these events tial and severity of injury. It is important highly stressed in an accident must be
will they provide their supplemental replaced and their anchoring points
to your safety and that of your passen-
protection. must also be checked. Use only belts in-
gers that you replace deployed airbags
stalled or supplied by an authorized
The driver and passengers should al- and repair any malfunctioning airbags Mercedes-Benz Center.
ways wear their seat belts. Otherwise it to ensure that the vehicle will continue
앫 Airbags and ETDs are designed to func-
is not possible for airbags to provide to provide supplemental crash protec-
tion on a one-time-only basis. An airbag
their supplemental protection. tion for occupants.
In case of other types of impacts and
impacts below air bag deployment
thresholds, airbags will not be activat-
ed. The driver and passenger will then
be protected to the extent possible by
a properly fastened seat belt. A proper-
ly fastened seat belt is also needed to
provide the best possible protection in
a rollover.
59
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
When you sell your vehicle we strongly

or emergency tensioning device (ETD) 앫 An airbag system component within the
steering wheel gets hot after the airbag urge you to give notice to the subsequent
that was activated must be replaced.
has inflated. Do not touch. owner that it is equipped with an SRS by
앫 No modifications of any kind may be alerting them to the applicable section in
made to any components or wiring of 앫 Improper work on the system, including
the Operator’s Manual.
the SRS. This includes changing or re- incorrect installation and removal, can
moving any component or part of the lead to possible injury through an unin-
tended activation of the SRS. Front airbags
SRS, the installation of additional trim
material, badges etc. over the steering 앫 In addition, through improper work
wheel hub, front passenger airbag cov- there is a risk of rendering the SRS inop-
er, door trim panels, or door frame erative or causing unintended airbag de-
trims, and installation of additional elec- ployment. Work on the SRS must
trical/electronic equipment on or near therefore only be performed by an au-
SRS components and wiring. Keep area thorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
between airbags and occupants free
앫 For your protection and the protection
from objects (e.g. packages, purses,
of others, when scrapping the airbag
umbrellas, etc.).
unit or emergency tensioning device,
앫 Do not pass belts over sharp edges. our safety instructions must be fol-
They could tear. lowed. These instructions are available 1 Driver airbag
앫 Do not make any modification that could from your authorized Mercedes-Benz 2 Passenger airbag
change the effectiveness of the belts. Center.
Driver and passenger airbags are de-
앫 Do not hang items such as coat hangers 앫 Given the considerable deployment
ployed:
from the coat hooks or handles over the speed and the textile structure of the
door. These items may turn into projec- airbags, there is the possibility of abra- 앫 in the event of a frontal impact
tiles and cause head and other injuries sions or other injuries resulting from air-
앫 if impact exceeds a preset deployment
when curtain airbag is deployed. bag deployment.
threshold
60
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
앫 independently of the side impact air- Side impact airbags, window curtain The side impact airbags are not deployed
bags airbags in impacts which do not exceed the sys-
tem’s deployment threshold.
The airbags will not deploy in impacts
which do not exceed the system’s deploy-
Seat belts
ment thresholds. You will then be protect-
ed by the fastened seat belts.
The seat belt nonusage warning lamp <
The front passenger airbag will only be de- in the instrument cluster lights up and a
ployed if: warning sounds for a short time when you
앫 the front passenger seat is occupied turn the key in the starter switch to
position 2 or press the KEYLESS-GO* (if so
앫 the PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicator equipped) start/stop button twice and the
lamp in the center console is not lit drivers seat belt is not fastened.
1 Side impact airbags
(컄 page 67)
2 Window curtain airbag After starting the engine the seat belt non-
! The side impact airbags and window cur- usage warning lamp blinks for a brief peri-
Do not place objects heavier than 20 tain airbags are deployed: od to remind the driver and passengers to
lbs (9 kg) on the front passenger seat. fasten the seat belts.
앫 on the impacted side of the vehicle
This could cause the front or side im- The use of seat belts and infant and child
pact airbag on the front passenger side 앫 in impacts exceeding a preset deploy- restraint systems is required by law in
to deploy in a crash which exceeds the ment threshold most states and all Canadian provinces.
system's deployment threshold. 앫 independently of the front airbags Even where this is not the case, all vehicle
occupants should have their seat belts fas-
The front passenger side airbag will only
tened whenever the vehicle is in motion.
deploy if the system senses that the front
passenger seat is occupied.
61
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
Information on fastening seat belts is

found in the "Getting started" section Warning! G Warning! G
(컄 page 40).
Always fasten your seat belt before driving Never ride in a moving vehicle with the back-
i off. Always make sure your passengers are rest reclined. Sitting in an excessively re-
For information on infants and children properly restrained, even those sitting in the clined position can be dangerous. You could
traveling with you in the vehicle and re- rear and pregnant women. slide under the seat belt in a collision. If you
straint systems for infants and chil- Failure to wear and properly fasten and po- slide under it, the belt would apply force at
dren, see "Children in the vehicle" sition your seat belt greatly increases your the abdomen or neck. That could cause se-
(컄 page 65). risk of injuries and their likely severity in an rious or even fatal injuries. The backrest and
accident. You and your passengers should seat belt provide the best restraint when the
always wear seat belts. wearer is in an upright position and the belt
is properly positioned on the body.
If you are ever in an accident, your injuries
can be considerably more severe without
your seat belt properly buckled. Without
your seat belt buckled, you are much more
Warning! G
likely to hit the interior of the vehicle or be
Never let more people ride in the vehicle
ejected from it. You can be seriously injured
than there are seat belts available. Be sure
or killed.
everyone riding in the vehicle is correctly re-
In the same crash, the possibility of injury or strained with a separate seat belt.
death is lessened if you are properly wearing
your seat belt. Airbags can only protect as
they are designed if the occupants are prop-
erly wearing their seat belts.
62
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
Warning! G Warning! G 앫 Never wear the shoulder belt under your

arm, against your neck or off your shoul-
der. In a crash, your body would move
Damaged seat belts or belts that were highly USE SEAT BELTS PROPERLY
too far forward. That would increase the
stressed in an accident must be replaced 앫 Seat belts can only work when used chance of head and neck injuries. The
and their anchoring points must also be properly. Never wear seat belts in any belt would also apply too much force to
checked. other way than as described in this sec- the ribs or abdomen, which could se-
Only use seat belts which have been ap- tion, as that could result in serious inju- verely injure internal organs such as
proved by Mercedes-Benz. ries in case of an accident. your liver or spleen.
앫 Each occupant should wear their seat 앫 Never wear belts over rigid or breakable
Do not make any modifications to the seat
belt at all times, because seat belts help objects in or on your clothing, such as
belts. This can lead to unintended activation
reduce the likelihood of and potential eyeglasses, pens, keys etc., as these
or to failure. severity of injuries in accidents, includ- might cause injuries.
Have all work carried out only by an autho- ing rollovers. The integrated restraint 앫 Position the lap belt as low as possible
rized Mercedes-Benz Center. system includes SRS (driver airbag, on your hips and not across the abdo-
front passenger airbag, side impact air- men. If the belt is positioned across your
bags, head protection window curtain abdomen, it could cause serious injuries
airbags for side windows), ETD (seat belt in a crash.
emergency tensioning device), and front
seat knee bolsters. The system is de-
signed to enhance the protection of-
fered to properly belted occupants in
certain frontal (front airbags) and side
(side impact and window curtain air-
bags) impacts which exceed preset de-
ployment thresholds.
63
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
Emergency tensioning device (ETD), In an impact, emergency tensioning devic-

앫 Each seat belt should never be used for
more than one person at a time. Do not seat belt force limiter es remove slack from the belts in such a
fasten a seat belt around a person and way that the seat belts fit more snugly
The seat belts for the front and rear outer
another person or other objects. against the body. Belt force limiters reduce
seats are equipped with emergency ten-
the force exerted by the seat belts on oc-
앫 Belts should not be worn twisted. In a sioning devices and belt force limiters.
crash, you wouldn’t have the full width cupants during a crash.
The ETD is designed to activate in the fol-
of the belt to manage impact forces. The
lowing cases when the seat belts are fas-
twisted belt against your body could
tened: Warning! G
cause injuries.
앫 Pregnant women should also use a 앫 In frontal or rear-end impacts exceed- An emergency tensioning device (ETD) that
lap-shoulder belt. The lap belt portion ing a preset severity level was activated must be replaced.
should be positioned as low as possible
앫 If the ignition is switched on When scrapping the emergency tensioning
on the hips to avoid any possible pres-
sure on the abdomen. device, our safety instructions must be fol-
lowed. These are available at your autho-
앫 Never place your feet on the instrument
rized Mercedes-Benz Center.
panel or on the seat. Always keep both
feet on the floor in front of the seat.
64
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
! Children in the vehicle All lap-shoulder belts except the driver’s

Do not place objects heavier than 20 seat belt have special seat belt retractors
lbs (9 kg) on the front passenger seat. If an infant or child is traveling with you in for secure fastening of child restraints.
This could cause the front or side im- the vehicle:
To fasten a child restraint, follow child re-
pact airbag on the front passenger side 앫 Secure the child using an infant or child straint instructions for mounting. Then pull
to deploy in a crash which exceeds the restraint appropriate to the age and the shoulder belt out completely and let it
system's deployment threshold. size of the child and recommended for retract. During seat belt retraction, a ratch-
use by Mercedes-Benz. eting sound can be heard to indicate that
Automatic comfort-fit feature seat belt 앫 Ensure that the infant or child is prop- the special seat belt retractor is activated.
erly secured by a belt at all times while The belt is now locked. Push down on child
An automatic comfort-fit feature for front
the vehicle is in motion. restraint to take up any slack.
seats reduces the retracting force of the
seat belts when they are in normal use. Infant and child restraint seats and infor- To deactivate, release seat belt buckle and
mation on choosing an appropriate re- let seat belt retract completely. The seat
straint system can be obtained from any belt can again be used in the usual man-
Mercedes-Benz Center. ner.
i
Infant and child restraint systems
Information on child seats with mount-
Use only a BabySmartTM compatible child ing fittings for tether anchorages
restraint for the front passenger seat in (컄 page 69).
this vehicle.
For information on LATCH-type child
We recommend all infants and children be seat mounts (컄 page 70).
properly restrained at all times while the
vehicle is in motion. BabySmart TM is a trademark of Siemens
Automotive Corp.
65
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
A statement by the child restraint man-

Warning! G ufacturer of compliance with this stan- Warning! G
dard can be found on the instruction
Never release the seat belt buckle while the Children 12 years old and under must never
label on the restraint and in the instruc-
vehicle is in motion, since the special seat ride in the front seat, except in a
tion manual provided with the restraint.
belt retractor will be deactivated. Mercedes-Benz authorized BabySmartTM
When using any infant or child restraint compatible child seat, which operates with
system, be sure to carefully read and the BabySmartTM system installed in the ve-
! follow all manufacturer’s instructions hicle to deactivate the passenger front air-
The use of infant or child restraints is for installation and use. bag when it is properly installed. Otherwise
required by law in all 50 states, the Dis- they will be struck by the airbag when it in-
trict of Columbia, the U.S. territories Please read and observe warning labels
affixed to the inside of the vehicle and to flates in a crash. If this happens, serious or
and all Canadian provinces. fatal injury will result.
infant or child restraints.
Infants and small children should be According to accident statistics, children
seated in an appropriate infant or child are safer when properly restrained in the
restraint system properly secured by a rear seating positions than in the front seat-
lap-shoulder belt or, if so equipped, a ing positions. Infants and small children
child restraint lower anchorage system must ride in back seats and be seated in an
that complies with U.S. Federal Motor appropriate infant or child restraint system,
Vehicle Safety Standards 213 and 225 which is properly secured with the vehicle’s
and Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety seat belt, fully in accordance with the child
Standard 213. seat manufacturer’s instructions.
66
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
Special BabySmartTM compatible child

Infants and small children should never Do not leave children unattended in the ve-
seats, designed for use with the
share a seat belt with another occupant. hicle, even if the children are secured in a
Mercedes-Benz system and available at
During an accident, they could be crushed child restraint system. Unsupervised chil-
any authorized Mercedes-Benz Center are
between the occupant and seat belt. dren in a child restraint system may use ve-
required for use with the BabySmartTM air-
A child’s risk of serious or fatal injuries is hicle equipment and may cause serious
bag deactivation system. With the special
significantly increased if the child restraints personal injury.
child seat properly installed, the passenger
are not properly secured in the vehicle and front airbag will not deploy.
the child is not properly secured in the child BabySmartTM airbag deactivation
restraint. system The PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicator
lamp 1 located in the center console will
Children too big for child restraint systems be illuminated, except with the key re-
must ride in back seats using regular seat moved or in starter switch position 0.
belts. Position shoulder belt across chest
and shoulder, not face or neck. A booster i
seat may be necessary to achieve proper The system does not deactivate the
belt positioning for children from 41 lbs. to side impact airbag.
the point where a lap/shoulder belt fits
properly without one.
When the child restraint is not in use, re-
move it from the vehicle or secure it with the 1 Indicator lamp
seat belt to prevent the child restraint from
becoming a projectile in the event of an ac-
cident.
BabySmartTM is a trademark of Siemens Automotive

Corp.
67
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
Self-test BabySmartTM without special

child seat installed Warning! G Warning! G
After turning the key in the starter switch The BabySmartTM airbag deactivation sys- When using a BabySmartTM compatible
to position 1 or 2 or pressing the tem will ONLY work with a special child seat child seat on the front passenger seat, the
KEYLESS-GO* (if so equipped) start/stop designed to operate with it. It will not work front passenger airbag will not deploy only if
button once or twice, PASSENGER AIRBAG with child seats which are not BabySmartTM the PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicator lamp
OFF indicator lamp 1 located in the center compatible. remains illuminated.
console lights up for approx. 6 seconds
and then goes out. Never place anything between seat cushion Please be sure to check the indicator every
and child seat (e.g. pillow), since it reduces time you use the special system child seat.
If the indicator lamp should not come on or the effectiveness of the deactivation sys- Should the light go out while the restraint is
is continuously lit, the system is not func- tem. The bottom of the child seat must installed, please check installation. If the
tioning. You must see an authorized make full contact with the passenger seat light remains out, do not use the
Mercedes-Benz Center before seating any cushion. An incorrectly mounted child seat BabySmartTM restraint to transport children
child on the passenger seat. could cause injuries to the child in case of an on the front passenger seat until the system
More information can be found in the accident, instead of protecting the child. has been repaired.
"Practical hints" section (컄 page 294). Follow the manufacturer’s instructions for
installation of special child seats.
68
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
Not foldable rear seat backrest Foldable rear seat backrest*

Warning! G
Do not place powered-on laptops, cell
phones and like electronic devices on the
front passenger seat. Signals from such de-
vices may interfere with the BabySmartTM
system. Such signal interference may cause
the PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicator lamp
not to come on during self-test or be contin-
uously lit, indicating that the system is not
functioning. Vehicles without foldable rear seat back- Vehicles with foldable rear seat backrests
rests
왘 Fold rear seat backrest slightly for-
Installation of infant and child restraint 왘 Remove cover 1 from anchorage ring. ward.
systems 왘 Guide tether strap between head re- 왘 Guide tether strap between head re-
This vehicle is equipped with tether an- straints. straints.
chorages for a top tether strap at each of 왘 Securely fasten the hook 2 to the an- 왘 Securely fasten the hook 2 to the an-
the rear seating positions. chorage ring 3. chorage ring 3.
i 왘 Swing rear seat backrest to the rear un-
For safety, make sure that the hook 2 til it engages.
has attached to the ring 3 beyond the
왘 Check the rear seat backrest to be
safety catch.
locked in its upright position
(컄 page 302).
69
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
Child seat anchors - "LATCH" type 왘 Install child seat according to the
the point where a lap/shoulder belt fits
manufacturer’s instructions.
This vehicle is equipped with two LATCH properly without one.
(Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren) ! Install child seat according to manufactur-
type anchors (at each of the outer rear er’s instructions.
Make sure that the seat belt for the
seats) for the installing of a "LATCH" child
center seat can operate freely with a The child seat must be firmly attached in the
seat with the matching anchor fittings.
child seat installed. right and left side anchors 2.
The anchors are located behind an uphol-
An incorrectly mounted child seat may come
stery blend. i loose during an accident which could result
Non-"LATCH" type child seats may also in serious injury or death to your child.
be used and can be installed using the Damaged or impact damaged child seats or
vehicle’s seat belt system. Install child child seat mounting fittings must be re-
seat according to the manufacturer’s placed.
instructions.
Do not leave children unattended in the ve-
hicle, even if the children are secured in a
Warning! G child restraint system.
Children too big for child restraint systems

must ride in back seats using regular seat
belts. Position shoulder belt across chest
and shoulder, not face or neck. A booster
seat may be necessary to achieve proper
1 Indicates the position of the anchors belt positioning for children from 41 lbs. to
2 Anchors
70
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
Blocking of rear door window operation ! For more information on power windows,
Operation of the rear door windows see the "Controls in detail" section
with the switches located on the door (컄 page 184).
control panel of the driver‘s door is still
possible.
Warning! G
Activate the override switch when children
are riding in the back seats of the vehicle.
1 Override switch The children may otherwise injure them-
2 Indicator lamp selves, e.g. by becoming trapped in the win-
dow opening.
왘 Press override switch 1.
When leaving the vehicle, always remove the
Indicator lamp 2 lights up. The rear key from the starter switch, and lock the ve-
door windows can no longer be operat- hicle. Do not leave children unattended in
ed using the switches located in the the vehicle, or with access to an unlocked
rear doors. vehicle. Unsupervised use of vehicle equip-
ment can cause serious personal injury.
71
Safety and Security
Panic alarm
Panic alarm
An audible alarm and blinking exterior Activating i
lamps will operate for approximately For operation in the USA only: This de-
2½ minutes. 왘 Press and hold button 1 for at least one
vice complies with Part 15 of the
second.
FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the
following two conditions:
Deactivating
(1) This device may not cause harmful
왘 Press button 1 again. interference, and
or (2) this device must accept any inter-
ference received, including interfer-
왘 Insert key in starter switch.
ence that may cause undesired
operation.
Any unauthorized modification to this
1 Â button
device could void the user’s authority
to operate the equipment.
72
Safety and Security
In this section you will find information on ABS
the following driving safety systems: Warning! G
앫 ABS (Antilock Brake System) The following factors increase the risk of ac- Warning! G
앫 BAS (Brake Assist System) cidents:
앫 Excessive speed, especially in turns Do not pump the brake pedal. Use firm,
앫 ESP (Electronic Stability Program)
steady brake pedal pressure instead. Pump-
앫 SBC (Sensotronic Brake Control) 앫 Wet and slippery road surfaces
ing the brake pedal defeats the purpose of
앫 Following another vehicle too closely the ABS and significantly reduces braking
i The ABS, BAS, ESP and SBC cannot reduce effectiveness.
In winter operation, the maximum ef- this risk.
fectiveness of the ABS and the ESP is
Always adjust your driving style to the pre- The ABS regulates the brake pressure so
only achieved with winter tires (M+S
vailing road and weather conditions. that the wheels do not lock during braking.
tires), or snow chains as required.
This allows you to maintain the ability to
steer your vehicle.
The ABS is functional above a speed of ap-
proximately 5 mph (8 km/h) independent
of road surface conditions.
On slippery road surfaces, the ABS will re-
spond even with light brake pressure.
If the ABS activates during braking, the
ESP warning lamp v in the instrument
cluster dial flashes. Because of the SBC
brake system, you will not feel any pulsa-
tion in the brake pedal.
73
Safety and Security
Continuos steady brake pedal pressure BAS

yields the advantagesprovided by the ABS, Warning! G
namely braking power and ability to steer The Brake Assist System (BAS) operates in
the vehicle. The ABS cannot prevent the natural laws of emergency situations. If you apply the
physics from acting on the vehicle, nor can brakes very quickly, the BAS automatically
i it increase braking or steering efficiency be- provides full brake boost, thereby poten-
To alert following vehicles to slippery yond that afforded by the condition of the tially reducing the braking distance. Apply
road conditions you discover, operate vehicle brakes and tires or the traction. The continuous full braking pressure until the
your hazard warning flashers as appro- ABS cannot prevent accidents, including emergency braking situation is over. The
priate. those resulting from excessive speed in ABS will prevent the wheels from locking.
turns, following another vehicle too closely,
When you release the brake pedal, the
The - warning lamp in the instrument or aquaplaning. Only a safe, attentive, and
brakes function again as normal. The BAS
cluster lights up when you turn the key in skillful driver can prevent accidents. The ca-
is then deactivated.
the starter switch to position 2 or press pabilities of an ABS equipped vehicle must
the KEYLESS-GO* (if so equipped) never be exploited in a reckless or danger-
start/stop button twice. It goes out when ous manner which could jeopardize the us-
the engine is running. er’s safety or the safety of others.

"Practical hints" section (컄 page 289).
74
Safety and Security
ESP
The Electronic Stability Program (ESP)
The BAS cannot prevent the natural laws of monitors the vehicle's traction (force of Never switch off the ESP when you see the
physics from acting on the vehicle, nor can adhesive friction between the tires and the ESP warning lamp v flashing in the in-
it increase braking efficiency beyond that af- road surface) and handling. strument cluster. In this case proceed as fol-
forded by the condition of the vehicle brakes lows:
The ESP recognizes when a wheel is spin-
and tires or the traction. The BAS cannot 앫 While driving off, apply as little throttle
ning or if the vehicle starts to skid. By ap-
prevent accidents, including those resulting as possible
plying brakes to the appropriate wheel and
from excessive speed in turns, following an-
by limiting engine output, the ESP works to 앫 While driving ease up on the accelerator
other vehicle too closely, or aquaplaning.
stabilize the vehicle. The ESP is especially 앫 Adapt your speed and driving style to
Only a safe, attentive, and skillful driver can
useful during take-off and on wet or slip- the prevailing road conditions
prevent accidents. The capabilities of a BAS
pery road surfaces. Failure to observe these guidelines could
equipped vehicle must never be exploited in
a reckless or dangerous manner which The ESP warning lamp v in the instru- cause the vehicle to skid.
could jeopardize the user’s safety or the ment cluster flashes when the ESP is en- The ESP cannot prevent accidents resulting
safety of others. gaged. from excessive speed.
The ESP warning lamp v in the instru-
ment cluster lights up when you turn the
key in the starter switch to position 2 or
press the KEYLESS-GO* (if so equipped)
start/stop button twice. It goes out when
the engine is running.
75
Safety and Security
! Switching off the ESP

Warning! G Because of the ESP’s automatic opera-
The ESP cannot prevent the natural laws of
tion, the engine must be shut off (key in Warning! G
starter switch position 0 or 1) when:
physics from acting on the vehicle, nor can
앫 the parking brake is being tested on The ESP should not be switched off during
it increase the traction afforded. The ESP
a brake test dynamometer normal driving other than in the circum-
cannot prevent accidents, including those
stances described below. Disabling of the
resulting from excessive speed in turns, or 앫 the vehicle is being towed with the system will reduce vehicle stability in stan-
aquaplaning. Only a safe, attentive, and front axle raised dard driving maneuvers.
skillful driver can prevent accidents. The ca-
pabilities of an ESP equipped vehicle must Active braking action through the ESP
never be exploited in a reckless or danger- may otherwise seriously damage the To improve the vehicle's traction, turn off
ous manner which could jeopardize the us- rear axle brake system. the ESP in driving situations where it would
er’s safety or the safety of others. The ESP will only function properly if be advantageous to have wheels cut into
you use wheels of the recommended surfaces for better grip such as:
tire size. 앫 starting out on slippery surfaces and in
deep snow in conjunction with snow
More information can be found in the chains
"Practical hints" section (컄 page 288). 앫 in sand or gravel
76
Safety and Security
The switch is located on the center con- ! The SBC brake system
sole. Avoid spinning of one drive wheel for
an extended period with the ESP The SBC brake system combines a hydrau-
switched off. This may cause serious lic brake circuit with electronically con-
damage to the drive train which is not trolled brake servo assistance. You have
covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited increased braking safety and improved
Warranty. braking comfort.
Warning! G
Warning! G
Never ignore a brake malfunction indicated
When the ESP warning lamp v is in the speedometer display, for example by
1 ESP off/on illuminated continuously, the ESP is the ; (USA only) or 3 (Canada only)
왘 Press button 1. switched off. indicator lamp. Refer to the "Practical hints"
Adapt your speed and driving to the prevail- section (컄 page 291). Also read and ob-
The ESP warning lamp v, located in serve the messages in the instrument clus-
ing road conditions and to the non-operating
the instrument cluster comes on. ter display (컄 page 295).
status of the ESP.
Some functions of the ESP remain active,
even when the button is in the OFF posi-
Switching on the ESP
tion.
왘 Press button 1.
The ESP warning lamp v in the instru-
ment cluster starts to flash at any speed as The ESP warning lamp v in the in-
soon as the tires lose traction. strument cluster goes out. You are now
again in normal driving mode.
77
Safety and Security
The SBC brake system is automatically ac-

Warning! G If there is a malfunction in the SBC brake
system, we recommend that the vehicle be
tivated when you:
transported with all wheels off the ground 앫 unlock the vehicle with the key or the
The SBC brake system requires electrical
power to operate. using flatbed or appropriate wheel lift/dolly KEYLESS-GO*
equipment. A tow bar must be used if cir-
A malfunction in the vehicle’s power supply 앫 open the driver’s or passenger door
cumstances do not permit the use of the
or electrical system may impair brake sys- recommended towing methods and the ve- 앫 turn the key in the starter switch to
tem operation and switch it into its hicle requires towing with all four wheels on position 1
limp-home (emergency operation) mode. In the ground. Towing the vehicle with all four 앫 in vehicles with KEYLESS-GO*, press
such a case, the red brake warning lamp wheels on the ground is only permissible start/stop button on selector lever
(컄 page 291) and warning messages in the for distances up to 30 miles (50 km) and at once
instrument cluster (컄 page 305) light up a speed not to exceed 30 mph (50 km/h).
while driving. To brake, the driver must then 앫 depress the brake pedal
For more information, refer to "Towing the
apply significantly greater brake pedal pres- vehicle" (컄 page 348). 앫 release the parking brake
sure and depress the pedal much further to
obtain the expected braking effect. If neces-
sary, apply full pressure to the brake pedal.
Brakes are only applied to the front wheels.
Stopping distance is increased!
78
Safety and Security
i The SBC brake servo assistance switches

If the SBC brake system is activated
Warning! G off automatically when you:
when the brake pedal is first de- 앫 turn the key in the starter switch to
Have brake pad replacement and other work
pressed, you may feel a reduced pedal position 0 or remove the key (after ap-
on the SBC brake system carried out by
resistance and longer pedal travel than proximately two minutes)
qualified technicians only. Contact your au-
normal. When releasing the pedal, you
thorized Mercedes-Benz Center for further 앫 lock the vehicle with the SmartKey
may also feel the brake pedal pulsate
information. The SBC brake system must be from outside (after approximately
and you may hear a sound which is
deactivated prior to working on the system. 20 seconds)
caused by the activation of the SBC
High pressure is intermittently built up in the
pump. This is normal and not an indica-
system as part of its automatic self-test. In Note on driving with the SBC
tion of a malfunction. Pedal travel re-
addition, the system is automatically acti-
turns to normal when you release the 앫 Following extended periods of only mi-
vated when the vehicle is unlocked by re-
brake pedal and the sound soon ceas- nor loads to your brake system, you
mote control, when the driver or passenger
es. should occasionally apply the brakes
door is opened, when the key in the starter
when traveling at high speeds. This im-
switch is turned to position 1, when the
proves the grip of the brake pads.
brake pedal is depressed or when the park-
ing brake is released. Failure to deactivate
the system prior to maintenance will cause Warning! G
brake pistons to extend and brake fluid to
leak, which may result in injuries (contu- Be very careful not to endanger other road
sions and acid burns). Extended brake pis- users when you apply the brakes.
tons may also cause injury.
79
Safety and Security
앫 After driving on wet or snow-covered

roads, you should apply your brakes
firmly before parking your vehicle. This
produces heat which serves to dry the
brake disks and help prevent corro-
sion.
앫 On long and steep grades, shift to a
lower gear (gear range 1, 2 or 3) to pre-
vent the brakes from overheating and
to reduce brake wear.
앫 After hard braking, it is advisable to
drive on for some time so that the air
stream will cool down the brakes fast-
er.
앫 Only Mercedes-Benz approved compo-
nents (e.g. brake pads) should be in-
stalled on your vehicle. Brake pads not
approved by Mercedes-Benz may im-
pair the safety of your vehicle.
80
Safety and Security
Anti-theft systems
Anti-theft systems
Immobilizer Deactivating i
앫 With the key: Inserting the key in the In case the engine cannot be started
The immobilizer prevents unauthorized
starter switch deactivates the immobi- (yet the vehicle’s battery is charged),
persons from starting your vehicle.
lizer. the system is not operational. Contact
an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center
Activating 앫 With KEYLESS-GO*: Starting the en-
or call 1-800-FOR-MERCedes (in the
gine by means of the KEYLESS-GO
앫 With the key: Removing the key from USA), or 1-800-387-0100 (in Canada).
start/stop button on the gear selector
the starter switch activates the immo-
lever deactivates the immobilizer.
bilizer.
앫 With KEYLESS-GO*: Turning off the en-
gine by means of the KEYLESS-GO
start/stop button on the gear selector
lever activates the immobilizer.
81
Safety and Security
Anti-theft systems
Anti-theft alarm system Arming the alarm system With KEYLESS-GO*

The alarm system is armed within approx. 왘 Grasp the outside door handle.
Once the alarm system has been armed, a
10 seconds after locking the vehicle. The
visual and audible alarm is triggered when or
indicator lamp in the button for the
someone opens 왘 Press the KEYLESS-GO* start/stop
tow-away alarm will then blink.
앫 a door button.
앫 the trunk Disarming the alarm system
Tow-away alarm
앫 the hood. The alarm system is disarmed when you
unlock your vehicle with the remote con- Once the tow-away alarm is armed, a visual
The alarm system will also be triggered trol or KEYLESS-GO*. and audible alarm will be triggered when
when
someone attempts to raise the vehicle.
앫 someone attempts to raise the vehicle Canceling the alarm
i
앫 the vehicle is opened with the mechan-
With the key The tow-away protection alarm is trig-
ical key
왘 Insert the key in the starter switch. gered, for example, if the vehicle is lift-
i ed on one side.
or
If the alarm stays on for more than If the alarm stays on for more than
20 seconds, an emergency call is initi- 왘 Press the Œ or ‹ button on the 20 seconds, an emergency call is initi-
ated automatically by the Tele Aid sys- key. ated automatically by the Tele Aid sys-
tem* (컄 page 234), provided that the tem* (컄 page 234), provided that the
Tele Aid service was subscribed to and Tele Aid service was subscribed to and
properly activated. properly activated, and that necessary
cellular service and GPS coverage are
available.
82
Safety and Security
Anti-theft systems
Arming the tow-away alarm The button is located on the overhead con- 왘 Press button 1.
trol panel.
When you lock your vehicle, the tow-away The indicator lamp in the button lights
alarm is automatically armed after about up briefly.
30 seconds.
왘 Lock your vehicle with the key or (vehi-
When you unlock your vehicle, the cles with KEYLESS-GO*) the lock but-
tow-away protection disarms automatical- ton at each door handle.
ly. The tow-away alarm remains disarmed un-
til you lock your vehicle again.
Disarming the tow-away alarm
To prevent triggering the tow-away alarm Canceling the alarm
feature, switch off the tow-away alarm be-
왘 Insert the key in the starter switch.
fore towing the vehicle, or when parking on 1 Tow-away alarm off button
a surface subject to movement, such as a or
왘 Turn off the ignition and remove the
ferry or auto train. key. 왘 Press the Œ or ‹ button on the
key.
i
You cannot disarm the tow-away alarm
if the ignition is turned on.
83
84
Controls in detail
Locking and unlocking
Seats
Memory function
Lighting
Instrument cluster
Control system
Automatic transmission
Good visibility
Climate control
Automatic climate control*
Power windows
Sliding/pop-up roof*
Panorama sliding/pop-up roof*
Driving systems
Loading
Useful features
85
Controls in detail
In the "Controls in detail" section you will Keys
find detailed information on how to oper-
ate the equipment installed on your vehi- Your vehicle comes supplied with two
cle. If you are already familiar with the SmartKeys with remote controls and a re-
basic functions of your vehicle, this section movable mechanical key. The locking tabs
will be of particular interest to you. for the mechanical key portion of the two
keys are a different color to help distin-
To quickly familiarize yourself with the ba-
guish each key unit.
sic functions of the vehicle, refer to the
"Getting started" section of this manual. The SmartKey provides an extended oper-
The corresponding page numbers are giv- ating range. To prevent theft, however, it is
SmartKey with remote controls
en at the beginning of each segment. advisable to only unlock the vehicle when
you are in close proximity to it. 1 ‹ Lock button
2 Š Unlock button for the trunk lid
The Smartkey centrally locks and unlocks
3 Mechanical key locking tab
앫 the doors 4 Œ Unlock button
앫 the trunk 5 Battery check lamp
6 Â Panic button (컄 page 72).
앫 the fuel filler flap
!
i To prevent possible malfunction, avoid
You can also open and close the power exposing the key to high levels of elec-
windows (컄 page 184) and slid- tromagnetic radiation.
ing/pop-up roof* (컄 page 187) or pan-
orama sliding/pop-up roof*
(컄 page 192) using the SmartKey.
86
Controls in detail
Factory setting Selective setting Restoring to factory setting

If you frequently travel alone, you may wish 왘 Press and hold buttons Œ and ‹
Global unlocking
to reprogram the key so that simultaneously for about six seconds
왘 Press button Œ. pressing Œ only unlocks the driver’s until battery check lamp 5 blinks twice.
door and the fuel filler flap.
All turn signal lamps blink once. The
locking knobs in the doors move up. 왘 Press and hold buttons Œ and ‹ Warning! G
The vehicle will lock again automatically simultaneously for about five seconds
until battery check lamp 5 blinks twice. When leaving the vehicle always remove the
within approximately 40 seconds of un-
locking if neither door nor trunk is opened, The key will then function as follows:
Key with KEYLESS-GO (if so equipped) with
the SmartKey is not inserted in the starter
Unlocking driver’s door and fuel filler you and lock the vehicle. Do not leave chil-
switch, or the central locking switch is not
flap dren unattended in the vehicle, or with ac-
activated.
왘 Press button Œ once. cess to an unlocked vehicle. It is possible for
children to open a looked door from the in-
Global locking Global unlocking side, which could result in an accident or se-
왘 Press button ‹. 왘 Press button Œ twice. rious injury.
All turn signal lamps blink three times. Global locking
The locking knobs in the doors move
down. 왘 Press button ‹.
87
Controls in detail
! Checking the batteries Unlocking the trunk lid

If you can no longer lock or unlock the 왘 Press button ‹ or Œ. You can unlock the trunk separately.
vehicle with the key, then either the
Battery check lamp 5 lights up briefly A minimum height clearance of 5.75 ft.
batteries in the SmartKey are dis-
to indicate that the key batteries are in (1.75 m) is required to open the trunk lid.
charged or the key is malfunctioning.
order. 왘 Press and hold button Š until trunk
앫 Check the batteries in the key
! opens.
(컄 page 88) and replace them if
necessary (컄 page 328). If battery check lamp 5 does not light !
up briefly during check, then the key
or The trunk lid swings upwards automat-
batteries are discharged.
ically. Always make sure that there is
앫 Use the mechanical key to lock and
Replace the batteries (컄 page 329). sufficient overhead clearance.
unlock the doors (컄 page 327) and
the trunk lid (컄 page 98) as re- You can obtain the required batteries
quired. at any authorized Mercedes-Benz Cen- The trunk can also be opened from its in-
ter. side in an emergency, see "Trunk lid emer-
If the key is malfunctioning, contact an gency release" (컄 page 97).
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
88
Controls in detail
i Loss of SmartKey or mechanical key SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO*

If the vehicle was previously centrally If you lose a SmartKey or mechanical key,
The KEYLESS-GO function is integrated
locked, the trunk lid will lock automati- you should do the following:
into the SmartKey. On these vehicles, the
cally when closed (컄 page 96). The
왘 Have the SmartKey deactivated by an validity of the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO
turn signals will flash three times to
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. is checked every time you grasp a door
confirm locking.
왘 Report the loss of the SmartKey or the handle.
If the vehicle was previously separately
mechanical key immediately to your If the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* is valid,
locked (컄 page 98), the trunk lid will re-
car insurance company. your vehicle unlocks
main locked.
왘 If necessary, have the mechanical lock 앫 the doors
replaced.
앫 the trunk lid
Your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center
앫 the fuel filler flap
will be glad to supply you with a replace-
ment.
89
Controls in detail
Important notes on using KEYLESS-GO 앫 In order to start the engine with the
Warning! G 앫 You can also use the SmartKey with
SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO:
KEYLESS-GO like a normal key 앫 The SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO
key from the starter switch, take the Smart- (컄 page 86). must be located in the vehicle.
Key with KEYLESS-GO (if so equipped) with 앫 You can combine KEYLESS-GO func- 앫 All the doors must be closed.
you and lock the vehicle. Do not leave chil- tions with normal key functions (e.g. 앫 If you have started the engine with the
dren unattended in the vehicle, or with ac- unlocking with KEYLESS-GO and lock- KEYLESS-GO start/stop button, you
cess to an unlocked vehicle. Unsupervised ing with the remote control). can only turn it off again with this but-
use of vehicle equipment may cause serious
앫 Always carry the SmartKey with ton, even if you have put the key in the
personal injury.
KEYLESS-GO with you. starter switch in the meantime.
앫 Never store the SmartKey with 앫 This does not apply if, after starting, the
!
KEYLESS-GO together with: selector lever is still in position P. The
To prevent possible malfunction, avoid SmartKey will then have priority over
exposing the SmartKey with 앫 Electronic items such as a cellular
the KEYLESS-GO function and the vehi-
KEYLESS-GO to high levels of electro- phone or another SmartKey with
cle’s electrical system will operate ac-
magnetic radiation. KEYLESS-GO
cording to the position of the key in the
앫 Metallic objects such as coins or starter switch, even stopping the en-
metal foil gine.
Doing so could impair the function of 앫 If the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO is
the KEYLESS-GO system. positioned farther away from the vehi-
앫 To lock or unlock the vehicle, the key cle (e.g. inside clothing or briefcase)
must be located outside the vehicle and can no longer be recognized by the
within approximately 3 ft. (1 m) of a
door or the trunk.
90
Controls in detail
system, the vehicle cannot be locked Factory setting Global locking

or the engine started via the KEY-
왘 Press lock button at door handle
LESS-GO system. Global unlocking
(컄 page 53) or trunk lid (컄 page 92).
앫 If the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO is re- 왘 Grasp the door handle.
moved from the vehicle while the igni- !
The vehicle will lock again automatically
tion is switched on (e.g. if passenger If you cannot lock or unlock the vehicle
within approximately 40 seconds if neither
exits the vehicle with the key), the mes- with the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO,
door nor trunk is opened.
sage Key not recognized! will appear then either the batteries of the key are
in the multifunction display. i discharged or the key is malfunction-
ing.
Find the key or change its present loca- The vehicle could be inadvertently un-
tion immediately (e.g. place it on the locked if the SmartKey with KEY- 앫 Check the batteries of the Smart-
front passenger seat or insert it in shirt LESS-GO is within 3 ft. (1 m) of the Key with KEYLESS-GO (컄 page 88)
pocket). vehicle and and replace them if necessary
(컄 page 328).
앫 Remember that the engine can be 앫 the door handle is splashed with
started by anyone with a SmartKey water, or 앫 Use the mechanical key to unlock
with KEYLESS-GO that is left inside the the driver’s door (컄 page 327) and
앫 you attempt to clean the door
vehicle. If you leave the card behind trunk lid (컄 page 328) as required.
handle.
when exiting and locking the vehicle, Lock the vehicle using the mechan-
the message Key recognized in vehi- ical key (컄 page 328).
cle! will appear in the multifunction
display. If your SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO is
malfunctioning, contact your autho-
91
Controls in detail
Unlocking the trunk lid i Locking the vehicle

The handle is located in the rear license If the vehicle was previously centrally
plate recess. locked with the SmartKey, the trunk lid
will lock automatically after closing it.
The turn signals will flash three times to
confirm locking.
If you have left the SmartKey with KEY-
LESS-GO in the trunk, the trunk lid will
not close.
The trunk can also be opened from the in- 1 Lock button at trunk
side in an emergency, see "Trunk lid emer-
왘 Press the lock button at door
gency release" (컄 page 97).
왘 Pull on the handle and lift up the trunk (컄 page 53) or trunk.
lid.
The vehicle unlocks the trunk lid only. Closing the side windows and slid-
ing/pop-up roof*
왘 Press and hold lock button at door
locked or locked with the SmartKey, the
trunk lid will remain locked. (컄 page 53) or trunk until the side win-
dows and the sliding/pop-up roof are
! closed.
The trunk lid swings open upwards au-
tomatically. Always make sure that
there is sufficient overhead clearance.
92
Controls in detail
Loss of the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO Opening the doors from the inside
Warning! G If you lose your SmartKey with KEY-
You can open a locked door from the in-
When closing the windows and the slid- LESS-GO, you should do the following:
side. Open door only when conditions are
ing/pop-up roof, be sure that there is no 왘 Have the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO safe to do so.
danger of anyone being harmed by the clos- deactivated by an authorized Mer-
ing procedure. cedes-Benz Center.
If potential danger exists, proceed as fol- 왘 Report the loss immediately to your car
lows: insurance company.
앫 Release the lock button. 왘 Have the mechanical lock replaced if
앫 Pull on the door handle or trunk lid han- necessary.
dle and hold firmly. The side windows
Your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center
and the sliding/pop-up roof will open.
will be glad to supply you with a replace-
ment.
1 Locking knob
2 Inside door handle
왘 Pull on door handle 2.
If door was locked, locking knob 1 will
move up.
93
Controls in detail
i Opening the trunk from the inside !

If the vehicle has previously been The trunk lid swings open upwards au-
You can open the trunk from the inside if tomatically. Always make sure that
locked from the outside, opening a
the vehicle is stationary. there is sufficient overhead clearance.
door from the inside will trigger the an-
ti-theft alarm system. To cancel the A minimum height clearance of 5.75 ft.
alarm, do one of the following: (1.75 m) is required to open the trunk lid. The trunk can also be opened using the
앫 Press button Œ or ‹ on the The switch is located on the driver’s door. SmartKey (컄 page 88) or from its inside in
SmartKey. an emergency, see "Trunk lid emergency
release" (컄 page 97).
앫 Insert the SmartKey in the starter
switch. i
If the vehicle was previously centrally
locked, the trunk lid will lock automati-
cally when closed (컄 page 96). The
turn signals will flash three times to
confirm locking.
1 Remote trunk lid release switch with in- locked (컄 page 98), the trunk lid will re-
dicator lamp main locked.
왘 Pull remote trunk lid release switch 1.
The trunk opens. The indicator lamp in
the switch lights up and remains lit as
long as the trunk is open.
94
Controls in detail
Trunk lid opening/closing system* i Activating opening height restriction of

The trunk lid swings open upwards au- trunk lid
The switch for opening and closing the
trunk is located on the driver’s door. tomatically. Always make sure that If the opening height restriction of trunk lid
there is sufficient overhead clearance. is activated, the trunk lid opens to below
To stop the opening procedure, pull or the roof line of the vehicle.
press the remote control switch for the
trunk lid.

locked (컄 page 98), the trunk lid will re-
main locked.
1 Remote control switch

왘 Pull remote control switch 1 until the
trunk begins to open. 1 Trunk lid closing switch
왘 Press the trunk lid closing switch 1 for
The trunk lid opens automatically.
approx. 5 seconds.
The indicator lamp in the switch lights
The opening height restriction is acti-
up and remains lit until the trunk is
vated.
closed again by pressing remote con-
trol switch 1. 왘 Press the trunk lid closing switch 1
again for approx. 5 seconds.
The opening height restriction is deac-
tivated.
95
Controls in detail
Opening the trunk Closing the trunk Vehicles with trunk lid opening/closing
system*
A minimum height clearance of 5.75 ft.
(1.75 m) is required to open the trunk lid. Closing from the inside
The handle is located above the rear li- 왘 Press the remote control switch until
cense plate recess. the indicator lamp in the switch goes
out and the trunk lid is closed.
When closing, if the trunk lid comes into
contact with an object (e.g. luggage that
has been piled too high) in the upper mo-
tion sequence, the closing procedure is
1 Handle stopped and the trunk re-opens slightly.
왘 Lower trunk lid using handle 1.
Warning! G
Warning! G
왘 Pull on the handle and lift up the trunk Monitor the closing procedure carefully to
lid. To prevent possible personal injury, always ensure that no one is in danger of being in-
keep hands and fingers away from the trunk jured. To prevent possible personal injury,
The trunk lid swings open upwards au-
opening when closing the trunk. Be espe- always keep hands and fingers away from
tomatically. Always make sure that
cially careful when small children are the trunk opening when closing the trunk.
there is sufficient overhead clearance.
around. Be especially careful when small children
i are around. To stop the closing procedure,
let go of the remote control switch for the
The vehicle must be unlocked.
trunk.
96
Controls in detail
Closing from outside Trunk lid emergency release

Warning! G
The emergency release button is located
Monitor the closing procedure carefully to on the inside of the trunk lid.
ensure that no one is in danger of being in-
jured. To prevent possible personal injury,
always keep hands and fingers away from
the trunk opening when closing the trunk.
Be especially careful when small children
are around. To stop the closing procedure,
press the remote control switch for the
1 Trunk closing switch trunk lid or the Š key on the remote con-
trol.
왘 Press the closing switch briefly.
The trunk lid closes automatically. ! 1 Emergency release button
When closing, if the trunk lid comes into Do not place the key in the open trunk. 왘 Briefly press the emergency release
contact with an object (e.g. luggage that You may lock yourself out. button.
has been piled too high) in the upper mo-
Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO*: The trunk unlocks and the trunk lid
tion sequence, the closing procedure is
To prevent a possible inadvertent lock- opens.
stopped and the trunk re-opens slightly.
out, the trunk lid will open automatical-
ly if a SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO is !
recognized in the area of the rear shelf The emergency release button unlocks
or inside the trunk. and opens the trunk while the vehicle is
standing or driving.
97
Controls in detail
Illumination of the emergency release but- Separately locking the trunk 왘 Close the trunk lid (컄 page 96).
ton:
왘 Pull the mechanical key out of the
앫 The button will blink for 30 minutes af- i SmartKey (컄 page 329).
ter opening the trunk. To deny any unauthorized person ac-
왘 Insert the mechanical key in the trunk
cess to the trunk, lock it separately
앫 The button will blink for 60 minutes af- lid lock.
with the mechanical key. Leave only
ter closing the trunk. 왘 Turn the key completely to the right to
the SmartKey without its mechanical
! key inside the vehicle. position 2.
The emergency release button does The trunk remains locked even when the
not open the trunk lid if the vehicle bat- The lock is located next to the recessed vehicle is centrally unlocked.
tery is discharged or disconnected. handle.
i
You can only cancel the separate trunk
i
locking mode by means of the mechan-
If the emergency release button is ical key.
pressed and the vehicle was centrally
locked, the exterior lamps will flash and
the alarm will sound.
To cancel the alarm, insert the key in
the starter switch or press button Œ
or ‹ on the key.
1 Unlocked
2 Locked
98
Controls in detail
Separately unlocking the trunk Automatic central locking i

The doors unlock automatically after an
왘 Pull the mechanical key out of the The doors and the trunk automatically lock
accident if the force of the impact ex-
SmartKey (컄 page 329). when the ignition is switched on and the
ceeds a preset threshold.
wheels are turning at vehicle speeds of ap-
왘 Insert the mechanical key in the trunk
proximately 9 mph (15 km/h) or more. The vehicle automatically locks when
lid lock.
the ignition is switched on and the
You can open a locked door from the in-
왘 Turn the key completely to the left to wheels are turning at vehicle speeds of
side. Open door only when conditions are
position 1, see above. approximately 9 mph (15 km/h) or
safe to do so.
You can now open the trunk (컄 page 96). more. You could therefore lock yourself
out when the vehicle
i 앫 is pushed
Unlocking the trunk with the mechani-
앫 is on a test stand
cal key will trigger the anti-theft alarm
system. To cancel the alarm, do one of
the following: You can deactivate the automatic locking
mode over the control system
앫 Press button Œ or ‹ on the (컄 page 142).
SmartKey.
앫 Insert the SmartKey in the starter
switch.
99
Controls in detail
Locking and unlocking from the inside The switch is located in the center console. Locking
왘 Press upper half 1 of the central lock-
You can lock or unlock the doors and the
ing switch.
trunk from inside using the central locking
switch. This can be useful, for example, if If both front doors are closed, the vehi-
you want to lock the vehicle before starting cle locks.
to drive.
Unlocking
The fuel filler flap cannot be locked or un-
locked with the central locking switch. 왘 Press lower half 2 of the central lock-
ing switch.
Warning! G Central locking switch
The vehicle unlocks.
When leaving the vehicle, always remove the 1 Locking

key from the starter switch, take it with you 2 Indicator lamp
and lock the vehicle. Do not leave children 3 Unlocking
unattended in the vehicle, or with access to
an unlocked vehicle. Unsupervised use of
vehicle equipment may cause serious per-
sonal injury.
100
Controls in detail
i Locking the vehicle from the trunk*

You can open a locked door from the Vehicles with trunk lid opening/closing
inside. Open door only when conditions system* and KEYLESS-GO* can be central-
are safe to do so. ly locked using a switch in the trunk lid.
If the vehicle was previously centrally
locked using the SmartKey, it will not
unlock using the central locking switch.
If the vehicle was previously locked
with the central locking switch
앫 while in the selective remote con-
trol mode, only the door opened
from the inside is unlocked.
앫 while in the global remote control
1 Central locking
mode, the complete vehicle is un-
locked when a door is opened from 왘 Press button 1.
the inside. The vehicle is centrally locked.
101
Controls in detail
Seats
Seats
Information on seat adjustment can be You can activate the following functions:
found in the "Getting started" section Warning! G 앫 Steering column:
(컄 page 35).
You must ensure that no one can become Only the steering column is adjusted.
Easy-entry/exit feature* trapped or injured by the moving steering
앫 Steering column and seat:
wheel and driver’s seat when the
With the easy-entry/exit feature activated, easy-entry/exit feature is activated, the The steering column and the seat are
the steering wheel tilts upwards and the driver’s door is being opened and the engine adjusted.
driver’s seat moves to the rear. is turned off or the SmartKey removed from The easy-entry/exit feature can be
the starter switch. Do not leave children un- switched on or off in the individual setting
This allows easier entry into and exit from
attended in the vehicle, or with access to an menu Convenience - Easy-entry feature
the vehicle when the driver’s door is
unlocked vehicle. Unsupervised use of vehi- activate (컄 page 143).
opened. However, the engine must be
cle equipment may cause serious personal
turned off.
injury. i
When the SmartKey is inserted in the start- To cancel seat/steering wheel move-
er switch and the driver’s door is closed, ment, do one of the following:
the steering wheel and the driver’s seat re-
turn to their last set positions. 앫 Press seat adjustment switch
(컄 page 28).
앫 Move steering column stalk
(컄 page 38).
앫 Press the memory switch
(컄 page 28).
102
Controls in detail
Seats
Head restraints Front seat head restraints Rear seat head restraints
Information on head restraint adjustment

can be found in the "Getting started" sec- Warning! G
tion (컄 page 36).
For safety reasons, always drive with the
rear head restraints in the upright position
Warning! G when the rear seats are occupied.
Keep the area around head restraints clear
For your protection, drive only with properly
of articles (e.g. clothing) to not obstruct the
positioned head restraints.
folding operation of the head restraints.
Adjust head restraint to support the back of
the head approximately at ear level. Removing front head restraints
Do not drive the vehicle without the seat 왘 Press switch 1 upwards and hold until
head restraints. Head restraints are intend- the head restraint is fully extended.
ed to help reduce injuries during an acci-
왘 Pull out head restraint.
dent.
Installing front head restraints:

i 왘 Press switch 1 upwards and hold for
Tilt the backrest to the rear for easier about five seconds.
removal and installation of the head re-
straints. 왘 Push the head restraint down until it
engages.
왘 Adjust head restraint to desired posi-
tion (컄 page 36).
103
Controls in detail
Seats
Folding rear head restraints back Placing rear head restraints upright Multicontour seat*
The multicontour seat has a movable seat

cushion and inflatable air cushions built
into the backrest to provide additional lum-
bar and side support.
The seat cushion movement, backrest
cushion height and curvature can be con-
tinuously varied with regulators on the
right side of the seat after turning the
SmartKey in the starter switch to
왘 Make sure the starter switch is in 왘 Pull the rear head restraint forward un- position 2.
position 1 or 2. til it locks into position.
왘 Push switch 1.
The rear head restraints will fold back-
ward.
104
Controls in detail
Seats
왘 Adjust the backrest contour to the con- Dynamic driving seat*

tour of your back using æ or ç.
The dynamic driving seat automatically ad-
왘 Move the backrest support to the bot-
justs the lateral support provided by the
tom by using button 2 or to the center
backrest to your driving style.
by using button 3.
왘 Adjust the side bolsters so that they
provide good lateral support using
button 4.
1 Seat cushion depth

2 Backrest bottom
3 Backrest center
4 Side bolster adjustment
Adjusting the multicontour seat in the or-
der listed above is recommended. 1 Backrest center
2 Massage function
왘 Make sure that the ignition is switched 3 Backrest side bolsters
on. 4 Activate dynamic driving function
All lamps in the instrument cluster light 5 Seat cushion depth
up. 6 Backrest bottom
The dynamic driving seat electronically
Adjusting backrest contour controls the air pressure in the air cham-
왘 Adjust the seat cushion depth to the bers of the backrest side bolsters. This
length of your upper leg using switch 1. function improves driving comfort and
pleasure.
105
Controls in detail
Seats
Activating Massage function (PULSE) i

왘 Press button 4. The massage function can help prevent The massage function turns off auto-
muscle tension during long drives. matically after approximately 5 min-
The indicator lamp in the button lights
utes.
up. 왘 Press button 2.
i The indicator lamp in button 2 lights

up. The air cushions in the lumbar area
You can adjust the characteristics of
pulsate.
the dynamic driving seat using the con-
trol system (컄 page 145).
Deactivating
왘 Press button 4 again.
The indicator lamp in the button goes
out.
i
When the engine is turned off, the last
cushion setting is retained in memory,
and the cushion is automatically ad-
justed to this setting when the engine
is restarted.
106
Controls in detail
Seats
Heated seats* Level !

3 3 indicator lamps lit The seat heater may switch off if the
Both switches for the front seats are locat- battery voltage is too low. One or more
ed in the center console. The red indicator The seat heater automatically indicator lamps will blink.
lamps in the switch light up to show which switches to level 2 after approx-
heating level you have selected. imately 5 minutes
Switching seat heating on
2 2 indicator lamps lit
왘 Press button 1 repeatedly until the de-
The seat heater automatically sired heating level is set.
switches to level 1 after approx-
imately 10 minutes Switching seat heating off
1 1 indicator lamp lit 왘 Press button 1 repeatedly until all indi-
The seat heater automatically cator lamps go out.
switches off after approximately
20 minutes
1 Seat heating off No indicator lamps lit

on.
All the lamps in the instrument cluster
light up.
107
Controls in detail
Seats
Seat ventilation* Level Switching seat ventilation on
3 3 indicator lamps lit 왘 Press button 1 repeatedly until the de-

The seat ventilation switch is located on
sired ventilation level is set.
the center console. The blue indicator 2 2 indicator lamps lit
lamps in the switch show which ventilation
1 1 indicator lamp lit Switching seat ventilation off
level you have selected.
off No indicator lamps lit 왘 Press button 1 repeatedly until all indi-
cator lamps go out.
!
i
The seat ventilation may switch off if
the battery voltage is too low. If seat ventilation is activated through
the summer opening function, seat
ventilation is automatically set to the
왘 Make sure that the ignition has been
highest level.
switched on.
All lamps in the instrument cluster light
1 Seat ventilation up.
108
Controls in detail
Memory function
Memory function
! You can store up to three different settings
Prior to operating the vehicle, the driv- per key. Warning! G
er should check and adjust the seat The following settings are saved for each Do not activate the memory function while
height, seat position fore and aft, and stored position: driving. Activating the memory function
backrest angle if necessary, to ensure
앫 Driver’s seat and backrest position while driving could cause the driver to lose
adequate control, reach and comfort.
control of the vehicle.
The head restraint should also be ad- 앫 Steering wheel position
justed for proper height. Also see the 앫 Driver’s side exterior rear view mirror
section on airbags (컄 page 57) for position
more information on proper seat posi-
tioning. 앫 Passenger side exterior rear view mir-
ror position
In addition, adjust the steering wheel to
ensure adequate control, reach, opera- 앫 Front passenger seat position
tion and comfort. Both the inside and These key-dependent memory settings
outside rear view mirrors should be ad- can be deactivated if desired
justed for adequate rear vision. (컄 page 110).
Fasten seat belts. Infants and small
children should be seated in a properly
secured restraint system that complies
with U.S. Federal Motor Vehicle Safety
Standard 213 and Canadian Motor Ve-
hicle Safety Standard 213.
109
Controls in detail
Memory function
The memory button is located on the door. Storing positions into memory Recalling positions from memory
왘 Adjust the seats, steering wheel and 왘 On memory button, press and hold
rear view mirrors to the desired posi- stored position button 1, 2 or 3 until
tion (컄 page 34). the seat, steering wheel and rear view
mirrors have fully moved to the stored
왘 Press memory button M.
positions.
왘 Release memory button and press
stored position button 1, 2 or 3 within i
three seconds. Releasing the button immediately
All the settings are stored at the select- stops movement to the stored posi-
M Memory button ed position. tions.
1,2,3 Stored positions
왘 Be sure that the ignition is switched on Warning! G
or the relevant door is open and the
SmartKey is inserted in the starter Do not operate the power seats using the
switch. memory button if the backrest is in an ex-
cessively reclined position. Doing so could
cause damage to front or rear seats.
First move backrest to an upright position.
110
Controls in detail
Memory function
Storing parking position 왘 Adjust the exterior rear view mirror

with button 2 so that you see the rear
For easier parking you can adjust the pas- wheel and the curb.
senger exterior rear view mirror so that you
왘 Press memory button "M" 4 on the
can see the right rear wheel as soon as you
door.
engage reverse gear R.
왘 Within three seconds, press bottom of
The exterior rear view mirror returns to its
adjustment button 2.
previously stored driving position
The parking position is stored if the
앫 10 seconds after you put the gear se-
mirror does not move.
lector lever out of position R 1 Passenger side, exterior rear view mir-
앫 immediately once you exceed a speed ror i
of approx. 6 mph (10 km/h) 2 Adjustment button If the mirror does move, repeat the
3 Driver’s side, exterior rear view mirror above steps. After the setting is stored,
앫 immediately when you press the button 4 Memory button you can move the mirror again.
for the driver’s side mirror
왘 Stop the vehicle.
You can store a parking position for the
passenger exterior rear view mirror for 왘 Switch ignition on (if not already on).
each key using the memory button. 왘 Press button 1.
The passenger side exterior rear view
mirror is selected.
111
Controls in detail
Lighting
Lighting
For notes on how to switch on the head- M Off i
lamps and use the turn signals, see the
U Automatic headlamp mode If you remove the key and open the
"Getting started" section (컄 page 46). driver’s door while the parking lamps or
C Parking lamps (also side marker
low beam headlamps are switched on,
Exterior lamp switch lamps, tail lamps, license plate
then
lamps, instrument panel lamps)
The exterior lamp switch is located on the Canada only: 앫 a warning sounds
dashboard to the left of the steering wheel. When engine is running, the low 앫 $ appears in the multifunction
beam is also switched on. display
B Parking lamps plus low beam or 앫 the message Turn off lamps! ap-
high beam headlamps (combination pears in the multifunction display
switch pushed forward).
ˆ Standing lamps, right (turn left one i
stop)
With the daytime running lamp mode
‚ Standing lamps, left (turn left two activated and the engine running, the
stops) low beam headlamps cannot be
switched off manually.
112
Controls in detail
Lighting
Manual headlamp mode i

The low beam headlamps and parking
Warning! G Front fog lamps and rear fog lamp can
lamps can be switched on and off with the not be switched on manually with exte-
In automatic headlamp mode, the head-
exterior lamp switch (컄 page 112). rior lamp switch in position U. To
lamps will not be automatically switched on
activate the fog lamps, turn exterior
under foggy conditions. To minimize risk to
Automatic headlamp mode lamp switch to position B.
you and to others, activate headlamps by
The parking lamps, low beam headlamps turning exterior lamp switch to B.
and license plate lamps switch on and off The driver is responsible for the operation of
i
automatically depending on the brightness the vehicle’s lights at all times. The automat- If you drive in countries where vehicles
of the ambient light. ic headlamp feature is only an aid to the driv- drive on the other side of the road than
왘 Turn the exterior lamp switch to U. er. Switch on the vehicle lights by hand the country where the vehicle is regis-
when driving or when traffic conditions re- tered, you must have the headlamps
quire you to do so. modified for symmetrical low beams.
Relevant information can be obtained
at your authorized Mercedes-Benz Cen-
i ter.
With the daytime running lamp mode
activated, the low beam headlamps will
not be switched off automatically.
113
Controls in detail
Lighting
Daytime running lamp mode To activate the daytime running lamp i

mode, see "Setting daytime running lamp Fog lamps will operate with the parking
왘 Turn exterior lamp switch to
mode" (컄 page 139).
position M or U. lamps and/or the low beam headlamps
i on. Fog lamps should only be used in
When the engine is running, the low beam
conjunction with low beam headlamps.
headlamps are automatically switched on. See notes on the exterior lamp switch
Consult your State or Province Motor
In low ambient light conditions the parking (컄 page 112).
Vehicle Regulations regarding allow-
lamps will also switch on.
able lamp operation.
Locator lighting and night security illu-
Canada only mination Switching on rear fog lamp
When you shift from a driving position to Locator lighting and night security illumi-
왘 Check that the low beam headlamps
position N or P, the low beam switches off nation are described in the control system
(with a three-minute delay). are switched on.
section under "Setting locator lighting"
(컄 page 139) and "Setting night security il- 왘 Pull out exterior lamp switch to second
For nighttime driving you should turn the
exterior lamp switch to position B to lumination" (컄 page 140). stop.
permit activation of the high beam head- The yellow indicator lamp † in the
lamps. Switching on front fog lamps lamp switch lights up.
왘 Check that the low beam headlamps
USA only are switched on.
The high beam headlamps can also be ac- 왘 Pull out exterior lamp switch to first
tivated when driving with the daytime run- stop.
ning lamp mode activated and exterior
lamp switch in position M. The green indicator lamp ‡ in the
lamp switch lights up.
114
Controls in detail
Lighting
Combination switch High beam flasher Switching on the hazard warning

flasher
왘 Pull the combination switch briefly in
The combination switch is located on the
direction 2. 왘 Press the hazard warning flasher
left side of the steering column.
switch.
Hazard warning flasher
All turn signals will blink.
The hazard warning flasher can be activat- i
ed with the ignition switched on or off. It is
With the hazard warning flasher acti-
activated automatically when an airbag is
vated and the combination switch set
deployed.
for either left or right turn, only the re-
The switch is located on the center con- spective left or right turn signals will
sole. operate when the key in the starter
switch is in position 1 or 2.
1 High beam
2 High beam flasher Switching off the hazard warning
flasher
Switching on high beams 왘 Press hazard warning flasher switch
왘 Turn exterior lamp switch to again.
position B (컄 page 112).
왘 Push the combination switch in
direction 1.
1 Hazard warning flasher switch
The high beam symbol is illuminated on
the instrument cluster.
115
Controls in detail
Lighting
Interior lighting 8 Reading lamps Deactivating automatic control

왘
The controls are located in the overhead i Press button 3.
control panel. If the door remains open, the interior The interior lighting remains switched
lamps switch off automatically after ap- off, even when
proximately five minutes when the key 앫 centrally unlocking the vehicle
is removed or in starter switch
position 0. 앫 opening a door
An interior lamp switched on manually 앫 removing the SmartKey from the

does not go out automatically. starter switch
Activating automatic control Manual control
왘 Press button 3. Switching rear interior lights on and off

Interior lamps are switched on in dark- 왘 Press button 2.
ness, when
The lights in the rear passenger com-
앫 unlocking the vehicle partment go on.
앫 opening a door 왘 Press button 2 again.
1 Switch for reading lamp, left
2 Switch for rear compartment lighting 앫 removing the SmartKey from the The lights in the rear passenger com-
3 Switch for automatic function starter switch partment go out.
4 Switch for interior lighting in front The interior lamps are switched off follow-
5 Switch for reading lamp, right ing an adjustable time delay (컄 page 141).
6 Ambient lighting
7 Interior lighting
116
Controls in detail
Lighting
Switching left front reading lamp on and Door entry lamps Trunk lamp
off
The appropriate door entry lamp switches The trunk lamp switches on if the trunk lid
왘 Press button 1.
on if a door is opened in darkness and if is opened.
The left reading lamp goes on. the interior lighting is switched to the auto-
If you leave the trunk open for an extended
왘 Press button 1 again. matic function.
period of time, the trunk lamp will switch
The left reading lamp goes out. The entry lamp goes out automatically off automatically after approximately ten
when the door is closed. minutes.
Switching right front reading lamp on i
and off
If you turn the key in the starter switch
왘 Press button 5. to position 0 or remove the key, the
The right reading lamp goes on. door entry lamps will remain lit for ap-
proximately five minutes.
왘 Press button 5 again.
The right reading lamp goes out.
117
Controls in detail
Instrument cluster
Instrument cluster
A full view illustration of the instrument Instrument cluster illumination To brighten illumination
cluster can be found in the "At a glance"
왘 Turn the reset knob in the instrument
section of this manual (컄 page 22). Use the reset knob (컄 page 22) to adjust
cluster clockwise (컄 page 22).
the illumination brightness for the instru-
The instrument cluster is activated when
ment cluster. The instrument cluster illumination will
you
brighten.
앫 open a door i
The instrument cluster illumination is To dim illumination
앫 turn on the ignition
dimmed or brightened automatically to
왘 Turn the reset knob in the instrument
앫 press the reset knob (컄 page 22) suit ambient light conditions.
cluster counterclockwise (컄 page 22).
앫 switch on the exterior lamps The instrument cluster illumination will
The instrument cluster illumination will
You can change the instrument cluster set- also be adjusted automatically when
dim.
tings in the instrument cluster submenu of you switch on the vehicle’s exterior
the control system (컄 page 134). lamps.
118
Controls in detail
Instrument cluster
Coolant temperature display During severe operating conditions and Trip odometer
stop-and-go city traffic, the coolant tem-
perature may rise close to 248°F (120°C). 왘 Check to see that the trip odometer
Warning! G The engine should not be operated with
and main odometer (컄 page 121) ap-
pear in the multifunction display.
the coolant temperature above 248°F
앫 Driving when your engine is badly over-
(120°C). Doing so may cause serious en- 왘 Press and hold the reset knob on the in-
heated can cause some fluids which
may have leaked into the engine com- gine damage which is not covered by the strument cluster (컄 page 22) until the
partment to catch fire. You could be se- Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty. trip odometer is reset.
riously burned.
앫 Steam from an overheated engine can
cause serious burns and can occur just
by opening the engine hood. Stay away
from the engine if you see or hear steam
coming from it.
Turn off the engine, get out of the vehicle
and do not stand near the vehicle until it
cools down.
i
Excessive coolant temperatures trigger
a warning in the multifunction display.
119
Controls in detail
Instrument cluster
Tachometer Outside temperature indicator When moving the vehicle into colder ambi-
ent temperatures (e.g. when leaving your
The red marking on the tachometer de- garage), you will notice a delay before the
notes excessive engine speed. Warning! G lower temperature is displayed.
! The outside temperature indicator is not de-
A delay also occurs when ambient temper-
Avoid driving at excessive engine atures rise. This prevents inaccurate tem-
signed to serve as an ice-warning device and
speeds, as it may result in serious en- perature indications caused by heat
is therefore unsuitable for that purpose.
gine damage that is not covered by the radiated from the engine during idling or
Indicated temperatures just above the freez- slow driving.
Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty. ing point do not guarantee that the road sur-
face is free of ice. The road may still be icy,
To help protect the engine, the fuel supply especially in wooded areas or on bridges.
is interrupted if the engine is operated
within the red marking.
The temperature sensor is located in the
front bumper area. Due to its location, the
sensor can be affected by road or engine
heat during idling or slow driving. This
means that the accuracy of the displayed
temperature can only be verified by com-
parison to a thermometer placed next to
the sensor, not by comparison to external
displays (e.g. bank signs etc.).
120
Controls in detail
Control system
Control system
The control system is activated as soon as Multifunction display
the key in the starter switch is turned to Warning! G
position 1. The control system enables you
to A driver’s attention to the road must always
be his/her primary focus when driving.
앫 call up information about your vehicle
For your safety and the safety of others, se-
앫 change vehicle settings. lecting features through the multifunction
For example, you can use the control sys- steering wheel should only be done by the
tem to find out when your vehicle is next driver when traffic and road conditions per-
due for service, to set the language for mit it to be done safely.
messages in the instrument cluster dis- Bear in mind that at a speed of just 30 mph
play, and much more. (approximately 50 km/h), your vehicle is 1 Segment ring
covering a distance of 44 feet (approximate- 2 Standard display
i ly 13.5 m) every second. 3 Trip odometer
The displays for the audio systems (ra-
dio, CD player, cassette player) will ap-
The control system relays information to
pear in English, regardless of the
the multifunction display.
language selected.
121
Controls in detail
Control system
Multifunction steering wheel 1 Multifunction display in the speed- The information available in the multifunc-
ometer tion display is arranged in menus, each
The displays in the multifunction display containing a number of functions or sub-
and the settings in the control system Operating the control system menus.
(컄 page 121) are controlled by the buttons 2 Selecting the submenu or setting
The individual functions are then found
on the multifunction steering wheel. the volume
within the relevant menu (radio or CD op-
ç down / to decrease erations under Audio, for example). These
æ up / to increase functions serve to call up relevant informa-
tion or to customize the settings for your
3 Telephone*
vehicle.
í to take a call
ì to end a call
4 Menu systems
è for next menu
ÿ for previous menu
5 Moving within a menu
j for next display
k for previous display
Pressing any of the buttons on the multi-
function steering wheel will alter what is
shown in the multifunction display.
122
Controls in detail
Control system
It is helpful to think of the menus, and the In the Settings menu, instead of functions The menus are described on the following
functions within each menu, as being ar- you will find a number of submenus for pages.
ranged in a circular pattern. calling up and changing settings. For in-
structions on using these submenus, see
앫 If you press button è or ÿ often
the "Settings menu" section (컄 page 131).
enough, you will pass through each
menu one after the other. The number of menus available in the sys-
tem depends on which optional equipment
앫 If you press button k or j often
is installed in your vehicle.
enough, you will pass through each
function display, one after the other, in
the current menu.
123
Controls in detail
Control system
Menus This is what you will see when you scroll The table on the next page provides an
through the menus. overview of the individual menus.
124
Controls in detail
Control system
Menus, submenus and functions
Menu 1 Menu 2 Menu 3 Menu 4 Menu 5 Menu 6 Menu 7 Menu 8

Standard dis- AUDIO NAVI* Distronic* Malfunction Settings Trip computer Telephone
play memory
Digital speed- Select radio Activate Call up set- Call up malfunc- Reset to factory Fuel consumption Load phone
ometer station route guid- tings tion messages settings statistics after book
ance start
Commands/submenus
Call up FSS Operate CD Instrument clus- Fuel consumption Search for

PLUS player* ter submenu statistics since name in
the last reset phone book
Check tire pres- Operate cas- Time/Date sub- Call up range
sure* sette player menu
Check engine oil Lighting sub-
level menu
Vehicle sub-
menu
Convenience
submenu
Dynamic driving
seat* submenu
125
Controls in detail
Control system
i Standard display menu AUDIO menu

The headings used in the menus table
You can select the functions in the stan- The functions in the Audio menu operate
are designed to facilitate navigation
dard display menu with button k the audio equipment which you currently
within the system and are not neces-
or j. have turned on.
sarily identical to those shown in the
control system displays. The following functions are available: If no audio equipment is currently turned
on, the message AUDIO OFF is shown in the
The first function displayed in each Function Page
display.
menu will automatically show you
Call up digital speedometer see
which part of the system you are in. The following functions are available:
below
Call up FSS PLUS 275 Function Page
Check tire pressure* 270 Select radio station 127
Check engine oil level 262 Operate CD player* 127
Operate cassette player 128
Display digital speedometer
왘 Press button j twice.
The current vehicle speed is shown in
126
Controls in detail
Control system
Select radio station 왘 Press button k or j repeatedly Operate the CD player*

until the desired station is found.
왘 Turn on the radio. Refer to separate op- 왘 Turn on the radio and select the CD
erating instructions. i player. Refer to separate operating in-
Vehicles with COMAND*: structions.
You can only store new stations using
Refer to separate operating instruc- Vehicles with COMAND*: Refer to sep-
the corresponding feature on the radio,
tions. arate operating instructions.
see separate operating instructions.
왘 Press button è or ÿ repeatedly 왘 Press button è or ÿ repeatedly
Vehicles with COMAND*:
until you see the currently tuned sta- until the settings for the CD currently
Refer to separate operating instruc-
tion in the display. being played are shown in the display.
tions.
You can also operate the radio in the
usual manner.
1 Waveband setting 1 Current CD (for CD changer*)

2 Station frequency 2 Current track
왘 Press button k or j repeatedly
until the desired track is selected.
127
Controls in detail
Control system
i 왘 Press button j to fast forward to Distronic* menu

To select a CD from the magazine, the next track.
Use the Distronic menu to display the cur-
press a number on the audio system or 왘 Press button k to rewind the cas-
rent settings for your Distronic system.
the COMAND* system key pad located sette to the beginning of the current
What information is shown in the display
in the center dashboard. track.
depends on whether the Distronic system
Operate the cassette player i is active or inactive.
To select the reverse side of the tape, Please refer to the "Driving systems" sec-
왘 Turn on the radio and select the ca-
press button below track number on tion of this manual (컄 page 197) for in-
sette player, see separate operating instructions on how to activate Distronic.
the audio system display, or enter re-
structions.
quest on the COMAND* system locat- 왘 Press button è or ÿ repeatedly
Vehicles with COMAND*: Refer to sep-
ed in the center dashboard. until you see one of the following two
arate operating instructions.
pictures in the display.
왘 Press button è or ÿ repeatedly NAVI*
until the settings for the cassette cur-
rently being played are shown in the Refer to separate COMAND* operating in-
display. structions.
1 Current side
128
Controls in detail
Control system
Distronic deactivated Distronic activated Malfunction memory menu

When Distronic is deactivated, you will see When Distronic is activated, Distronic
Use the malfunction memory menu to scan
the standard display in the display. and the set speed are seen in the display.
malfunction and warning messages that
may be stored in the system. What infor-
mation is shown in the display depends on
whether malfunctions have actually oc-
curred.
Warning! G
1 Vehicle ahead, if detected 1 Distronic activated
2 Actual distance to vehicle ahead Malfunction and warning messages are only
3 Should-be distance to vehicle ahead indicated for certain systems and displayed
4 Your vehicle at a low level of detail. The malfunction and
5 Symbol for activated distance warning warning messages are simply a reminder
function with respect to the operation of certain sys-
tems and do not replace the driver’s respon-
sibility to maintain the vehicle’s operating
safety by having all required maintenance
and safety checks performed on the vehicle
and by bringing the vehicle to an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center to address the mal-
function and warning messages
(컄 page 295).
129
Controls in detail
Control system
왘 Press button è or ÿ repeatedly 왘 Press button k or j. Settings menu

until you see the malfunction message
The stored messages will now be dis-
memory in the display. In the Settings menu there are two func-
played in order. See the "Practical
tions:
hints" section for malfunction and
No malfunction messages 앫 The function To reset: Press reset
warning messages (컄 page 295).
If no malfunctions have occured, the mes- button for 3 seconds, with which you
Should any malfunctions occur while driv-
sage in the display is: can reset all the settings to the original
ing, the number of malfunctions will reap-
No Malfunction factory settings.
pear in the display when the key in the
starter switch is turned to position 0 or re- 앫 A collection of submenus with which
Malfunctions have occurred you can make individual settings for
moved from the starter switch.
If malfunctions have occurred, you will see your vehicle.
the number of malfunctions in the display: i
왘 Press button è or ÿ repeatedly
The message memory will be cleared until the Settings menu is seen in the
when you turn the key in the starter display.
switch to position 1 or 2. You will then
only see high priority malfunctions.
These are highlighted by red back-
ground (컄 page 295).
130
Controls in detail
Control system
Resetting all settings Submenus in the Settings menu Resetting the functions of a submenu
You can reset all the functions of all sub- 왘 Press button k or j. For each submenu you can reset all the
menus to the factory settings. functions to the factory settings.
In the display you see the collection of
왘 Press the reset knob in the instrument the submenus. 왘 Move to a function in the submenu.
cluster (컄 page 22) for approximately 왘 Press the reset knob (컄 page 22) in the
three seconds. instrument cluster for approximately
In the display you will see the request three seconds.
to press the reset knob again to con-
In the display you will see the request
firm.
to press the reset knob again to con-
왘 Press the reset knob again. firm.
왘 Press button ç.
The functions of all the submenus will 왘 Press the reset knob again.
reset to factory settings. The selection marker moves to the next
submenu. All functions of the submenu will reset
i The submenus are arranged by hierarchy.
to factory settings.
The settings you have changed will not Scroll down with the ç button, scroll up
be reset unless you confirm the action with the æ button.
by pressing the reset knob a second
Move within the submenus with the k
time.
or j button to the individual functions.
The settings themselves are made with
button æ or ç.
131
Controls in detail
Control system
The table below shows what settings can

be changed within the various menus. De-
tailed instructions on making individual
settings can be found on the following pag-
es.
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER TIME/DATE LIGHTING VEHICLE

Select temperature display Set time (hours) Set daytime running lamp mode Set automatic locking
mode (USA only)
Select speedometer display Set time (minutes) Set locator lighting
mode
Select language Set date (month) Ambient lighting
Select display (speed display or Set date (day) Exterior lamps delayed
outside temperature) for status switch-off
line
Tire pressure unit display* Set date (year) Interior lighting delayed
switch-off
132
Controls in detail
Control system
CONVENIENCE DYNAMIC SEAT*

Activate easy-entry/exit feature Set level for dynamic seat, driv-
er
Set key dependency Set level for dynamic seat, pas-
senger
Set parking position for exterior
rear view mirror
133
Controls in detail
Control system
Instrument cluster submenu Selecting temperature display mode Selecting speedometer display mode
Access the Instr. cluster submenu via 왘 Move the selection marker with 왘 Move the selection marker with
the Settings menu. Use the Instr. clus- the æ or ç button to the Instr. the æ or ç button to the Instr.
ter submenu to change the instrument cluster submenu. cluster submenu.
cluster display settings. The following
왘 Press button j or k repeatedly 왘 Press button j or k repeatedly
functions are available:
until you see this message in the dis- until you see this message in the dis-
Function Page play: Temp. indicator. play: Display unit.
Select temperature display 134 The selection marker is on the current The selection marker is on the current
mode setting. setting.
Select speedometer display 134
mode
Select language 135
Select display (speed display or 135
outside temperature) for status
display 왘 Press æ or ç to set the temper- 왘 Press æ or ç to set speedome-
Select display (speed display or 136 ature unit to degrees Celsius (°C) or ter unit to km or miles.
outside temperature) for basic degrees Fahrenheit (°F).
display
Tire pressure display* 136
134
Controls in detail
Control system
Selecting language 왘 Press æ or ç to select the lan- Selecting display (speed display or out-
guage to be used for the multifunction side temperature) for status display
왘 Move the selection marker with
display messages.
the æ or ç button to the Instr. 왘 Move the selection marker with
cluster submenu. Available languages: the æ or ç button to the Instr.
cluster submenu.
왘 Press button j or k repeatedly 앫 German
until you see this message in the dis- 앫 English 왘 Press button j or k repeatedly
play: Language. until you see this message in the dis-
앫 Italian play: Status line display.
The selection marker is on the current
setting. 앫 French The selection marker is on the current
앫 Spanish setting.
왘 Press æ or ç to select the sta-

tus line to degrees Fahrenheit (°F) or
miles.
i
You will see the status indicator when
you have called up a different display
from the standard display.
135
Controls in detail
Control system
Selecting display (speed display or out- Tire pressure display* Time/Date submenu
side temperature) for basic display
Use this function to set the unit for the tire Access the Time/Date submenu via the
왘 Move the selection marker with pressure display. Settings menu. Use the Time/Date sub-
the æ or ç button to the Instr. menu to change the time and date display
왘 Move the selection marker with the
cluster submenu. settings. The following functions are avail-
æ or ç button to the Instr,
able:
왘 Press button j or k repeatedly cluster submenu.
until you see this message in the dis- 왘 Press button j or k repeatedly Function Page
play: Basic display. until you see this message in the dis- Set time (hours) 137
The selection marker is on the current play: Display unit Tire pressure.
Set time (minutes) 137
setting.
The selection marker is on the current Set date (month) 137
setting.
Set date (day) 138
Set date (year) 138
왘 Press æ or ç to select the dis-

play permanently shown in the multi-
왘 Press æ or ç to select the de-
function display.
sired tire pressure unit.
136
Controls in detail
Control system
Set time (hours) Set time (minutes) Set date (month)

왘 Move the selection marker with 왘 Move the selection marker with 왘 Move the selection marker with
the æ or ç button to the the æ or ç button to the the æ or ç button to the
Time/Date submenu. Time/Date submenu. Time/Date submenu.
왘 Press button j or k repeatedly 왘 Press button j or k repeatedly 왘 Press button j or k repeatedly
until you see this message in the dis- until you see this message in the dis- until you see this message in the dis-
play: Clock, hours. play: Clock, minutes. play: Set date month.
The selection marker is on the hour set- The selection marker is on the minute The selection marker is on the month
ting. setting. setting.
왘 Press æ or ç to set the hour. 왘 Press æ or ç to set the minutes. 왘 Press æ or ç to set the month.
왘 Confirm by pressing reset knob. 왘 Confirm by pressing reset knob.
137
Controls in detail
Control system
Set date (day) Set date (year) Lighting submenu

왘 Move the selection marker with 왘 Move the selection marker with Access the Lighting submenu via the Set-
the æ or ç button to the the æ or ç button to the tings menu. Use the Lighting submenu
Time/Date submenu. Time/Date submenu. to change the lamp and lighting settings on
your vehicle. The following functions are
available:
until you see this message in the dis- until you see this message in the dis-
play: Set date day. play: Set date year. Function Page
The selection marker is on the day set- The selection marker is on the year set- Set daytime running lamp mode see
ting. ting. (USA only) below
Set locator lighting 139
Ambient light level 140
Exterior lamps delayed 140
switch-off
Interior lighting delayed 141
왘 Press æ or ç to set the day. 왘 Press æ or ç to set the year. switch-off
138
Controls in detail
Control system
Setting daytime running lamp mode With daytime running lamp mode se- Setting locator lighting
(USA only) lected and the exterior lamp switch at
During darkness, the following lamps will
position 0, the following lamps will
왘 Move the selection marker with come on when the locator lighting feature
come on automatically when the en-
the æ or ç button to the Light- is activated and the vehicle is unlocked by
gine is turned on:
ing submenu. remote control:
앫 Parking lamps and low beam head-
왘 Press button j or k repeatedly 앫 Parking lamps
lamps
until you see this message in the dis- 앫 Tail lamps
play: Lamp circuit headlamp. 앫 License plate lamps (in low ambient
light conditions) 앫 License plate lamps
앫 Front fog lamps
setting. i
If you turn the exterior lamp switch to The exterior lamp switch must be set to po-
another position, the corresponding sition U (컄 page 112).
lamp(s) will switch on. The locator lighting switches off when the
For safety reasons, resetting the driver’s door is opened. It switches off au-
Lighting submenu to factory settings tomatically after a period of approximately
(컄 page 131) will not reset the daytime 40 seconds.
왘 Press æ or ç to select manual
running lamp mode. 왘 Move the selection marker with
or daytime running lamp (constant)
mode. This function is not available in In the display you will then see the mes- the æ or ç button to the Light-
sage: Lighting ing submenu.
countries where daytime running
lamps are mandatory. 왘 Press button j or k repeatedly
until you see this message in the dis-
play: Function Surround lighting.
139
Controls in detail
Control system
Setting night security illumination (Exte-

rior lamps delayed switch-off)
Use the Headlamps delayed shut-off
function to set whether and for how long
you would like the exterior lamps to illumi-
nate during darkness after all doors are
The selection marker is on the current 왘 Press button j or k, repeatedly closed. When the delayed switch-off fea-
setting. until you see the message Ambient ture is activated, the following lamps will
light Level in the display. remain lit after you remove the key from
The selection marker is on the current the starter switch:
sired setting.
setting. 앫 Parking lamps
왘 Turn the exterior lamp switch to posi-
tion U. 왘 Press æ or ç to select the 앫 Tail lamps
The locator lighting will be switched on brightness of the lighting. 1 represents 앫 License plate lamps
or off. the darkest setting and 5 represents
the brightest setting. 앫 Front fog lamps
Ambient light level The ambient light is switched off below The exterior lamp switch must be set to po-
setting 1 or above setting 5. The selec- sition U (컄 page 112).
Using this function, you can adjust the
tion marker points to off.
brightness of the ambient lighting. i
왘 Move the selection marker with the You can reactivate this function within
æ or ç button to the Lighting ten minutes by opening a door.
submenu. If you do not open a door after remov-
ing the key, the lamps will automatical-
ly switch off after 60 seconds.
140
Controls in detail
Control system
왘 Move the selection marker with You can temporarily deactivate the de- Interior lighting delayed switch-off
the æ or ç button to the Light- layed switch-off feature:
Use this function to set whether and for
ing submenu.
왘 Before leaving the vehicle, turn the key how long you would like the interior light-
왘 Press button j or k repeatedly in the starter switch to position 0. ing to remain lit during darkness after the
until you see this message in the dis- key is removed from the starter switch.
왘 Then turn it to position 2 and back
play: Headlamps delayed shut-off.
to 0. 왘 Move the selection marker with
The selection marker is on the current The delayed switch-off feature is deac- the æ or ç button to the Light-
setting. tivated. It will reactivate as soon as you ing submenu.
reinsert the key in the starter switch. 왘 Press button j or k repeatedly
For vehicles with KEYLESS-GO*:
play: Interior lamp delayed
왘 Press the KEYLESS-GO start/stop but- shut-off.
ton on the gear selector lever
(컄 page 33).
setting.
sired lamp-on period.
You can select:
앫 0 s, the delayed switch-off feature
is deactivated.
앫 15 s, 30 s, 45 s or 60 s, the delayed
switch-off feature is activated.
왘 Turn the exterior lamp switch to posi-
tion U.
141
Controls in detail
Control system
Vehicle submenu 왘 Move the selection marker with

the æ or ç button to the Vehicle
Access the Vehicle submenu via the Set-
submenu.
tings menu. Use the Vehicle submenu to
make general vehicle settings. The follow- 왘 Press button j or k repeatedly
ing functions are available: until you see this message in the dis-
play: Automatic door lock.
Function Page
왘 Press æ or ç to select the de- The selection marker is on the current
sired lamp-on time period. You can se- Set automatic locking see
setting.
lect: below
앫 0 s, the delayed switch-off feature
is deactivated. Setting automatic locking
앫 5 s, 10 s, 15 s or 20 s, the delayed
Use this function to activate or deactivate
switch-off feature is activated. the automatic central locking. With the au-
tomatic central locking system activated,
the vehicle is centrally locked at vehicle 왘 Press æ or ç to switch Automat-
speeds of approximately 9 mph ic door lock on or off.
(15 km/h).
142
Controls in detail
Control system
Convenience submenu 앫 you press the appropriate stored posi-

Access the Convenience submenu via the
Warning! G tion button on the memory switch
(컄 page 110).
Settings menu. Use the Convenience sub- You must ensure that no one can become
menu to change the settings for a number trapped or injured by the moving steering i
of convenience features. The following wheel and the driver’s seat when the To cancel seat/steering wheel move-
functions are available: easy-entry/exit feature is in operation and ment, do one of the following:
Function Page the driver’s door is being opened or the key
앫 Press seat adjustment switch
is removed from the starter switch. Do not
Activate easy-entry/exit feature see (컄 page 35).
leave children unattended in the vehicle, or
below 앫 Move the steering column stalk
with access to an unlocked vehicle. Unsu-
Set key dependency 144 pervised use of vehicle equipment may (컄 page 38).
Set parking position for exterior 144 cause serious personal injury.
앫 Press the memory switch
rear view mirror Do not leave children unattended in the ve- (컄 page 110).
hicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle.
Activating easy-entry/exit feature* Children could open the driver’s door and 왘 Move the selection marker with
Use this function to activate and deacti-
unintentionally activate the easy-entry/exit the æ or ç button to
feature, which could result in an accident or the Convenience submenu.
vate the easy-entry/exit feature. When the
serious injury.
feature is activated, the steering wheel and 왘 Press button j or k repeatedly
driver’s seat will move back to facilitate ex- until you see this message in the dis-
iting when you After entering the vehicle, the steering play: Function Easy-entry feature.
wheel and seat will move into the position
앫 remove the key from the starter switch The selection marker is on the current
stored in memory when
앫 open the driver’s door setting.
앫 the driver’s door is closed
However, the engine must be turned off.
앫 you put the key in the starter switch
143
Controls in detail
Control system
Setting key dependency Setting parking position for exterior rear

view mirror
Use this function to set whether the mem-
ory settings for the seats, the steering Use the Mirror adjustment parking aid
wheel and the mirrors should be stored function to select whether the passen-
separately for each key (컄 page 86). ger-side exterior rear view mirror should be
turned downward during parking maneu-
왘 Press æ or ç to change the the æ or ç button to
vers (when reverse gear is engaged)
easy-entry/exit setting. (컄 page 111).
the Convenience submenu.
The following settings are available for the 왘 Press button j or k repeatedly The exterior rear view mirror will return to
easy-entry/exit feature: until you see this message in the dis- its previous position when you
off The easy-entry/ex- play: Key-dependent. 앫 shift out of reverse (after 10 seconds)
it feature is deacti- The selection marker is on the current 앫 exceed a speed of 6 mph (10 km/h),
vated. setting. regardless of which gear is engaged
Steering col. Only the steering 앫 press the driver’s side mirror button
column is moved. (immediately) (컄 page 28).
Steer. col. + seat Both the steering
column and the
seat are moved.
왘 Press æ or ç to set key depen-

dency to on or off.
144
Controls in detail
Control system
왘 Move the selection marker with Function Page

the æ or ç button to
the Convenience submenu. Adjust driver seat 141
Adjust passenger seat 141
왘 Press button j or k repeatedly
play: Mirror adjustment parking aid. Adjusting the dynamic seat
The selection marker is on the current The function dynamic seat adjustment lets 왘 Press æ or ç to switch function
setting. you determine the way the seat adjusts Level 1 or Level 2.
while driving.
Trip computer menu
the æ or ç button to the Use the trip computer menu to call up sta-
Dynamic Seat submenu.
tistical data on your vehicle. The following
왘 Press button j or k repeatedly information is available:
왘 Press æ or ç to switch function Function Page
play: Dyn. Multi-cont. Seat, driver
on or off. for the driver seat or Fuel consumption statistics after see
Dyn. Multi-cont. Seat, fr. pass. start below
Dynamic seat* submenu for the passenger seat. Fuel consumption statistics 146
Access the Dynamic Seat submenu via the The selection marker is on the current since last reset
Settings menu. Use the Dynamic Seat setting. Call up range (distance to empty) 147
submenu to change the settings for the dy-
namic seats. The following functions are
available:
145
Controls in detail
Control system
Fuel consumption statistics after start Fuel consumption since last reset i
왘 Press button ÿ or è repeatedly 왘 Press button ÿ or è repeatedly All statistics stored since the last en-
until you see the first function of the until you see the first function of the gine start will be reset approximately
Trip computer menu. Trip computer menu. four hours after the key in the starter
switch is turned to position 0 or re-
moved from the starter switch.
until you see this message in the left until you see this message in the dis-
display: After start. play: After reset. Resetting will not occur if you turn the
key back to position 1 or 2 within this
time period.
1 Distance driven since start 1 Distance driven since last reset

2 Time elapsed since start 2 Time elapsed since last reset
3 Average speed since start 3 Average speed since last reset
4 Average fuel consumption since start 4 Average fuel consumption since last re-
set
146
Controls in detail
Control system
Resetting fuel consumption statistics Call up range (distance to empty) TEL menu*
왘 Press button ÿ or è repeatedly 왘 Press button ÿ or è repeatedly
until you see the first function of the until you see the first function of the
Trip computer menu. Trip computer menu.
Warning! G
왘 Press button j or k repeatedly 왘 Press button j or k repeatedly A driver’s attention to the road must always
until you see the reading that you want until you see this message in the dis- be his/her primary focus when driving. For
to reset in the display. play: Range: your safety and the safety of others, we rec-
ommend that you pull over to a safe location
왘 Press and hold the reset knob in the in- In the display you will see the calculat-
and stop before placing or taking a tele-
strument cluster (컄 page 22) until the ed range based on the current fuel tank
phone call. If you choose to use the tele-
value is reset to 0. level.
phone while driving, please use the
hands-free device and only use the tele-
phone when road and traffic conditions per-
mit.
Some jurisdictions prohibit the driver from
using a cellular telephone while driving a ve-
hicle.
Bear in mind that at a speed of just 30 mph
(approximately 50 km/h), your vehicle is
covering a distance of approximately
44 feet (approximately 13.5 m) every sec-
ond.
147
Controls in detail
Control system
앫 If the telephone is on: Answering a call

Never operate radio transmitters equipped
with a built-in or attached antenna (i.e. with- The telephone will then search for a When your telephone is ready to receive
out being connected to an external antenna) network. During this time the display is calls, you can answer a call at any time. In
from inside the vehicle while the engine is empty. the display you will then see the message:
running. Doing so could lead to a malfunc-
As soon as the telephone has found a
tion of the vehicle’s electronic system, pos-
network, this is indicated in the display.
sibly resulting in an accident and personal
injury.
You can use the functions in the TEL menu

to operate your telephone, provided it is 왘 Press button í.
connected to a hands-free system and
switched on. You have answered the call. In the dis-
This standby message indicates that your play you see the length of the call.
왘 Switch on the telephone and telephone is ready for use and you can op-
COMAND*. erate it using the control system. i
왘 Press button ÿ or è on the If you do not wish to accept a call,
steering wheel repeatedly until you see press button ì.
the Tel menu in the display.
Which messages will appear in the display
field depends on whether your telephone is
switched on or off:
앫 If the telephone is off, the message in
the multifunction display is: PHONE OFF.
148
Controls in detail
Control system
Ending a call 왘 Press button j or k repeatedly

until the desired name appears in the
왘 Press button ì.
display.
You have ended the call. In the display
The stored names are displayed in in-
you will again see the standby mes-
creasing or decreasing alphabetical or-
sage.
der.
앫 If no connection is made, the con-
Dialing a number from the phone book i trol system stores the dialed num-
If your telephone is ready to receive calls, If you press and hold j or k for ber in the redial memory.
you may select and dial a number from the longer than one second, the system
phone book at any time. scrolls rapidly through the list of names Redialing
왘 Press button ÿ or è repeatedly until you release the button again.
The control system stores the most recent-
until you see the Tel menu in the dis- Cancel the quick search mode by ly dialed phone numbers. This eliminates
play. pressing ì. the need to search through your entire
왘 Press button j or k. phone book.
왘 Press button í. 왘 Press button ÿ or è repeatedly
The control system reads the phone
book which is stored in the telephone. The system dials the selected phone until you see the Tel menu in the dis-
This may take up to 30 seconds. In the number. play.
display you will see the message 앫 If the connection is successful, the
Please wait. name of the party you called and
When the message Please wait disap- the duration of the call will appear
pears, the phone book has been load- in the display.
ed.
149
Controls in detail
Control system
왘 Press button í.
In the display you see the first number
in the redial memory.
왘 Press button j or k repeatedly
until the desired name appears in the
display.
왘 Press button í.
The control system dials the selected
phone number.
150
Controls in detail
Information for driving with an automatic The automatic transmission selects indi-
transmission is found in the "Getting start- vidual gears automatically, depending on Warning! G
ed" section (컄 page 43).
앫 the selector lever position D with gear It is dangerous to shift the selector lever out
Your transmission adapts its gear shifting ranges 4, 3, 2, 1 (컄 page 153) of P or N if the engine speed is higher than
process to your individual driving style by
앫 the selected shift program (W/S) idle speed. If your foot is not firmly on the
continually adjusting the shift points up or
(컄 page 155) brake pedal, the vehicle could accelerate
down. These shift point adjustments are quickly forward or reverse. You could lose
performed based on current operating and 앫 the position of the accelerator pedal
control of the vehicle and hit someone or
driving conditions. (컄 page 156)
something. Only shift into gear when the en-
If the operating conditions change, the au- 앫 the vehicle speed gine is idling normally and when your right
tomatic transmission reacts by adjusting The current selector lever position and foot is firmly on the brake pedal.
its gear shift program. shift program (W/S) appear in the speed-
ometer display (컄 page 121). When the selector lever is in position D,
i
An additional indication of the current se- you can influence transmission shifting by
During the brief warm-up, the transmis-
sion upshifting is delayed. This allows lector lever position can be found on the 앫 limiting the gear range
the catalytic converter to heat up more cover of the shifting-gate. The indicators
앫 changing gears yourself
quickly to operating temperatures. come on when you activate a switch (e.g.
unlocking the vehicle or opening a door)
and go out after approximately 15 min-
utes.
151
Controls in detail
One-touch gearshifting i Canceling gear range limit

To avoid overrevving the engine when 왘 Press and hold the selector lever in the
Even with an automatic transmission you
the selector lever is moved to the D+ direction until D reappears in the
can change the gears yourself when the
D– direction, the transmission will not tachometer display field.
selector lever is in position D.
shift to a lower gear if the engine's
The transmission will shift from the current
max. speed would be exceeded.
Downshifting gear range directly to gear range D.
왘 Briefly press the selector lever to the Upshifting Shifting into optimal gear range
left in the D– direction.
왘 Briefly press the selector lever to the 왘 Press and hold the gear selector lever
The transmission will shift from the current right in the D+ direction. in the D– direction.
gear to the next lower gear. This action si-
multaneously limits the gear range of the The transmission will shift from the current The transmission will automatically select
transmission (컄 page 153). gear to the next higher gear as permitted the gear range suited for optimal accelera-
by the shift program. This action simulta- tion and deceleration. This will involve
neously extends the gear range of the shifting down one or more gears.
Warning! G transmission.
On slippery road surfaces, never downshift

in order to obtain braking action. This could
result in drive wheel slip and reduced vehi-
cle control. Your vehicle’s ABS will not pre-
vent this type of loss of control.
152
Controls in detail
Gear ranges Gear Effect Gear Effect

range range
With the selector lever in position D, you
can limit the transmission’s gear range by é The transmission shifts ç The transmission shifts
pressing the lever to the left (D–), and re- through fourth gear only. through second gear only.
verse the gear range limit by pressing the è The transmission shifts Allows the use of the en-
lever to the right (D+). through third gear only. gine’s braking power when
The selected gear range will appear in the With this selection you can driving
tachometer display field. If you press on use the braking effect of the 앫 on steep downgrades
the accelerator when the engine has engine.
앫 in mountainous regions
reached its rpm limit, the transmission will
upshift beyond any gear range limit 앫 under extreme operating
selected. conditions
æ The transmission operates
only in first gear.
For maximum use of the en-
gine’s braking effect on very
steep or lengthy down-
grades.
153
Controls in detail
Gear selector lever position Effect !

R Reverse gear Coasting the vehicle, or driving for any
other reason with selector lever in N
Effect Place selector lever in position R only can result in transmission damage that
when vehicle is stopped. is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz
P Park position N Neutral Limited Warranty.
Selector position when the vehicle No power is transmitted from the en-
is parked. Only place selector lever
in position P when vehicle is
gine to the drive axle. When the
brakes are released, the vehicle can
Warning! G
stopped. The park position is not in- be moved freely (pushed or towed).
tended to serve as a brake when Getting out of your vehicle with the selector
the vehicle is parked. Rather, the To avoid damage to the transmission, lever not fully engaged in position P is dan-
driver should always set the park- never engage N while driving. gerous. Also, position P alone is not intend-
ing brake in addition to placing the ed to or capable of preventing your vehicle
If the ESP is deactivated or malfunc-
selector lever in position P to se- from moving, possibly hitting people or ob-
tioning:
cure the vehicle. jects.
Only move selector lever to N if the
The key can only be removed from vehicle is in danger of skidding (e.g. Always set the parking brake in addition to
the starter switch with the selector on icy roads). shifting to position P (컄 page 45).
lever in position P. With the key re- D Drive When parked on an incline, turn the front
moved the selector lever is locked wheels towards the road curb.
The transmission shifts automatical-
in position P.
ly. All five forward gears are avail-
able.
154
Controls in detail
Program mode selector switch 왘 Press the program mode selector

Warning! G switch repeatedly until the letter of the
desired shift program appears in the
When leaving the vehicle always remove the speedometer display field
key from the starter switch, take the Smart- (컄 page 121).
you and lock the vehicle. Do not leave chil- Select W for winter driving:
dren unattended in the vehicle, or with ac- 앫 The vehicle starts out in second
cess to an unlocked vehicle. Children could gear (both forward and reverse) for
move the selector lever from position P, gentler starts. This does not apply if
which could result in an accident or serious full throttle is applied or gear
injury. range 1 is selected.
1 Program mode selector switch
앫 Traction and driving stability are im-
S Standard For regular driving proved on icy roads.
W Winter For winter driving 앫 Upshifts occur earlier even when
you give more gas. The engine then
!
operates at lower rpms and the
Never change the program mode when wheels are less likely to spin.
the selector lever is out of position P. It
could result in a change of driving char- 앫 The power transmission ratio for se-
acteristics for which you may not be lector lever position R changes de-
prepared. pending on the program mode
selected (W or S).
155
Controls in detail
Accelerator position Kickdown Emergency operation (Limp home

mode)
Use kickdown when you want maximum
Your driving style influences the transmis-
acceleration.
sion’s shifting behavior: If vehicle acceleration worsens or the
왘 Press the accelerator past the point of transmission no longer shifts, the trans-
Less throttle Earlier upshifting
resistance. mission is most likely operating in limp
More throttle Later upshifting home (emergency operation) mode. In this
The transmission shifts into a lower
gear. mode, only 2nd gear and reverse gear can
be activated.
왘 Ease on the accelerator when you have
왘 Stop the vehicle.
reached the desired speed.
왘 Move selector lever to P.
The transmission shifts up again.
왘 Turn off the engine.
왘 Wait at least ten seconds before re-
starting.
왘 Restart the engine.
왘 Move selector lever to position D (for
2nd gear) or R.
왘 Have the transmission checked at an
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center as
soon as possible.
156
Controls in detail
Good visibility
Good visibility
Information on the windshield wipers The rear view mirror will not react if
Electrolyte has an irritating effect. Do not al-
(컄 page 47) and for setting the rear view
앫 reverse gear is engaged low the liquid to come into contact with
mirrors (컄 page 38) is found in the "Get-
eyes, skin, clothing, or respiratory system.
ting started" section. 앫 the interior lighting is turned on
In case it does, immediately flush affected
area with water, and seek medical help if
Rear view mirror Warning! G necessary.
Automatic antiglare rear view mirror The automatic antiglare function does not
The reflection brightness of the exterior

react if incoming light is not aimed directly Warning! G
at sensors in the inside rear view mirror.
rear view mirror on the driver’s side and
The inside rear view mirror and the exterior Exercise care when using the passenger
the inside rear view mirror will respond au-
rear view mirror on the driver’s side do not side exterior rear view mirror. The mirror
tomatically to glare when:
react. surface is convex (outwardly curved surface
앫 the ignition is switched on, and for a wider field of view). Objects in mirror
Glare can endanger you and others.
앫 incoming light from headlamps falls on are closer than they appear. Check your in-
the sensor in the inside rear view mir- side rear view mirror or glance over your
shoulder before changing lanes.
ror Warning! G
In the case of an accident liquid electrolyte !
may escape from the mirror housing if the Electrolyte drops coming into contact
mirror glass breaks. with the vehicle paint finish can be
completely removed only while in the
liquid state by applying plenty of water.
157
Controls in detail
Good visibility
Parking position* Headlamp cleaning system* Sun visors

For easier parking you can store a parking
The button is located on the left side of the The sun visors protect you from sun glare
position for the passenger exterior rear
dashboard. while driving.
view mirror (컄 page 111).
To activate the automatic mirror setting,
see "Setting parking position for exterior
Warning! G
rear view mirror" (컄 page 144). Do not use the vanity mirror while driving.
If the passenger side mirror is selected Keep the mirrors in the sun visors closed
(컄 page 111) the exterior rear view mirror while vehicle is in motion. Reflected glare
will be turned downward in the stored po- can endanger you and others.
sition as soon as you engage reverse
gear R.
왘 Swing sun visors down when you expe-
The exterior rear view mirror returns to its 1 Headlamp washer button rience glare.
previously stored driving position
왘 Switch on ignition.
앫 10 seconds after you put the gear se-
lector lever out of position R 왘 Press button 1.
앫 immediately once you exceed a speed The headlamps are cleaned with a
of approx. 6 mph (10 km/h) high-pressure water jet.
앫 immediately when you press the button Information on filling up the washer reser-
for driver’s side mirror (컄 page 39) voir can be found in the "Operation" sec-
tion (컄 page 267).
158
Controls in detail
Good visibility
1 Sun visor 1 Sun visor 1 Mounting

2 Mounting 2 Mirror cover 2 Additional visor*
3 Mirror lamp 3 Sun visor
왘 Swing sun visor 1 down when you ex-
4 Vanity mirror
perience glare. If sunlight enters through a side window:
왘 Make sure that the sun visor is properly
왘 Disengage sun visor from mounting 1.
engaged in the mounting.
왘 Pivot sun visor to the side.
왘 Lift the mirror cover to access the mir-
ror. The sun visors are extendable.
Lamp 3 switches on. 왘 Adjust the sun visors by pushing or
pulling in the direction of the arrows.
159
Controls in detail
Good visibility
i Rear window sunshade*

If sunlight enters through a side win-
Warning! G
The switch is located in the center console.
dow, disengage sun visor from
When operating the rear window sunshade,
mounting 1 and pivot to the side.
be sure that there is no danger of anyone be-
Mirror lamp 3 will switch off. ing harmed by the raising or lowering proce-
dure.
The raising or lowering procedure can be im-
mediately halted by briefly pressing the up-
per or lower half of the switch.
Briefly press upper or lower half of the
switch again to raise or lower the rear win-
dow sunshade completely.
왘 Turn the key to starter switch position
1 or 2. Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO*:
press the start/stop button once or
twice. Warning! G
왘 Press the switch briefly at 1 to raise the When leaving the vehicle, always remove the
sunshade. SmartKey from starter switch, and lock your
왘 Press the switch briefly at 1 to lower vehicle. Do not leave children unattended in
the sunshade. the vehicle, or with access to an unlocked
vehicle. Unsupervised use of vehicle equip-
Always raise the sunshade fully for its sup- ment can cause serious personal injury.
port against the window frame.
160
Controls in detail
Good visibility
Roller sunblind* in the rear doors
왘 Pull the roller sunblind out using the

hooks.
왘 Attach the hooks at the top.
!
Always guide the sunblind by hand. Do
not let it snap back, as the retractor
could be damaged.
161
Controls in detail
Climate control
Climate control
162
Controls in detail
Climate control
Item Item
1 Control panel 1 Swiveling left rear center air outlet
2 Thumbwheel, left center air outlet 2 Swiveling right rear center air outlet
3 Swiveling left center air outlet 3 Thumbwheel, right rear center air
4 Center air outlet outlet
5 Swiveling right center air outlet 4 Thumbwheel, left rear center air
outlet
6 Thumbwheel, right center air outlet
7 Thumbwheel for adding cold air Rear air outlets The storage compartment between the
8 Swiveling side air outlet front seats can be ventilated (컄 page 229).
9 Side air defroster outlet, fixed
10 Side air outlet, adjustable
i
For draft-free ventilation, move the slid-
ers for the center outlets to the middle
position.
163
Controls in detail
Climate control
1 Temperature, left 8 Residual heat 15 Air distribution and air volume (au-
2 Windshield defroster 9 Economy mode (no cooling) tomatic)
3 Increase airflow 10 Air distribution display

4 MAX COOL display 11 On/off
5 Air distribution rocker switch 12 Airflow display
6 Rear window defroster 13 Decrease airflow
7 Temperature, right 14 Air recirculation button
164
Controls in detail
Climate control
The climate control is operational whenev- Setting the temperature

er the engine is running. You can operate Warning! G
the climate control system in either the au- Use temperature controls 1 and 7 to sepa-
tomatic or manual mode. The system cools Follow the recommended settings for heat- rately adjust the air temperature on each
or heats the interior depending on the se- ing and cooling given on the following pag- side of the passenger compartment. You
lected interior temperature and the cur- es. Otherwise the windows could fog up, should raise or lower the temperature set-
rent outside temperature. impairing visibility and endangering you and ting in small increments, preferably start-
others. ing at 72°F (22°C).
Nearly all dust particles, pollutants and
odors are filtered out before outside air en-
ters the passenger compartment through i Increasing
the air distribution system. If the vehicle interior is hot, ventilate 왘 Turn the control slightly to the right.
the interior before driving off. The climate control system will corre-
The air conditioning will not engage (no
cooling) if the ACOFF mode is selected Keep the air intake grille in front of the spondingly adjust the interior air tem-
(컄 page 170). windshield free of snow and debris. perature.
Do not obstruct air flow by placing ob-
Decreasing
jects on the air flow-through exhaust
slots below the rear window. 왘 Turn the control slightly to the left.
The climate control system will corre-
spondingly adjust the interior air tem-
perature.
165
Controls in detail
Climate control
Adjusting air distribution The current air distribution appears in Heating:

the air distribution display 10.
Only in manual mode is it possible to lower
Adjusting manually the temperature in the headroom by regu-
Adjusting automatically
lating the cold-airflow using thumbwheel 7
Use air distribution control 5 (컄 page 164)
왘 Press the U button. (컄 page 162).
to adjust the air distribution.
The indicator lamp on the button
Symbol Function Windshield fogged on the outside
comes on. The air distribution and vol-
a Directs air through the ume is adjusted automatically. 왘 Switch the windshield wipers on.
center, side and rear
Adjusting center air outlets: 왘 Press the U button.
passenger compartment
air outlets The thumbwheels for left 2 and right 6
Adjusting air volume
center air outlets are automatically posi-
Z Directs air to the win-
tioned for optimum interior airflow. In this
dows
position, center air outlet 4 and swiveling Adjusting manually
X Directs air into the entire left and right center outlets 3 and 5 are ful-
vehicle interior Five blower speeds are available.
ly opened.
Y Directs air to the foot- 왘 Press ˜ to decrease or Q to in-
wells crease air volume to the desired level.
The Auto display disappears and the
왘 Press air distribution rocker switch 5 automatic mode is switched off. The
(컄 page 164). selected blower speed is shown in the
The indicator lamp on the U button display.
goes out.
166
Controls in detail
Climate control
Adjusting automatically Defrosting The indicator lamp on the button goes

out. Defrosting is turned off.
왘 Press the U button.
i
The air volume is adjusted automatical- Air recirculation mode
These settings should only be selected
ly.
for a short time.
Switch to air recirculation mode to prevent
Maximum cooling MAX COOL unpleasant odors from entering the vehicle
Activating from the outside. This setting cuts off the
If the left air distribution/airflow volume 왘 Press button P. intake of outside air and recirculates the
control 15 (컄 page 164) is set to U and air in the passenger compartment.
there is a high need for cooling, the display The indicator lamp on the button
"MAX COOL" 4 (컄 page 164) appears in comes on.
the climate control. or
Warning! G
This provides the fastest possible cooling 왘 Switch off air recirculation, if selected. When the outside temperature is below
of the vehicle interior (when windows and Press button O. 41°F (5°C), only switch to air recirculation
sliding/pop-up roof are closed). mode for short periods to prevent window
The indicator lamp on the button goes
fogging.
out.
왘 Close center air outlets.
왘 Open left and right side air outlets and
adjust side air outlets upwards.
Deactivating
왘 Press button P.
167
Controls in detail
Climate control
Activating Deactivating
왘 Press button O.
Warning! G 왘 Press button O.
The indicator lamp on the button Never operate the windows or slid- The indicator lamp on the button goes
comes on. ing/pop-up roof* if there is the possibility of out.
anyone being harmed by the opening or
i closing procedure. i
If you keep button O pressed, the In case the procedure causes potential dan- If you keep button O pressed, the
side windows and sliding/pop-up roof* ger, the procedure can be immediately halt- side windows and sliding/po-up roof*
will be closed. ed by releasing the control button. To will be returned to their previous posi-
tion.
The air recirculation mode is activated reverse direction of movement press
automatically at high outside tempera- button Œ for opening or ‹ for clos-
tures. ing. The air recirculation mode is deactivated
automatically:
If you have turned off the air condition-
er (컄 page 170) or the outside 앫 after five minutes if the outside temper-
temperature is below 41°F (5°C), the ature is below approximately 41°F
air recirculation mode will not switch (5°C)
on automatically.
168
Controls in detail
Climate control
앫 after five minutes if the air conditioner Rear window defroster

is turned off Warning! G
The rear window defroster uses a large
앫 after 30 minutes if the outside temper-
amount of power. To keep the battery Any accumulation of snow and ice should be
ature is above approximately 41°F removed from the rear window before driv-
drain to a minimum, switch off the defrost-
(5°C) ing. Visibility could otherwise be impaired,
er as soon as the rear window is clear. The
At outside temperatures above 79°F defroster is automatically deactivated af- endangering you and others.
(26°C), the system will not automatically ter approximately 6 to 17 minutes of oper-
switch back to outside air. A quantity of ation depending on the outside !
outside air is added after approximately temperature.
If the rear window defroster switches
30 minutes.
off too soon and the indicator lamp
Activating
starts blinking, this means that too
왘 Press button F. many electrical consumers are operat-
The indicator lamp on the button ing simultaneously and there is insuffi-
comes on. cient voltage in the battery. The system
responds automatically by deactivating
Deactivating the rear window defroster.
왘 Press button F again. As soon as the battery has sufficient

voltage, the rear window defroster au-
The indicator lamp on the button goes tomatically turns itself back on.
out.
169
Controls in detail
Climate control
Deactivating the climate control sys- Air conditioner Activating

tem
Moist air can fog up the windows. You can
The air conditioner is operational while the
dehumidify the air with the air conditioner.
engine is running and cools the interior air
Deactivating to the temperature set by the operator. 왘 Press ACOFF again (컄 page 164).
왘 Press button M (컄 page 164). The indicator lamp on the
i
button ACOFF goes out.
Reactivating Condensation may drip out from under-
neath the vehicle. This is normal and The air conditioner uses the refrigerant
왘 Press button M again(컄 page 164). R134a. This refrigerant is free of CFCs
not an indication of a malfunction.
or which are harmful to the ozone layer.
왘 Press any button on the climate control Deactivating !
panel (컄 page 164). It is possible to deactivate the air condi- If the air conditioner cannot be turned
tioning (cooling) function of the climate on again, this indicates that the air con-
control system. The air in the vehicle will ditioner is losing refrigerant. The com-
then no longer be cooled or dehumidified. pressor has turned itself off.
왘 Press button ACOFF (컄 page 164). Have the air conditioner checked at the
The indicator lamp on the nearest authorized Mercedes-Benz
button ACOFF comes on. Center.
170
Controls in detail
Climate control
Residual heat and ventilation* Deactivating i

왘 Press button T (컄 page 164). How long the system will provide heat-
With the engine switched off, it is possible
ing depends on the coolant tempera-
to continue to heat or ventilate the interior The indicator lamp on button T
ture and the temperature set by the
for up to 30 minutes. This feature makes goes out.
operator. The blower will run at speed
use of the residual heat produced by the The residual heat is automatically turned setting 1 regardless of the air distribu-
engine. off: tion control setting.
Activating 앫 when the ignition is switched on
왘 Turn the key in the starter switch to 앫 after about 30 minutes
position 1 or remove it from the starter 앫 if the battery voltage drops
switch.
왘 Press button T (컄 page 164).
The indicator lamp on button T
comes on.
171
Controls in detail
172
Controls in detail
1 Automatic climate control panel

2 Thumbwheel center air outlet, left
3 Adjustable center air outlet, left
4 Air outlet
5 Adjustable center air outlet, right
6 Thumbwheel center air outlet, right
7 Thumbwheel for adding cold air
8 Adjustable side air outlet
9 Side air defroster outlet, fixed
10 Side air outlet, adjustable 1 Thumbwheel for side air outlet 1 Adjustable center air outlet, left
2 Adjustable side air outlet 2 Adjustable center air outlet, right
3 Thumbwheel for center air outlet,
left
4 Control panel for rear air condition-
ing
5 Thumbwheel for center air outlet,
right
173
Controls in detail
1 Air distribution, left 8 Automatic air distribution, right and 13 Decrease airflow
2 Windshield defroster blower speed 14 Economy mode (no cooling)
3 Temperature rocker switch, left 9 Activated charcoal filter Residual heat
4 Display 10 Rear air-conditioning remote con- 15 Air recirculation button

trol 16 Automatic air distribution, left and
5 Temperature rocker switch, right
11 Increase airflow blower speed
6 Rear window defroster
12 On/off
7 Air distribution, right
174
Controls in detail
The automatic climate control is a 4-zone With the help of a sun sensor, the automat- The activated charcoal filter, when
intelligent climate control system. Your ve- ic climate control determines the relation switched on, markedly reduces odors and
hicle interior is divided into 4 zones. of the sun to the vehicle and automatically removes pollutants from the air entering
adjusts the inside temperature for every in- the passenger compartment.
dividual zone.
!
You can set the temperature for each of
If the interior has been heated, air the
the 4 zones separately. These settings can
vehicle out before driving.
be assigned to a key and stored in memory
(컄 page 144). Keep the air intake between the hood
and the windshield free of snow.
The automatic climate control is operation-
al whenever the engine is running. It cools Do not cover the ventilation slot be-
the vehicle’s interior according to the an- tween the rear shelf and the rear win-
gle and intensity of the sun’s rays, the out- dow.
side temperature and the selected
temperature. The automatic climate control is operation-
al whenever the engine is running. You can
i operate the climate control system in ei-
Condensation may drip from under- ther the automatic or manual mode. The
neath the vehicle. This is normal and system cools or heats the interior depend-
not an indication of a malfunction. ing on the selected interior temperature
and the current outside temperature.
175
Controls in detail
Nearly all dust particles, pollutants and i Increasing

odors are filtered out before outside air en- If the vehicle interior is hot, ventilate 왘 Push top of temperature control rocker
ters the passenger compartment through the interior before driving off. switch 3 and/or 5.
the air distribution system.
Keep the air intake grille in front of the The automatic climate control system
The air conditioning will not engage (no windshield free of snow and debris. will correspondingly adjust the interior
cooling) if the economy mode ACOFF is se-
Do not obstruct air flow by placing ob- air temperature.
lected (컄 page 174).
jects on the air flow-through exhaust
slots below the rear window. Decreasing
Warning! G 왘 Push bottom of temperature control
Setting the temperature rocker switch 3 and/or 5.
Follow the recommended settings for heat-
ing and cooling given on the following pag- The automatic climate control system
Use temperature control 3 for the left side
es. Otherwise the windows could fog up, will correspondingly adjust the interior
or 5 for the right side to separately adjust
impairing visibility and endangering you and air temperature.
the air temperature on each side of the
others. Heating:
passenger compartment. You should raise
or lower the temperature setting in small Only in manual air distribution mode is it
increments, preferably starting at 72°F possible to lower the temperature in the
(22°C). headroom by adding outside air using
thumbweel 7 (컄 page 172) in the dash-
i
board.
When operating the climate control
system in automatic mode, you will
only rarely need to adjust the tempera-
ture, air volume and air distribution.
176
Controls in detail
Adjusting air distribution The following pages use symbol set 1 to Adjusting air volume
explain the operation of the air distribution
control. Please see above chart for refer-
Adjusting manually Adjusting manually
ence to the corresponding function of sym-
왘 Turn air distribution controls 1 and 7 bol set 2 should your vehicle show those Nine blower speeds are available.
(컄 page 174) to manually adjust to the on the air distribution control switch. 왘 Press ˜ to decrease or Q to in-
desired air distribution on each side of
crease air volume to the desired level.
the passenger compartment. Adjusting automatically
The Auto display disappears and the
The indicator lamp in the U button 왘 Press left or right U button again. automatic mode is switched off. The
goes out.
The indicator lamp in the U button selected blower speed is shown in the
illuminates. The air distribution is ad- display.
Symbol Function
justed automatically
Set 1 Set 2 Adjusting automatically
Õ a Directs air through the Windshield fogged on the outside 왘 Press left or right U button.
center, side and rear 왘 Switch the windshield wipers on.
passenger compartment The air volume is adjusted automatical-
air outlets 왘 Press the left or right U button. ly.
Ô Z Directs air to the win- Maximum cooling MAX COOL

dows
Ò X Directs air into the entire If the left and right air distribution controls
vehicle interior as well as the airflow volume control are
set to U and there is a high need for
Ó Y Directs air to the foot-
cooling, the display "MAX COOL" appears
wells
in the front and rear display.
177
Controls in detail
This provides the fastest possible cooling Deactivating i

of the vehicle interior (when windows and If you keep button O pressed, the
왘 Press button P.
sliding/pop-up roof are closed). side windows and the sliding/pop-up
roof* will be closed.
Defrosting out. Defrosting is turned off.
The air recirculation mode is activated
Air recirculation mode automatically:
i
These settings should only be selected 앫 at high outside temperatures
Switch to air recirculation mode to prevent
for a short time. unpleasant odors from entering the vehicle 앫 if the concentration of carbon mon-
from the outside. This setting cuts off the oxide and nitrogen oxide in the out-
Activating intake of outside air and recirculates the side air increases, for example in a
왘 Press button P. air in the passenger compartment. tunnel (charcoal filter activated
(컄 page 180))
comes on. Warning! G If you have turned off the air condition-
er (컄 page 170) or the outside
왘 Switch off air recirculation, if selected. When the outside temperature is below temperature is below 41°F (5°C), the
왘 Press button O. 41°F (5°C), only switch to air recirculation air recirculation mode will not switch
mode for short periods to prevent window on automatically.
fogging.
out.
왘 Close center air outlets. Activating
왘 Adjust side air outlets upwards. 왘 Press button O.
comes on.
178
Controls in detail
Deactivating The air recirculation mode is deactivated

Warning! G 왘 Press button O.
automatically:
앫 after five minutes if the outside temper-
Never operate the windows or slid- The indicator lamp on the button goes
ing/pop-up roof* if there is the possibility of ature is below approximately 41°F
out.
anyone being harmed by the opening or (5°C)
closing procedure. i 앫 after five minutes if the air conditioner
In case the procedure causes potential dan- If you keep button O pressed, the is turned off (ACOFF)
ger, the procedure can be immediately halt- side windows and the sliding/pop-up
앫 after 30 minutes if the outside temper-
ed by releasing the control button. To roof* will be returned to their previous
ature is above approximately 41°F
reverse direction of movement press position.
(5°C)
button Œ for opening or ‹ for clos-
At outside temperatures above 79°F
ing.
(26°C) the system will not automatically
switch back to outside air. A quantity of
outside air is added after approximately
30 minutes.
179
Controls in detail
Charcoal filter Deactivating Rear window defroster

왘 Press button e.
An activated charcoal filter markedly re- The rear window defroster uses a large
duces bad odors and removes pollutants The indicator lamp on the button goes amount of power. To keep the battery
from air entering the passenger compart- out. drain to a minimum, switch off the defrost-
ment. er as soon as the rear window is clear. The
i defroster is automatically deactivated af-
Activating If you keep button e pressed, the ter approximately 6 to 17 minutes of oper-
side windows and the sliding/pop-up ation depending on the outside
왘 Press button e.
roof* will be returned to their previous temperature.
The indicator lamp on the button lights position.
up. Activating
The system switches automatically to the The automatic air recirculation mode does 왘 Press button F.
air recirculation mode if the carbon not function if economy mode ACOFF is se-
monoxide (CO) or nitrogen oxide (NOX) lected or if the outside temperature has The indicator lamp on the button
concentration of the outside air increases fallen below 41°F (5°C). comes on.
beyond a predetermined level. The activated charcoal filter should be Deactivating
switched off when windows fog up on the
i inside, or if the passenger compartment 왘 Press button F again.
If you keep button e pressed, the needs to be quickly heated or cooled The indicator lamp on the button goes
side windows and the sliding/pop-up down. out.
roof* will be closed.
180
Controls in detail
Air conditioner Activating

Warning! G Moist air can fog up the windows. You can
The air conditioner is operational while the
Any accumulation of snow and ice should be dehumidify the air with the air conditioner.
engine is running and cools the interior air
removed from the rear window before driv- to the temperature set by the operator. 왘 Press ACOFF again.
ing. Visibility could otherwise be impaired,
i The indicator lamp on
endangering you and others.
the ACOFF button goes out.
Condensation may drip out from under-
neath the vehicle. This is normal and The air conditioner uses the refrigerant
!
not an indication of a malfunction. R134a. This refrigerant is free of CFCs
If the rear window defroster switches which are harmful to the ozone layer.
off too soon and the indicator lamp
starts blinking, this means that too Deactivating !
many electrical consumers are operat- It is possible to deactivate the air condi- If the air conditioner cannot be turned
ing simultaneously and there is insuffi- tioning (cooling) function of the automatic on again, this indicates that the air con-
cient voltage in the battery. The system climate control system. The air in the vehi- ditioner is losing refrigerant. The com-
responds automatically by deactivating cle will then no longer be cooled or dehu- pressor has turned itself off.
the rear window defroster. midified.
Have the air conditioner checked at the
As soon as the battery has sufficient 왘 Press button ACOFF. nearest authorized Mercedes-Benz
voltage, the rear window defroster au- Center.
The indicator lamp on the
tomatically turns itself back on.
button ACOFF lights up.
181
Controls in detail
Residual heat and ventilation The residual heat is automatically turned Rear air conditioning
off
With the engine switched off, it is possible
앫 when the ignition is switched on
to continue to heat or ventilate the interior
for up to 30 minutes. This feature makes 앫 after about 30 minutes
use of the residual heat produced by the 앫 if the battery voltage drops
engine.
i
Activating How long the system will provide heat-
왘 Turn the key in the starter switch to ing depends on the coolant tempera-
position 1 or remove it from the starter ture and the temperature set by the
switch. operator. The blower will run at speed
1 Swiveling left rear center air outlet
setting 1 regardless of the air distribu-
왘 Press button T. 2 Swiveling right rear center air outlet
tion control setting.
3 Thumbwheel, left rear center air outlet
4 Temperature rocker switch, left
comes on.
5 Display
6 Temperature rocker switch, right
Deactivating
7 Thumbwheel, right rear center air out-
왘 Press button T. let
goes out.
182
Controls in detail
Adjusting the rear settings with the The temperature display disappears ap-
front control panel proximately 5 seconds after the last key
confirmation and switches back to the nor-
mal display.
i
The normal display will appear when
Display
the ™ button is pressed again.
1 Temperature, left
2 Temperature, right Display
왘 Press the ™ button (컄 page 174).
Basic settings
The display switches over.
We recommend setting the temperature
The temperature for the rear left- and
on both the left- and right-hand sides to
right-hand sides of the vehicle can be set
72°F. This ensures a pleasant temperature
with temperature rocker switches 3 and 5.
in the rear of the vehicle.
The temperatures for the left- and
right-hand sides can be set using tempera-
ture rocker switches 4 and 6.
i
The rear air conditioning will not cool
the air when economy mode ACOFF
has been selected in the front control
panel.
183
Controls in detail
Power windows
Power windows
Opening and closing the windows 왘 Turn key in the starter switch to
Warning! G position 1 or 2.
The side windows can be opened and
closed electrically. The switches for all of When closing the windows, be sure that Opening the windows
the side windows are on the driver’s door. there is no danger of anyone being harmed
왘 Press switch to resistance point.
The switches for the respective windows by the closing procedure.
are on the front passenger and the rear In case of obstruction, the automatic rever- The window will move downwards until
doors. sal will not operate if a door window is being you release the switch.
closed by pulling the switch and holding it,
or when using the SmartKey. Closing the windows
The closing procedure of door windows can 왘 Pull on switch.
be immediately reversed by either pressing The window will move upwards until
or pulling the switch, or pressing you release the switch.
button Œ on the SmartKey and holding
it. Fully opening windows
When leaving the vehicle, always remove the 왘 Press switch past resistance point and
key from starter switch, take it with you, and release.
1 Rear window override switch lock your vehicle. Do not leave children un-
attended in the vehicle, or with access to an The window opens completely.
(컄 page 71)
2 Right front window unlocked vehicle. Unsupervised use of vehi-
3 Right rear window cle equipment can cause serious personal
4 Left rear window injury.
5 Left front window
184
Controls in detail
Power windows
Fully closing windows Stopping windows Opening and closing the windows with
the Smartkey
왘 Pull switch past resistance point and 왘 Press or pull respective switch again.
release. The sliding/pop-up roof* will also be
i opened or closed when the power windows
The window closes completely.
You can also open or close the win- are operated with the key (컄 page 188).
If the upward movement of the window is dows using the following:
blocked during the closing procedure, the
window will stop and open slightly.
앫 SmartKey (summer opening/con- Warning! G
venience feature), see below
Never operate the windows or slid-
앫 Button O in the control panel of
Warning! G the climate control (컄 page 164) or ing/pop-up roof* if there is the possibility of
automatic climate control
Driver’s door only: closing procedure.
(컄 page 174)
If within five seconds switch 1 is again
In case the procedure causes potential dan-
pulled past the resistance point and re- 앫 Button e in the control panel of
ger, the procedure can be immediately halt-
leased, the automatic reversal will not oper- the automatic climate control
ed by releasing the control button. To
ate. (컄 page 174)
reverse direction of movement press
button Œ for opening or ‹ for clos-
ing.
왘 Aim transmitter eye at the front door

handle.
185
Controls in detail
Power windows
Opening (Summer opening feature) Closing (Convenience feature) Synchronizing power windows
왘 Press and hold button Œ after un- 왘 Press and hold button ‹ after lock-
The power windows must be resynchro-
locking the vehicle. ing the vehicle.
nized each time after the battery has been
The windows and sliding/pop-up roof* The windows and sliding/pop-up roof* disconnected.
begin to open after approximately one begin to close after approximately one
왘 Pull the power window switches until
second. second.
the side windows are closed and hold
왘 Release transmit button to interrupt 왘 Release transmit button to interrupt the switches for approximately one
procedure. procedure. second.
Ensure that all side windows and the slid-
ing/pop-up roof* are properly closed be-
fore leaving the vehicle.
186
Controls in detail
Opening and closing the sliding/pop-up With the roof closed or tilted open, a 왘 Turn the key in the starter switch to
roof* screen can be slid into the roof opening to position 1 or 2.
guard against sun rays. When sliding the
The sliding/pop-up roof can be opened roof open, the screen will also retract. Opening and closing the sliding/pop-up
and closed electrically. The switch for the roof
sliding/pop-up roof is on the overhead
control panel. Warning! G 왘 To open, close, raise or lower the slid-
ing/pop-up roof, move the switch to
When closing the sliding/pop-up roof, be the resistance point in the required di-
sure that there is no danger of anyone being rection.
harmed by the closing procedure.
Release the switch when the roof has
The closing procedure of the sliding/pop-up reached the required position.
roof can be immediately reversed by either
moving the switch in any direction, or press- Opening and closing the sliding/pop-up
ing button Œ on the key and holding it. roof automatically
When leaving the vehicle, always remove the 왘 Move the switch past the resistance
key from starter switch, take it with you, and point in the direction required and re-
1 Push back to slide roof open lock your vehicle. Do not leave children un- lease.
2 Push forward to slide roof closed attended in the vehicle, or with access to an
3 Push up to raise roof at rear unlocked vehicle. Unsupervised use of vehi- The sliding/pop-up roof opens or clos-
4 Pull down to lower roof at rear cle equipment can cause serious personal es completely.
injury.
187
Controls in detail
Stopping the sliding/pop-up roof ! Opening and closing the sliding/pop-up

To avoid damaging the seals, do not roof with the SmartKey
왘 Move the switch in any direction.
transport any objects with sharp edges The power windows will also be opened or
If the movement of the sliding/pop-up
which can stick out of the slid- closed when the sliding/pop-up roof is op-
roof is blocked during the closing pro-
ing/pop-up roof. erated with the key (컄 page 185).
cedure, the roof will stop and reopen
slightly. Open the sliding/pop-up roof only if
the roof is clear of snow or ice. Warning! G
i
The sliding/pop-up roof can be opened
You can also open or close the slid- or closed manually should an electrical Never operate the windows or slid-
ing/pop-up roof using the following: malfunction occur (컄 page 331). ing/pop-up roof if there is the possibility of
앫 SmartKey, see below
closing procedure.
앫 Button O in the control panel of
In case the procedure causes potential dan-
the climate control (컄 page 164) or
ger, the procedure can be immediately halt-
automatic climate control
ed by releasing the remote control button.
(컄 page 174)
To reverse direction of movement
앫 Button e in the control panel of press Œ for opening or ‹ for closing.
the automatic climate control
(컄 page 174)
handle.
188
Controls in detail
Opening (Summer opening feature) Closing (Convenience feature) Synchronizing the sliding/pop-up roof
왘 Press and hold button Œ after un- 왘 Press and hold button ‹ after lock-
The power sliding/pop-up roof must be re-
locking the vehicle. ing the vehicle.
synchronized each time
The windows and sliding/pop-up roof The windows and sliding/pop-up roof
앫 after the battery has been disconnect-
begin to open after approximately one begin to close after approximately one
ed
second. second.
앫 the sliding/pop-up roof has been
왘 Release transmit button to interrupt 왘 Release transmit button to interrupt
closed manually (컄 page 331)
procedure. procedure.
앫 the sliding/pop-up roof does not open
Ensure that all side windows and the slid-
smoothly
ing/pop-up roof are properly closed before
leaving the vehicle. 앫 a malfunction
Synchronizing
왘 Turn the key in the starter switch to
position 1 or 2.
왘 Press the switch in the "raise" direction
until the sliding/pop-up roof is fully
raised at the rear (컄 page 187).
Hold the switch for approximately one
second.
189
Controls in detail
Panorama sliding/pop-up roof* Opening and closing the roller sunblind
If the vehicle rolls over, there is a danger of
occupants without fastened seat belts being The roller sunblinds can only be opened or
closed when the panorama sliding/pop-up
Warning! G thrown out of the opening.
roof is closed. The front and rear roller sun-
In this case there is an increased risk of in-
jury even for passengers with fastened seat blind cannot be operated individually.
When closing the panorama sliding/pop-up
roof, ensure that no one is in danger of being belts, as entire body parts or portions of
injured. them may protrude from the passenger
compartment.
If the panorama sliding/pop-up roof is
closed with the convenience closing feature
and becomes blocked, it will not open auto-
matically.
Should this occur, press the release button
on the key and hold it down; the panorama
sliding/pop-up roof opens again.
Make sure to remove the key from the igni- Panorama sliding/pop-up roof switch
tion lock even when leaving the vehicle for 1 Open
only a brief period of time. 2 Close
In the event of an accident, the glass in ve-
hicles with a glass roof may shatter.
190
Controls in detail
Opening and closing the panorama slid-

Warning! G ing/pop-up roof
When closing the roller sunblinds, make

sure that no one is in danger of being injured
by the closing procedure.
Opening the roller sunblinds automati-

cally
왘 Press the switch past the resistance
Roller sunblind switch, rear
point in direction 1 and release it
1 Open again.
2 Close 1 Push back to slide roof open
The roller sunblinds open completely. 2 Push forward to slide roof closed
왘 Make sure that the ignition is turned on
3 Push back to raise roof
or press the KEYLESS-GO start/stop Stopping the roller sunblinds 4 Push forward to lower roof
button*.
왘 Press the switch again in any direction. 왘 Make sure that the ignition is turned on
왘 Press the switch in the desired direc-
or press the KEYLESS-GO start/stop
tion.
button*.
The sun roller sunblinds open.
왘 Push the switch to the resistance point
왘 Release the switch when the roller sun- in the required direction.
blinds have reached the desired posi-
The panorama sliding/pop-up roof
tion.
opens.
191
Controls in detail
왘 Release the switch once the roof has Opening and closing windows and pan- Opening (Summer opening feature)
reached the desired position. orama sliding/pop-up roof with the
If roller blinds are closed:
SmartKey
Opening and closing the panorama slid- 왘 Press and hold button Œ after un-
The power windows will also be opened or
ing/pop-up roof automatically locking the vehicle.
closed when the panorama sliding/pop-up
왘 Press the switch past the resistance roof is operated with the key (컄 page 185). The windows and roller blinds begin to
point in the desired direction. open after approximately one second.
The panorama sliding/pop-up roof Warning! G 왘 Press and hold button Œ again.
opens completely. The panorama sliding/pop-up roof tilts
Never operate the windows or slid- and opens.
! ing/pop-up roof if there is the possibility of
Do not transport any objects that pro- anyone being harmed by the opening or If roller blinds are already open:
trude out of the panorama slid- closing procedure. 왘 Press and hold button Œ after un-
ing/pop-up roof as the seals could be In case the procedure causes potential dan- locking the vehicle.
damaged. ger, the procedure can be immediately halt- The windows move down and the pan-
ed by releasing the remote control button. orama sliding/pop-up roof tilts and
Stopping the panorama sliding/pop-up To reverse direction of movement opens after approximately one second.
roof press Œ for opening or ‹ for closing.
왘 Release transmit button to interrupt
왘 Press the switch again in any direction.
procedure.
handle.
192
Controls in detail
Closing (Convenience feature) Synchronizing the panorama slid- Solar panel*

ing/pop-up roof
왘 Press and hold button ‹ after lock-
Combined with the panorama slid-
ing the vehicle. It is necessary to resynchronize the pan-
ing/pop-up roof a solar panel is available.
orama sliding/pop-up roof after:
The windows and panorama slid- The solar cells convert natural light into
ing/pop-up roof begin to close after 앫 voltage supply interruption due to a electrical energy. When the engine is
approximately one second. disconnected or discharged battery switched off, the energy generated auto-
왘 Press and hold button Œ again. 앫 the roof has been closed manually matically switches on the ventilation fan.
The constant air flow creates a cooler tem-
The roller blinds close. 앫 the roof has been opened with an perature for cars parked in the sunlight.
abrupt movement
왘 Release transmit button to interrupt The air flow depends on the intensity of the
procedure. 앫 a malfunction solar radiation. The ventilation starts 2
Ensure that all side windows and the pan- 왘 Remove the fuse from the main fuse minutes after switching off the engine.
orama sliding/pop-up roof are properly box.
closed before leaving the vehicle.
왘 Replace the fuse in the main fuse box.
왘 Turn the ignition on.
왘 Press the switch in direction 3.
왘 Wait until the panorama sliding/pop-up
roof is raised and then keep the switch
pressed for approximately 1 second.
193
Controls in detail
Driving systems
Driving systems
The following driving systems are ex- Cruise control
plained on the following pages: Warning! G
Cruise control automatically maintains the
앫 Cruise control
speed you set for your vehicle. Cruise control is a convenience system de-
앫 Distronic* signed to assist the driver during vehicle op-
Use of cruise control is recommended for
eration. The driver must always remain
앫 AIRMATIC DC* driving at a constant speed for extended
responsible for the vehicle speed and for
앫 Park assist (Parktronic*) periods of time. You can set any speed
safe brake operation.
over 20 mph (30 km/h).
The BAS, ABS, ESP and SBC driving sys- Only use cruise control if the traffic and
tems are described in the "Safety and Se- The cruise control function is operated by weather conditions make it advisable to
curity" section (컄 page 73). means of the cruise control lever. travel at a steady speed.
The cruise control lever is the uppermost 앫 The use of cruise control can be danger-
lever found on the left-hand side of the ous on winding roads or in heavy traffic
steering column (컄 page 20). because conditions do not allow safe
driving at a steady speed.
앫 The use of cruise control can be danger-
ous on slippery roads. Rapid changes in
tire traction can result in wheel spin and
loss of control.
앫 Deactivate cruise control when driving
in fog.
The "Resume" function should only be oper-
ated if the driver is fully aware of the previ-
ously set speed and wishes to resume this
particular preset speed.
194
Controls in detail
Driving systems
i !
On uphill or downhill grades, cruise Vehicles with automatic transmission:
control may not be able to maintain the Moving gear selector lever to
set speed. Once the grade eases, the position N while driving also cancels
set speed will be resumed. cruise control. However, the gear se-
lector lever should not be moved to
Canceling cruise control position N while driving except to coast
when the vehicle is in danger of skid-
There are several ways to cancel cruise ding (e.g. on icy roads).
control:
1 Set current or higher speed
2 Set current or lower speed
왘 Step on the brake pedal. i
3 Cancel cruise control or Vehicles with manual transmission:
4 Resume at previously set speed 왘 Briefly push the cruise control lever to The set cruise controlled speed is
position 3. switched off when declutching exceeds
Saving current speed four seconds during downshifting a
Cruise control will be canceled. The gear.
왘 Accelerate or decelerate to the desired last speed set will be stored for later
speed. use.
i
왘 Briefly lift 1 or depress 2 the cruise The last stored speed is canceled when
control lever. you turn off the engine.
The current speed is set.
왘 Remove your foot from the accelerator
pedal.
Cruise control is activated.
195
Controls in detail
Driving systems
Setting stored speed ("Resume" Setting a higher speed i

function) Vehicles with automatic transmission:
왘 Lift the cruise control lever to
position 1 and hold it up until the de- When you use the cruise control lever
Warning! G sired speed is reached. to decelerate, the transmission will au-
tomatically downshift if the engine’s
왘 Release the cruise control lever.
The speed stored in memory should only be braking power does not brake the vehi-
set again if prevailing road conditions per- The new speed is set. cle sufficiently.
mit. Possible acceleration or deceleration
differences arising from returning to preset i
Fine adjustment in 0.6 mph (1 km/h)
speed could endanger yourself and others. Depressing the accelerator pedal does increments
not deactivate cruise control. After
brief acceleration (e.g. for passing), Faster
왘 Briefly push the cruise control lever to
cruise control will resume the last
position 4. 왘 Briefly tip the cruise control lever in the
speed set.
The cruise control will resume the last direction of arrow 1.
previously set speed. Setting a lower speed
Slower
왘 Remove your foot from the accelerator 왘 Depress the cruise control lever to
pedal. 왘 Briefly tip the cruise control lever in the
position 2 and hold it down until the
desired speed is reached. direction of arrow 2.
왘 Release the cruise control lever.

The new speed is set.
196
Controls in detail
Driving systems
Distronic*
It is the driver’s responsibility at all times to
be attentive to traffic and road conditions
Warning! G
When activated, the Distronic adaptive
and to provide the steering, braking and oth- Distronic requires familiarity with its opera-
cruise control system increases driving
er driving inputs necessary to retain control tional characteristics. We strongly recom-
convenience afforded by the cruise control
of the vehicle. mend that you review the following
during travel on expressways and other
major roads. information carefully before operating the
system.
앫 If the Distronic distance sensor detects Warning! G
a slower moving vehicle directly ahead,
your vehicle speed will be reduced so Distronic is a convenience system. Its speed i
that you follow that vehicle at a preset adjustment reduction capability is intended For operation in the USA only: This de-
distance. to make cruise control more effective and vice complies with Part 15 of the
앫 If there is no vehicle directly ahead of usable when traffic speeds vary. However, it FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the
you, Distronic will function in the same is not intended to, nor does it, replace the following two conditions:
way as cruise control (컄 page 201). need for extreme care. The responsibility for
앫 This device may not cause harmful
the vehicle speed and the distance to the ve-
interference, and
hicle ahead, including most importantly
Warning! G brake operation to assure safe stopping dis- 앫 this device must accept any inter-
tance, always rests with the driver. ference received, including interfer-
Distronic adaptive cruise control is no sub- ence that may cause undesired
Distronic cannot take street and traffic con-
stitute for active driving involvement. It does operation.
ditions into account.
not react to stationary objects, nor recog-
Any unauthorized modification to this
nize or predict the curvature and lane layout
device could void the user’s authority
or the movement of vehicles ahead. Distron-
to operate the equipment.
ic can only apply a maximum of 20% of the
vehicle’s braking power.
197
Controls in detail
Driving systems
Warning! G Warning! G Distronic is designed and intended only to

maintain a set speed and keep a set dis-
Distronic cannot take street and traffic con- Close attention to road and traffic condi- tance from moving objects in front of it.
ditions into account. Only use Distronic if tions is imperative at all times, regardless of
the weather and traffic conditions make it whether or not Distronic is activated.
advisable to travel at a steady speed. Warning! G
Use of Distronic can be dangerous on wind-
ing roads or in heavy traffic because condi- The "Resume" function should only be oper-
tions do not allow safe driving at a steady ated if the driver is fully aware of the previ-
Warning! G speed. ously set speed and wishes to resume this
Distronic will not react to stationary objects particular preset speed.
Use of Distronic can be dangerous on slip-
in the roadway (e.g. a stopped vehicle in a
pery roads. Rapid changes in tire traction
traffic jam or a disabled vehicle). Distronic
can result in wheel spin and loss of control.
will also not respond to oncoming vehicles.
Distronic does not act upon adverse sight
Switch off Distronic:
distance conditions. Do not use Distronic
during conditions of fog and heavy rain, 앫 when changing from the left to the right
snow or sleet. lane if vehicles are moving more slowly
in the left lane
앫 when entering a turn lane or highway off
ramp
앫 in complex driving situations, such as in
highway construction zones
In these situations, Distronic will continue to
maintain the set speed unless deactivated.
198
Controls in detail
Driving systems
Distronic displays in the speedometer Under no circumstances should the

dial driver await the intermittent warning
sound before braking. See warning
note on the next page.
The intermittent warning sound ceases
and the red DTR warning lamp l
goes out when the necessary distance
to the vehicle ahead is again estab-
lished.
1 Segments
If Distronic detects a vehicle directly
1 Set speed ahead, the segments from the speed of the
If Distronic is activated, one or two seg- vehicle ahead to the set speed light up.
ments light up around the set speed. If Distronic calculates that there is a dan-
ger of collision:
i
The vehicle speed displayed on the 앫 The DTR warning lamp l in the in-
speedometer can briefly vary from the strument cluster lights up red.
speed setting on the Distronic system. 앫 An intermittent warning sounds.
왘 Immediately brake the vehicle to avoid
a collision.
199
Controls in detail
Driving systems
Distronic menu in the control system

Warning! G Warning! G In the Distronic menu you can read the cur-
An intermittent warning sounds and the Distronic brakes your vehicle with a maxi- rent settings for Distronic. What appears in
DTR warning lamp in the instrument cluster mum deceleration of 6.5 ft/s2 (2 m/s2). the display depends on whether Distronic
is illuminated if the Distronic system calcu- This corresponds to about 20% of the maxi- and the distance warning function are
lates that the distance to the vehicle ahead mum deceleration ability of your vehicle. turned on or off.
and your vehicle’s current speed indicate Distronic brakes the vehicle in an effort to 왘 Press button è or ÿ repeatedly
that Distronic will not be capable of slowing restore the preset distance or to maintain until you see one of the following dis-
the vehicle sufficiently to maintain the pre- the speed. The brake pedal is automatically plays.
set following distance, which creates a dan- applied as this happens which results in the
ger of a collision. brake pedal moving.
Immediately brake the vehicle to increase Keep driver’s foot area clear at all times, in-
the distance to the vehicle in front of you. cluding the area under the brake pedal. Ob-
The warning sound is intended as a final cau- jects stored in this area may impair pedal
tion that you have not interceded with your movement which could interfere with the
own braking inputs to avoid a potentially braking ability of the Distronic system.
dangerous situation. Do not wait for the op-
eration of the warning signal to intercede Do not place your foot under the brake pedal
with your own braking, as that will result in – your foot could become caught.
potentially dangerous emergency braking
which will not always result in an impact be-
ing avoided.
Tailgating increases the risk of an accident.
200
Controls in detail
Driving systems
Distronic deactivated Distronic activated Cruise control lever

If Distronic is deactivated you can see the If you turn Distronic on, you will see the set The Distronic system is operated by means
standard display of Distronic in the multi- speed in the multifunction display for of the cruise control lever.
function display. about five seconds. If Distronic is
The cruise control lever is the uppermost
activated, you can see the following dis-
lever found on the left-hand side of the
play in the multifunction display.
steering column.
1 Vehicle ahead, if detected

2 Actual distance to vehicle ahead
3 Should-be distance to vehicle ahead 1 Distronic activated
4 Your vehicle
5 Symbol for activated distance warning
function
1 Set current or higher speed
2 Set current or lower speed
3 Deactivate Distronic
4 Resume at previously set speed
201
Controls in detail
Driving systems
Activating Distronic Setting the current speed Setting a higher speed

You can activate Distronic if: 왘 Accelerate or decelerate to the desired 왘 Briefly tip the cruise control lever in the
speed. direction of arrow 1 (컄 page 201) to in-
앫 you are driving between 25 mph
crease vehicle speed in increments of 5
(Canada:40 km/h) and 110 mph 왘 Briefly lift or depress the cruise control
mph (Canada: 10 km/h).
(Canada:180 km/h) lever.
앫 the ESP is activated (컄 page 75) Distronic is activated and the current The new speed is set.
speed is set. The stored speed is displayed in the
If Distronic has not been activated after
multifunction display for approximately
pressing the cruise control lever you will 왘 Remove your foot from the accelerator
five seconds (컄 page 201), and one or
see the message --- in the multifunction pedal.
two segments around the stored speed
display.
i light up on the speedometer
In the following cases you cannot activate (컄 page 199).
If you do not take your foot off of the
Distronic:
accelerator completely, the following i
앫 Up to two minutes after starting the en- message will appear in the multifunc-
gine Depressing the accelerator pedal does
tion display:
not deactivate Distronic. After brief ac-
앫 When you brake Distronic override. The distance to a
celeration (e.g. for passing), cruise con-
slower moving vehicle in front of you
앫 If you have set the parking brake trol will resume the last speed set.
will not be set. Your vehicle speed will
앫 If the gear selector lever is in then be determined only by the accel-
position P, R or N erator pedal position.
앫 If the ESP is switched off
202
Controls in detail
Driving systems
Setting a lower speed Fine adjustment in 1 mph Resetting stored speeds

(Canada: 1 km/h) increments
왘 Briefly tip the cruise control lever in the
direction of arrow 2 (컄 page 201) to
Faster
Warning! G
decrease vehicle speed in increments
of 5 mph (Canada: 10 km/h). 왘 Briefly tip the cruise control lever in the The speed stored in memory should only be
direction of arrow 4 (컄 page 201). set again if prevailing road conditions per-
The new speed is set.
mit. Possible acceleration or deceleration
The stored speed is displayed in the differences arising from returning to preset
multifunction display for approximately speed could endanger yourself and others.
five seconds (컄 page 199), and one or
two segments around the stored speed
왘 Briefly tip the cruise control lever in the
light up on the speedometer
direction of arrow 4 (컄 page 201).
(컄 page 199).
Distronic is set to the last stored
i speed.
When you use the cruise control lever 왘 Remove your foot from the accelerator
to decelerate, the transmission will au- pedal.
tomatically downshift if the rate of de-
celeration is too low.
203
Controls in detail
Driving systems
Deactivating Distronic Distronic deactivates automatically when: Setting the following distance in
Distronic
There are several ways to deactivate the 앫 you set the parking brake
Distronic system: You can set the specified following dis-
앫 you drive slower than 25 mph
tance for Distronic by varying the time set-
왘 Briefly tip the cruise control lever in the (Canada: 40 km/h)
ting between 1.0 and 2.0 seconds. Using
direction of arrow 3 (컄 page 201). 앫 the ESP is active (컄 page 75) or you de- this time setting and the current speed of
or activate the ESP your vehicle, Distronic calculates and sets
왘 Step on the brake pedal. 앫 you move the transmission selector le- the required following distance to the vehi-
ver into position N cle ahead. The set distance will be shown
Distronic will be deactivated. The last in the multifunction display field.
speed set will be stored into memory. A signal will sound. The Distronic off
message appears in the multifunction The thumbwheel for making the time set-
i display for approximately five seconds. ting is located on the lower section of the
The following message will appear in center console.
the multifunction display for approxi-
Warning! G
mately five seconds: Distronic off. Warning! G
The last stored speed is deleted when Distronic switches off and releases the
you turn off the engine. brakes when the vehicle decelerates below It is up to the driver to exercise discretion to
the minimum speed of approx. 25 mph select the appropriate setting given road
( 40 km/h) by operation of the system. At conditions, traffic, driver’s preferred driving
that time the driver must apply the brakes in style and applicable laws and driving recom-
order to reduce vehicle speed further or mendations for safe following distance.
bring it to a stop.
204
Controls in detail
Driving systems
Decreasing distance ahead is sufficient again without applying

the brake pedal. In this case the distance
Decreasing the distance setting tells Dis-
warning lamp also extinguishes.
tronic to maintain a shorter following dis-
tance to the vehicle ahead.
왘 Turn thumbwheel 3 towards ®. Warning! G
If the DTR warning lamp l in the instru-
Distance warning function
ment cluster lights up while driving and/or
When Distronic is deactivated, this func- an intermittent warning sounds, immediate
tion will continue to warn you when recog- attention on the part of the driver is re-
1 Distance warning function on/off nizing a stationary obstacle or a slower quired.
switch vehicle moving in the vehicle’s path and
2 Control lamp As required by the traffic situation, apply the
the danger of a collision exists:
3 Thumbwheel for setting distance brakes and navigate around a possible ob-
앫 The distance warning lamp l in the stacle. However, do not drive by relying on
Increasing distance instrument cluster comes on. the distance warning function, as this will re-
sult in an emergency braking application.
Increasing the distance setting tells Dis- 앫 An intermittent warning sounds.
Especially depending on road surface condi-
tronic to maintain a greater following dis- If these warnings are issued, you must tions and driver reaction, this will not always
tance to the vehicle ahead. brake manually to maintain a safe distance enable you to avoid a collision.
왘 Turn thumbwheel 3 towards ¯. and avoid a collision with the vehicle
ahead.
i
When pressing the brake pedal, the warn-
Complex driving situations are not al-
ing sound stops. The warning sound also
ways fully recognized by Distronic. This
stops when the distance to the vehicle
could result in wrong or missing dis-
tance warnings.
205
Controls in detail
Driving systems
Activating Driving with Distronic

Distronic regulates only the distance be-
왘 Press button 1. This section describes a number of driving tween your vehicle and those directly ahead
situations where special precaution is re- of it, but does not register stationary objects
Indicator lamp 2 on the button lights
quired on the part of the driver. Be pre- in the road, e.g.:
up. A loudspeaker symbol appears in
pared to brake in such situations. This will 앫
the multifunction display (컄 page 201). a stopped vehicle in a traffic jam
deactivate the Distronic system.
앫 a disabled vehicle
Deactivating
앫 an oncoming vehicle
왘 Press button 1. Warning! G
The driver must always be on the alert, ob-
Indicator lamp 2 on the button goes Distronic works to maintain the speed se- serve all traffic and intercede as required by
out. No loudspeaker symbol appears in lected by the driver unless a moving obsta- steering or braking the vehicle.
the multifunction display. cle proceeding directly ahead of it in the
same travel direction is detected (e.g. fol-
lowing another vehicle ahead of you at a dis- Warning! G
tance set by Distronic). This means that:
Distronic should not be used in snowy or icy
앫 your vehicle can pass another vehicle af- road conditions.
ter you change lanes
앫 while in a sharp turn or if the vehicle in
front is in a sharp turn, Distronic could
lose sight of a vehicle traveling in front
of it, then your vehicle could accelerate
to the previously selected speed.
206
Controls in detail
Driving systems
The most likely cause for a malfunctioning i Turns and bends

system is a dirty sensor (located behind If the message "Distronic - clean sen-
the hood grille), especially at times of snow sor!" See oper. manual disappears dur-
and ice or heavy rain. In such a case, Dis- ing driving and the last speed stored
tronic will switch off, and the message flashes for approximately five seconds,
Distronic - Clean sensor! see oper. the dirt (e.g. slush) has dissolved;
Manual appears in the multifunction dis- Distronic works again.
play.
For cleaning and care of the Distronic sen-
sor, see "Cleaning the Distronic system
sensor" (컄 page 283).
In turns or bends, Distronic may not detect
a moving vehicle in front, or it may detect
one too soon. This may cause your vehicle
to brake late or unexpectedly.
207
Controls in detail
Driving systems
Offset driving Lane changing Narrow vehicles
A vehicle traveling in your lane but offset Distronic has not yet detected the vehicle Because of its narrow profile, the vehicle
from your direct line of travel may not be changing lanes. There will be insufficient traveling near the edge of the roadway has
detected by Distronic. There will be insuffi- distance to the lane-changing vehicle. not yet been detected by Distronic. There
cient distance to the vehicle ahead. will be insufficient distance to the vehicle
ahead.
208
Controls in detail
Driving systems
AIRMATIC DC (Dual Control)* 앫 With decreasing speed, the ride height

is again raised to the "Normal" level. Warning! G
Vehicle level control i To help avoid personal injury, keep hands
Your vehicle automatically adjusts its ride These height adjustments are so small and feet away from wheel housing area, and
height to that you may not notice any change. stay away from under the vehicle when low-
ering the vehicle chassis.
앫 reduce fuel consumption
Select the "Raised" level only when re-
앫 increase vehicle safety quired by current driving conditions. Oth-
The following vehicle chassis ride heights erwise
are possible: 앫 fuel consumption may increase
앫 Normal 앫 handling may be impaired
앫 Raised
앫 Lowered
The vehicle chassis ride height is raised or
lowered according to the selected level
setting and to the vehicle speed:
앫 With increasing speed, ride height is re-
duced automatically by up to approxi-
mately 0.6 inch (15 mm) "Lowered"
level.
209
Controls in detail
Driving systems
The following vehicle level settings can be

selected when the vehicle is stationary and
the engine is running:
Vehicle level when Use for Ride height increase Automatic lowering Indicator lamp (컄 page 210)
stationary over normal
Normal Normal operation None Max. approx. 0.6 in (15 mm) Lamp off
Raised Driving with snow Approx. 1 in (25 mm) Max. approx. 1 in (25 mm) Lamp on
chains or very
rough road sur-
face conditions
The switch is located in the lower section 왘 Briefly press switch 1 to change from i
of the center console. "Normal" level to "Raised" level. When At a speed of approx. above 75 mph
vehicle is at "Raised" level, pressing the (120 km/h) or if the speed amounts to
switch will return the vehicle to "Nor- between 50 mph (80 km/h) and
mal" level. 75 mph (120 km/h) for approx. five
minutes the setting "Raised" is can-
celed. The message Level selec.
canceled appears in the multifunction
display.
If you do not drive in this speed range,
the "Raised" level remains stored even
1 Vehicle level control switch if the key is removed from the ignition.
2 Indicator lamp
210
Controls in detail
Driving systems
Comfort-/Sport setting The suspension tuning is set according to:

The AIRMATIC DC (Dual Control) consists 앫 your driving style
of two components:
앫 road surface conditions
앫 Adaptive-Damping-System (ADS) 앫 your choice of suspension style,
앫 Suspension style "sporty I", "sporty II" or "regular", which
you select using the damping switch.
The ADS automatically selects the opti-
mum damping for the respective driving The selected suspension style is stored
conditions. At the same time the suspen- in memory, even after the key is re-
sion style is set to either sporty or regular. moved from the starter switch. 1 Damping button
2 Indicator lamps
i
In the sporty suspension style the vehi- 왘 Start the engine.
cle is lowered 0.6 in (15 mm).
211
Controls in detail
Driving systems
Suspension for sporty driving style I PARKTRONIC system*

The setting for sporty driving I is selected
Warning! G
when one indicator lamp 2 is illuminated.
Warning! G Be sure that no persons or animals are in the
왘 Press button 1. area in which you are maneuvering. You
Parktronic is a supplemental system. It is could otherwise injure them.
One indicator lamp 2 comes on.
not intended to, nor does it replace, the
need for extreme care. The responsibility The Parktronic system is an electronic aid
Suspension for sporty driving style II
during parking and other critical maneuvers designed to assist the driver during park-
The setting for sporty driving II is selected always rests with the driver. ing maneuvers. It visually and audibly indi-
when two indicator lamps 2 are illuminat-
Special attention must be paid to objects cates the relative distance between the
ed.
having smooth surfaces or low silhouettes vehicle and an obstacle.
왘 Press button 1 twice. (e.g. trailer couplings, painted posts, or The Parktronic system is automatically ac-
Two indicator lamps 2 come on. street curbs). Such objects may not be de- tivated when you switch on the ignition
tected by the system and can damage the and release the parking brake. The Park-
Suspension for regular driving style vehicle. tronic system deactivates at speeds over
The operational function of the Parktronic 11 mph (18 km/h). At lower speeds the
The setting for regular driving is selected
can be affected by dirty sensors, especially Parktronic system turns on again.
when the two indicator lamps 2 are off.
at times of snow and ice. See "Cleaning the
왘 Press button 1 repeatedly until all indi- Parktronic system sensors" (컄 page 284).
cator lamps go out.
Interference caused by other ultrasonic sig-
The indicator lamps 2 go out. nals (e.g. working jackhammers or the air
brakes of trucks) can cause the system to
send erratic indications, and should be tak-
en into consideration.
212
Controls in detail
Driving systems
The Parktronic system monitors the sur- Range of the sensors !

roundings of your vehicle with six sensors During parking maneuvers, pay special
To function properly, the sensors must be
in the front bumper and four sensors in the attention to objects located above or
free of dirt, ice, snow and slush. Clean the
rear bumper. below the height of the sensors (e.g.
sensors regularly, being careful not to
scratch or damage the sensors. planters or trailer hitches). The Park-
tronic system will not detect such ob-
jects at close range and damage to
your vehicle or the object may result.
Ultrasonic signals from outside sourc-
es (e.g. truck air brakes or jackham-
mers) may impair the operation of the
Parktronic system.
1 Sensors in the front bumper Minimum distance
Front sensors Center approx. 8 in (20 cm)

Corners approx. 6 in (15 cm)
Center approx. 40 in (100 cm)
Corners approx. 23 in (60 cm) If the system encounters an obstacle in
this range, all the warning lamps light up
Rear sensors and you hear a warning signal. If the obsta-
cle is closer than the minimum distance,
Center approx. 48 in (120 cm) the actual distance may no longer be indi-
Corners approx. 32 in (80 cm) cated by the system.
213
Controls in detail
Driving systems
Warning indicators Each warning indicator is divided into six As your vehicle approaches an object, one
yellow and two red segments for either or more segments will light up, depending
Visual signals indicate to the driver the rel-
side of the vehicle. The Parktronic system on the distance. When the eighth segment
ative distance between the sensors and an
is ready when the border around the indi- lights up, you have reached the minimum
obstacle. The warning indicator for the
cator is illuminated. distance.
front area is located above the center air
outlets in the dashboard. The warning indi- The position of the gear selector lever de- 앫 Front area: An intermittent acoustic
cator for the rear area is integrated in the termines which warning indicators will be warning will sound as the seventh seg-
rear trim. activated. ment lights up and a constant acoustic
warning lasting a maximum of three
Selector lever po- Warning indicator
seconds will sound for the eighth seg-
sition
ment.
D Front area activated
앫 Rear area: An intermittent acoustic
R or N Rear area activated warning will sound when the first seg-
P Neither activated ment lights up. This signal quickens
with each additional segment lit. When
the eighth segment illuminates, the
acoustic warning becomes a constant
signal. The signal is canceled when the
Front area warning indicator selector lever is placed in position D
1 Left side of the vehicle or P.
2 Right side of the vehicle
214
Controls in detail
Driving systems
Switching the Parktronic system Switching off the Parktronic system

on/off
왘 Press button 1.
You can switch off the Parktronic system
Indicator lamp 2 comes on.
manually.
The Parktronic switch is located in the low- Switching on the Parktronic system
er section of the center console. 왘 Press button 1 again.
Indicator lamp 2 goes out.
1 Parktronic on/off
2 Indicator lamp
215
Controls in detail
Loading
Loading
Roof rack* Preparing roof rack installation Ski sack*
왘 Open trim 1 at the trim strips in the
roof.
Warning! G
왘 Secure the roof rack according to man-
Use only those roof racks approved by Mer- ufacturer’s instructions for installation.
cedes-Benz for your vehicle model to avoid
damage to the vehicle. Follow manufactur- !
er’s installation instructions. Be sure to stack a load on the roof rack
so that the vehicle cannot be damaged
while driving.
Make sure that:
Unfolding and loading
앫 you can fully raise the
sliding/pop-up roof* 왘 Fold armrest down (arrow).
앫 you can fully open the trunk 왘 Swing cover 1 down.
1 Trim
216
Controls in detail
Loading
왘 Open hook and loop strap 1. 왘 From trunk, slide skis into ski sack. 왘 Wrap strap around ski sack and arm-
왘 Pull ski sack into passenger compart- rest.
ment and unfold. Warning! G 왘 Close clasp (arrows) and pull strap
tight to immobilize skis.
The ski sack is designed for up to four pairs
of skis. Do not load the ski sack with other
objects.
Always fasten the ski sack securely. In an
accident, an unfastened ski sack can cause
injury to vehicle occupants.
217
Controls in detail
Loading
Unloading and folding
왘 Connect snap hook 1 of front strap to 왘 Close ski sack compartment cover.
eye 2 located on center tunnel in front 왘 Loosen strap, open clasp by pressing
of rear seat bench. tabs together (arrows).
왘 Unload skis.
왘 Close flap in trunk.
왘 Fold and flatten ski sack lengthwise
and place folded ski sack inside recess
of backrest.
218
Controls in detail
Loading
Removal of ski sack Split rear bench seat*

For removal of the ski sack we recommend
Warning! G
To expand the trunk, you can fold down the
that you contact an authorized Mer- When expanding the luggage compartment,
left and right rear seat backrests.
cedes-Benz Center. always fold the seat cushions fully forward.
The two sections can be folded down sep-
arately to enlarge the trunk. Unless you are transporting cargo, the back-
Warning! G rests must remain properly locked in the up-
When transporting long items, the folding right position.
Never drive vehicle with trunk open while front passenger seat* can be folded for-
the ski sack is removed. Deadly carbon ward, and you can remove the rear seat In an accident, during hard braking or sud-
monoxide (CO) gases may enter vehicle in- cushions. den maneuvers, loose items will be thrown
terior, resulting in unconsciousness and around inside the vehicle, and cause injury
death. to vehicle occupants unless the items are
securely fastened in the vehicle.
Always use the cargo tie down rings
i
(컄 page 225).
To prevent unauthorized persons from
access to the trunk, always close the
cover.
219
Controls in detail
Loading
Folding the backrest forward
1 Seat cushion 왘 Pull the handle in the trunk.

1 Release handle 2 Seat backrest
The seat backrest is released and the
왘 Pull release handle 1. 왘 Grip the back of seat cushion 1 and head restraints fold back.
fold forward.
The seat cushion automatically springs 왘 Fold the seat backrest forward.
upward slightly. 왘 Push the rear seat head restraints all
the way in.
220
Controls in detail
Loading
Returning seat backrest to original po-

sition Warning! G
Always lock backrest in its upright position
when rear seat bench is occupied, or the ex-
tended trunk compartment is not in use.
Check for secure locking by pushing and
pulling on the backrest.
In an accident, during hard braking or sud-
den maneuvers, loose items will be thrown
왘 Swing the head restraint forward by around inside the vehicle, and cause injury
hand until it engages. to vehicle occupants unless the items are
1 Seat cushion securely fastened in the vehicle.
2 Seat backrest To help avoid personal injury during a colli-
왘 Swing seat backrest 2 to the rear until sion or sudden maneuver, exercise care
it engages. when transporting cargo.
왘 Swing seat cushion 1 to the rear and

press the center front of the cushion
until it audibly engages.
221
Controls in detail
Loading
Folding front passenger seat* Folding front passenger seat back
Folding front passenger seat forward
왘 Fold the backrest all the way forward.

왘 Press the backrest lightly downward 1 Release handle
until it is resting on the seat cushion. 왘 Using release handle 1, pull the back-
1 Release handle rest to its original position. Pull the
왘 Press the right-hand side of release Warning! G handle until the backrest has reached
an angle of approximatley 45°.
handle 1.
Make sure that the backrest engages and
The handle folds out. locks when folding it back into place.
왘 Pull the left-hand side of the release
handle.
The front passenger seat backrest is
released and can be folded forward.
222
Controls in detail
Loading
Expanding the cargo area* 왘 Fold the backrest into the vertical posi- !
tion. Leave the seat cushion hinge in this po-
Removing the rear seat cushions will pro- sition. The upholstery could be dam-
vide you with a larger, flat cargo area. aged if you fold the hinge back.
왘 Fold the seat cushions and the back-
rests forward.
왘 Remove the head restraints.
(Raise the seat backrest and fold the
head restraints forward.)
1 Release lever
왘 Pull seat cushion release lever 1 and
remove the seat cushion by pulling it
upward.
1 Release catch
왘 Press head restraint release catch 1
and pull the head restraints out of the
guides.
223
Controls in detail
Loading
Loading instructions The handling characteristics of a fully load-

ed vehicle depend greatly on the load dis- Warning! G
tribution. It is therefore recommended to
load the vehicle according to the illustra- Always fasten items being carried as secure-
tions shown, with the heaviest items being ly as possible.
placed towards the front of the vehicle. In an accident, during hard braking or sud-
Always place items being carried against den maneuvers, loose items will be thrown
front or rear seat backrests, and fasten around inside the vehicle and can cause in-
them as securely as possible. jury to vehicle occupants unless the items
are securely fastened in the vehicle.
The heaviest portion of the cargo should al-
To help avoid personal injury during a colli-
ways be kept as low as possible since it in-
The total load weight including vehicle oc- sion or sudden maneuver, exercise care
fluences the handling characteristics of
cupants and luggage/cargo should not ex- when transporting cargo. Put luggage or car-
the vehicle.
ceed the vehicle capacity weight indicated go in the trunk if possible. Do not pile lug-
on the certification tag which can be found gage or cargo higher than the seat backs.
on the left door pillar. Do not place anything on the shelf below the
rear windows.
Never drive vehicle with trunk open. Deadly
carbon monoxide (CO) gases may enter ve-
hicle interior resulting in unconsciousness
and death.
224
Controls in detail
Loading
Cargo tie-down rings* Rear seat

There is a cargo tie-down ring located on
each side of the footwell under the rear
seat.
Four rings 1 are located in the cargo com-

partment.
왘 Carefully secure cargo by applying
even load on all rings with rope of suffi-
cient strength to hold down the cargo.
Always follow loading instructions
(컄 page 224).
225
Controls in detail
Useful features
Useful features
Interior storage spaces Parcel net in front passenger footwell Glove box
Warning! G
To help avoid personal injury during a colli-
sion or sudden maneuver, exercise care
when stowing objects in the vehicle. Put lug-
gage or cargo in the trunk if possible. Do not
pile luggage or cargo higher than the seat
backs. Do not place anything on the shelf
below the rear window. A small convenience parcel net is located 1 Glove box lid release
Luggage nets cannot secure hard or heavy in the front passenger footwell. It is for 2 Compartment for mobile phone/glass-
objects. small and light items, such as road maps, es
mail, etc.
Keep compartment lids closed. This will help
to prevent stored objects from being thrown
Opening the glove box
about and injuring vehicle occupants during Warning! G 왘 Push lid release 1.
an accident.
The glove box lid opens downward.
The parcel net is intended for storing
light-weight items only.
Closing the glove box
Heavy objects, objects with sharp edges or
왘 Push lid up to close.
fragile objects may not be transported in the
parcel net.
The parcel net cannot protect transported
goods in the event of an accident.
226
Controls in detail
Useful features
i The control panel swings out upward Opening

Prior to closing the glove box, close the and the storage compartment extends
왘 Briefly press the marking in the back of
compartment for glasses first. out.
the cover.
i The cover opens.
Storage compartment in the center
Never place any medications in the
console Cup holder in the center console
storage compartment. If there is a pow-
er failure, the storage compartment
cannot be opened.
왘 Press button 1 to close.
Storage compartment in front of the

armrest
1 Opening/closing button 왘 Briefly press marking on the cup hold-

er.
i
The storage compartment in the center The cup holder extends automatically.
console cannot be opened if the cas-
sette tray is open.
왘 Press button 1 to open.
227
Controls in detail
Useful features
i Storage space under armrest

The cup holder can be removed for
Warning! G
cleaning. Clean the cup holder only
When not in use, keep the cup holder closed
with clear, lukewarm water.
while traveling. Place only containers that fit
Make sure to insert the cup holder in
into the cup holder to prevent spills. Use lids
the guides when reinstalling it.
on open containers and do not fill containers
to a height where the contents, especially
hot liquids, could spill during vehicle maneu-
vers.
1 Storage compartment
2 Storage tray
Opening storage tray

왘 Pull handle 2.
1 Left cup holder Opening storage compartment

2 Right cup holder 왘 Pull handle 1.
228
Controls in detail
Useful features
Front center console storage compart- i Storage compartment in the rear cen-
ment ventilation The compartment can get very warm ter console
The front center console storage compart- due to its confined space. When storing
ment under the armrest has its own air out- heat sensitive objects (e.g. groceries)
let. The air temperature is about the same in the compartment, close the air outlet
as that of the dashboard air outlets. while heating the passenger compart-
ment
The lever is located in the front center out-
let.
왘 Briefly press the top of the compart-

ment.
It extends automatically.
1 Lever
왘 To open air outlet slide the lever up.
왘 To close air outlet slide the lever down.
229
Controls in detail
Useful features
Ruffled storage bags Storage compartment in the rear arm- Rear cup holder
rest
Ruffled storage bags are located on the 왘 Briefly press the front of the center
back of the front seats. 왘 Press the handle upward and fold the armrest.
armrest up. The cup holder extends automatically.
Warning! G
Do not transport hard objects in the storage
Warning! G
bags.
When not in use, keep the cup holder closed
while traveling. Place only containers that fit
into the cup holder to prevent spills. Use lids
on open containers and do not fill containers
to a height where the contents, especially
hot liquids, could spill during vehicle maneu-
vers.
230
Controls in detail
Useful features
Ashtrays Removing ashtray insert Rear seat ashtray
Center console ashtray Warning! G

Remove front ashtray only with vehicle
standing still. Set the parking brake to se-
cure vehicle from movement. Move gear se-
lector lever to position N. With gear selector
lever in position N turn off the engine.
왘 Secure vehicle from movement by set-

ting the parking brake. Move the selec- Opening ashtray
tor lever to position N. 왘 Briefly press the top of the ashtray.
Opening ashtray Now you have more room to take out The ashtray opens.
the insert.
왘 Briefly press the marking on the bot-
tom of cover 1. 왘 Push sliding button 2 to the right and
hold.
The ashtray opens automatically.
왘 Grip and remove insert from ashtray
frame.
Reinstalling ashtray insert

왘 Install insert by pushing it back into
frame until it engages again.
231
Controls in detail
Useful features
Cigarette lighter 12-V socket*

Warning! G
The cigarette lighter is located in the cen-
ter console compartment in front of the Never touch the heating element or sides of
armrest (컄 page 26). the lighter; they are extremely hot. Hold the
knob only.
key from the starter switch, and lock your
vehicle. Do not leave children unattended in
the vehicle, or with access to an unlocked
vehicle. Unsupervised use of vehicle equip-
ment may cause serious personal injury.
The socket is located in the rear of the cen-
ter console storage compartment.
i The socket can be used for accessories up
1 Cigarette lighter The lighter socket can be used to ac- to a maximum of 180 W.
commodate electrical accessories up
왘 Turn key in the starter switch to to a maximum 85 W.
position 1 or 2.
왘 Push in cigarette lighter 1.
The lighter will pop out automatically
when hot.
232
Controls in detail
Useful features
Heated steering wheel* Switching on Telephone*

왘 Check that the ignition is switched on.
The control lever for the steering wheel
heating is on the lower left-hand side of the All lamps in the instrument cluster light Warning! G
steering wheel. up.
왘 Turn the control lever in direction of
with a built-in or attached antenna (i.e. with-
arrow 3.
out being connected to an external antenna)
The steering wheel gets warm. The indi- from inside the vehicle while the engine is
cator lamp 1 lights up. running. Doing so could lead to a malfunc-
Switching off sibly resulting in an accident and personal
왘 Turn the control lever in direction of injury.
arrow 2.
The heated steering wheel is switched Radio transmitters, such as a portable tele-
1 Indicator lamp phone or a citizens band unit, should only
off. The indicator lamp 1 switched off.
2 Heated steering wheel off be used inside the vehicle if they are con-
3 Heated steering wheel on i nected to an antenna that is installed on
The heated steering wheel do not the outside of the vehicle.
switch off automatically. The external antenna must be approved by
Mercedes-Benz. Please contact an autho-
rized Mercedes-Benz Center for informa-
tion on the installation of an approved
external antenna. Refer to the radio trans-
mitter operation instructions regarding use
of an external antenna.
233
Controls in detail
Useful features
Tele Aid*
Warning! G Bear in mind that at a speed of just 30 mph
covering a distance of approx. 44 feet (ap- !
Please do not forget that your primary re-
proximately 13.5 m) every second. The initial activation of the Tele Aid sys-
sponsibility is to drive the vehicle. A driver’s
tem may only be performed by com-
attention to the road must always be
You can take and place telephone calls us- pleting the subscriber agreement and
his/her primary focus when driving. For
ing the í and ì buttons on the placing an acquaintance call using the
your safety and the safety of others, we rec-
steering wheel. To carry out other tele- SOS button. Failure to complete either
ommend that you pull over to a safe location
phone functions, use the control system of these steps will result in a system
and stop before placing or taking a tele-
(컄 page 121). that is not activated. If the system is
phone call.
not activated, the indicator lamp in the
If you choose to use the telephone1 while See separate operating manual for instruc- SOS button stays on after turning the
driving, please use the hands-free device tions on how to use the telephone. key in the starter switch to position 2
and only use the telephone when road and and the message Tele Aid – not ac-
traffic conditions permit. Some jurisdictions Warning! G tivated will be shown in the multifunc-
prohibit the driver from using a cellular tele- tion display for approx. 10 seconds.
phone while driving a vehicle. Some jurisdictions prohibit the driver from
If you have any questions regarding ac-
Only operate the COMAND* (Cockpit Man- using a cellular telephone while driving a ve-
tivation, please call the Response Cen-
agement and Data System)1 if road and traf- hicle. Whether or not prohibited by law, for
ter at 1-800-756-9018 (in the USA) or
fic conditions permit. safety reasons, the driver should not use the
1-888-923-8367 (in Canada).
1
cellular telephone while the vehicle is in mo-
Observe all legal requirements.
tion.
Stop the vehicle in a safe location before an-
swering or placing a call.
234
Controls in detail
Useful features
The Tele Aid system i System self-check

(Telematic Alarm Identification on De- The SOS button is located above the in- Initially, after turning the key in starter
mand) side rear view mirror. switch to position 2, malfunctions are de-
The Roadside Assistance button • tected and indicated (the indicator lamps
The Tele Aid system consists of three
and the Information button ¡ are in the SOS button, the Roadside Assis-
types of response:
located below the center armrest cov- tance button • and the Information
앫 Automatic and manual emergency button ¡ stay on longer than
er.
앫 Roadside Assistance and 10 seconds or do not come on). The mes-
sage TELE AID – VISIT WORKSHOP! ap-
앫 Information Shortly after the completion of your ac-
pears for approx. 10 seconds in the
quaintance call, you will receive a user ID
The Tele Aid system is operational provid- multifunction display.
and password via first call mail. By visiting
ing that the vehicle’s battery is charged,
www.mbusa.com and selecting "Tele Aid"
properly connected, not damaged and cel-
(USA only), you will have access to account
lular and GPS coverage is available.
information, remote door unlock, Info Ser-
The speaker volume of a Tele Aid call can vices1 profile and more.
be adjusted when using the volume control
on the multifunction steering wheel. To
raise, press button æ and to lower,
press button ç.
왘 To activate, press the SOS button, the
Roadside Assistance button • or
the Information button ¡, depend-
ing on the type of response required.
1
Available only with COMAND*
235
Controls in detail
Useful features
! Emergency calls tion display. All information relevant to the

If the indicator lamps in the emergency, such as the location of the ve-
An emergency call is initiated automatical-
SOS button, in the "Roadside hicle (determined by the GPS satellite loca-
ly:
Assistance" button and in the tion system), vehicle model, identification
앫 following an accident in which the number and color are generated.
"Information" button remain illuminat-
emergency tensioning devices (ETDs)
ed constantly in red and/or the mes- A voice connection between the Response
or airbags deploy
sage TELE AID – VISIT WORKSHOP! is Center and the occupants of the vehicle
displayed in the multifunction display 앫 if the anti-theft alarm or the tow-away will be established automatically soon af-
after the system self-check, a malfunc- alarm stays on for more than ter the emergency call has been initiated.
tion in the system has been detected. 20 seconds. See anti-theft alarm sys- When a voice connection is established,
tem (컄 page 82) and tow-away alarm the audio system is muted and the mes-
If a malfunction is indicated as outlined
(컄 page 82) sage TELE AID – EMERGENCY CALL ACTIVE
above, the system may not operate as
expected. Have the system checked at An emergency call can also be initiated appears in the multifunction display. The
the nearest Mercedes-Benz Center as manually by opening the cover next to the Response Center will attempt to determine
soon as possible. inside rear view mirror labeled SOS, then more precisely the nature of the accident
briefly pressing the button located under provided they can speak to an occupant of
the cover. See below for instructions on the vehicle.
initiating an emergency call manually.
Once the emergency call is in progress, the
indicator lamp in the SOS button will begin
to flash. The message EMERGENCY CALL –
CONNECTING CALL appears in the multifunc-
tion display. When the connection is estab-
lished, the message EMERGENCY CALL –
CALL CONNECTED appears in the multifunc-
236
Controls in detail
Useful features
The Tele Aid system is available if: Initiating an emergency call manually
앫 it has been activated and is operation-
Warning! G
al. Activation requires a subscription If the indicator lamp in the SOS button is il-
for monitoring services, connection luminated continuously and there was no
and cellular air time voice connection to the Response Center
앫 the relevant cellular phone network established, then the Tele Aid system could
and GPS signals are available and pass not initiate an emergency call (e.g. the rele-
the information on to the response cen- vant cellular phone network is not available).
ter The message EMERGENCY CALL –
CALL FAILED appears in the multifunction
i display for approx. 10 seconds. 1 SOS button
Location of the vehicle on a map is only Should this occur, assistance must be sum-
possible if the vehicle is able to receive 왘 Press SOS button 1 briefly.
moned by other means.
signals from the GPS satellite network The indicator lamp in SOS button 1 will
and pass the information on to the re- flash until the emergency call is con-
sponse center. cluded.
왘 Wait for a voice connection to the Re-
sponse Center.
왘 Close cover after the emergency call is
concluded.
237
Controls in detail
Useful features
Roadside Assistance button • TELE AID – ROADSIDE ASSISTANCE

Warning! G Located below the center armrest cover is
CALL ACTIVE appears in the multifunction
display.
If you feel at any way in jeopardy when in the the Roadside Assistance button •.
왘 Describe the nature of the need for as-
vehicle (e.g. smoke or fire in the vehicle, ve- 왘 Press and hold the button for more
hicle in a dangerous road location), please sistance.
than 2 seconds.
do not wait for voice contact after you have The Mercedes-Benz Roadside Assistance
A call to a Mercedes-Benz Roadside As-
pressed the emergency button. Carefully dispatcher will either dispatch a qualified
sistance dispatcher will be initiated.
leave the vehicle and move to a safe loca- Mercedes-Benz technician or arrange to
The button will flash while the call is in
tion. The Response Center will automatically tow your vehicle to the nearest authorized
progress. The message ROADSIDE AS-
contact local emergency officials with the Mercedes-Benz Center. For services such
SISTANCE – CONNECTING CALL will ap-
vehicle’s approximate location if they re- as labor and/or towing, charges may ap-
pear in the multifunction display.
ceive an automatic SOS signal and cannot ply. Refer to the Roadside Assistance man-
make voice contact with the vehicle occu- When the connection is established, the ual for more information.
pants. message ROADSIDE ASSISTANCE –
These programs are only available in the
CALL CONNECTED appears in the multifunc-
USA:
tion display. The Tele Aid system will trans-
mit data generating the vehicle 앫 Sign and Drive services: Services such
identification number, model, color and lo- as a jump start, a few gallons of fuel or
cation (subject to availability of cellular the replacement of a flat tire with the
and GPS signals). vehicle spare tire are obtainable.
A voice connection between the Roadside 앫 Remote Vehicle Diagnostics: This func-
Assistance dispatcher and the occupants tion permits the Mercedes-Benz Road-
of the vehicle will be established. When a side Assistance dispatcher to
voice connection is established, the audio download malfunction codes and actu-
system is muted and the message al vehicle data.
238
Controls in detail
Useful features
i Roadside Assistance calls can be ter- lished. When a voice connection is estab-
The indicator lamp in the Roadside As- minated using the ì button on the lished, the audio system is muted and the
sistance button • remains illumi- multifunction steering wheel. message TELE AID – INFO CALL ACTIVE
nated in red for approx. 10 seconds appears in the multifunction display. Infor-
during the system self-check after turn- Information button ¡ mation regarding the operation of your ve-
ing the key in the starter switch to hicle, the nearest authorized
Located below the center armrest cover is Mercedes-Benz Center or Mercedes-Benz
position 2 (together with the SOS but- the Information button ¡.
ton and the Information button ¡). USA products and services is available to
왘 Press and hold the button for more you.
See system self-check (컄 page 235) than 2 seconds.
when the indicator lamp does not light For more details concerning the Tele Aid
up in red or stays on longer than ap- A call to the Customer Assistance Cen- system, please visit www.mbusa.com and
proximately 10 seconds. ter will be initiated. The button will use your ID and password (sent to you sep-
flash while the call is in progress. The arately) to learn more (USA only).
If the indicator lamp in the Roadside message INFO – CONNECTING CALL will
Assistance button • is illuminated appear in the multifunction display. i
continuously and there was no voice The indicator lamp in the Information
When the connection is established, the
connection to the Response Center es- button ¡ remains illuminated in red
tablished, then the Tele Aid system message INFO – CALL CONNECTED appears
for approx. 10 seconds during the sys-
could not initiate a Roadside Assis- in the multifunction display. The Tele Aid
tem self-check after turning key in the
tance call (e.g. the relevant cellular system will transmit data generating the
starter switch to position 2 (together
phone network is not available). The vehicle identification number, model, color
with the SOS button and the Roadside
and location (subject to availability of cel-
message ROADSIDE ASSISTANCE – Assistance button •).
CALL FAILED appears in the multifunc- lular and GPS signals).
tion display. A voice connection between the Customer
Assistance Center representative and the
occupants of the vehicle will be estab-
239
Controls in detail
Useful features
See system self-check (컄 page 235) ! Upgrade signals

when the indicator lamp does not light If the indicator lamps do not start flash- The Tele Aid system processes calls using
up in red or stays on longer than ap- ing after pressing one of the buttons or the following priority:
proximately 10 seconds. remain illuminated (in red) at any time,
앫 Automatic emergency – First priority
If the indicator lamp in the Information the Tele Aid system has detected a
fault or the service is not currently ac- 앫 Manual emergency – Second priority
button ¡ is illuminated continuous-
ly and there was no voice connection to tive, and may not initiate a call. Visit 앫 Roadside assistance – Third priority
the Response Center established, then your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center
and have the system checked or con- 앫 Information – Fourth priority
the Tele Aid system could not initiate
an Information call (e.g. the relevant tact the Response Center at Should a higher priority call be initiated
cellular phone network is not avail- 1-800-756-9018 (in the USA) or while you are connected, an upgrade (al-
able). The message INFO – 1-888-923-8367 (in Canada) as soon ternating) tone will be heard, and the ap-
CALL FAILED appears in the multifunc- as possible. propriate indicator lamp will flash. If
tion display. certain information such as vehicle identi-
fication number or customer information is
Information calls can be terminated us-
not available, the operator may need to re-
ing the ì button on the multifunc-
transmit.
tion steering wheel.
During this time you will hear a beep and
voice contact will be interrupted. Voice
contact will resume once the retransmis-
sion is completed. Once a call is conclud-
ed, a beep will be heard and the
appropriate indicator lamp will stop flash-
ing. The COMAND* system operation will
resume.
240
Controls in detail
Useful features
! i Remote door unlock

If the indicator lamp continues to flash When a Tele Aid call has been initiated, In case you have locked your vehicle unin-
or the system does not reset, contact the audio system or the COMAND* sys- tentionally (e.g. key inside vehicle), and the
the Response Center at tem audio is muted and the selected reserve key is not handy:
1-800-756-9018 (in the USA) or mode (radio, tape or CD) pauses. The
왘 Contact the Mercedes-Benz Response
1-888-923-8367 (in Canada), or optional cellular phone (if installed)
Center at 1-800-756-9018 (in the USA)
Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance switches off. If you must use this
or 1-888-923-8367 (in Canada).
at 1-800-FOR-MERCedes phone, the vehicle must be parked. Dis-
(1-800-367-6372) in the USA or Cus- connect the coiled cord and place the You will be asked to provide your pass-
tomer Service at 1-800-387-0100 in call. The COMAND* navigation system word which you provided when you
Canada. (if engaged) will continue to run. The completed the subscriber agreement.
display in the instrument cluster is 왘 Then return to your vehicle and pull the
i available for use, and spoken com- trunk recessed handle for a minimum
mands are only available by pressing of 20 seconds until the SOS button is
The indicator lamp in the respective
the RPT button on the COMAND* unit. flashing.
button flashes until the call is conclud-
A pop-up window will appear in the CO-
ed. Calls can only be terminated by a The message EMERGENCY CALL –
MAND* display to indicate that a
Response Center or Customer Assis- CALL CONNECTED appears in the multi-
Tele Aid call is in progress.
tance Center representative except function display.
Roadside Assistance and Information
calls, which can also be terminated by As an alternative, you may unlock the vehi-
pressing button ì on the multifunc- cle via Internet using the ID and password
tion steering wheel. sent to you shortly after the completion of
your acquaintance call.
241
Controls in detail
Useful features
The Response Center will then unlock your Stolen vehicle tracking services Info Services* (except Canada)
vehicle with the remote door unlocking
In the event your vehicle was stolen: Info Services categories include news,
feature.
sports, stocks, weather and calendar re-
왘 Report the incident to the police.
i minders. Choices can be selected via
The police will issue a numbered inci- www.mbusa.com or by calling
The remote door unlock feature is avail- dent report. 1-800-For-MERCedes (1-800-367-6372).
able if the relevant cellular phone net-
work is available. 왘 Pass this number on to the To request Info Services:
Mercedes-Benz Response Center along
The SOS button will flash and the mes- 왘 Press the SVC button on the
with your password issued to you when
sage EMERGENCY CALL – COMAND* system.
you subscribed to the service.
CALL CONNECTED will appear in the mul- 왘 Select SEND NEW REQUEST FOR INFO
tifunction display to indicate receipt of The Response Center will then attempt
SERVICE.
the door unlock command. to covertly contact the vehicle’s
Tele Aid system. Once the vehicle is lo- NEW INFO SERVICE REQUEST TRANSMIT-
Once the vehicle is unlocked, a Re- cated, the Response Center will con- TED will appear in the COMAND* dis-
sponse Center specialist will attempt tact the local law enforcement and you. play and call status messages will
to establish voice contact with the ve- The vehicle’s location will only be pro- appear in the multifunction display.
hicle occupants. vided to law enforcement. Once information is available, the mes-
If the trunk recessed handle was pulled sage NEW INFO RECEIVED! READ LATER
for more than 20 seconds before door WHEN STOPPED? will appear.
unlock authorization was received by
the Response Center, you must wait 왘 Select YES.
15 minutes before pulling the trunk re- 왘 With the vehicle stopped in a safe loca-
cessed handle again. tion, press SVC.
242
Controls in detail
Useful features
왘 Select View Info Service Of ! Garage door opener

mm.dd.yyyy hh:mm. The Tele Aid system utilizes the cellular
network for communication and the The built-in remote control is capable of
Messages will be retained for
GPS (Global Positioning System) satel- operating up to three separately controlled
30 minutes once the ignition is
lites for vehicle location. If either of objects.
switched off.
these signals are unavailable, the
Tele Aid system may not function and if
Warning! G this occurs, assistance must be sum-
moned by other means.
A driver’s attention to the road must always
be his/her primary focus when driving.
For your safety and the safety of others, we Warning! G
recommend that you pull over to a safe loca-
tion and stop the vehicle before requesting If the indicator lamp in the SOS button does
or receiving any info services. not illuminate during the system self-check
or remains illuminated afterwards, or if the 1 Signal transmitter button
message TELE AID – VISIT WORKSHOP! 2 Signal transmitter button
appears in the multifunction display, the 3 Signal transmitter button
system may not operate properly. Have the 4 Indicator lamp
44 feet (approximately 13.5 m) every sec-
ond. system checked at the nearest authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as possible.
243
Controls in detail
Useful features
i Programming or reprogramming the in-

Warning! G For operation in the USA only: tegrated remote control
This device complies with Part 15 of 왘 Turn key in the starter switch to
When programming a garage door opener,
the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to position 1 or 2.
the door moves up or down.
the following two conditions:
When programming or operating the remote 왘 Hold the end of the hand-held transmit-
control make sure there is no possibility of (1) This device may not cause harmful ter of the device you wish to train
anyone being harmed by the moving door. interference, and approximately 2 to 5 inches (5 cm to
(2) this device must accept any inter- 12 cm) away from the surface of the in-
ference received, including interfer- tegrated remote control located on the
i inside rear view mirror, keeping the in-
ence that may cause undesired
Certain types of garage door openers dicator lamp in view.
operation.
are incompatible with the integrated
왘 Using both hands, simultaneously push
opener. If you should experience diffi- Any unauthorized modification to this
device could void the user’s authority the hand-held transmitter button and
culties with programming the transmit-
to operate the equipment. the desired integrated remote control
ter, contact your authorized
button. Do not release the buttons until
Mercedes-Benz Center, or call
completing the next step.
Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance
Center (in the USA only) at 왘 The indicator lamp on the integrated
1-800-FOR-MERCedes, or Customer remote control will flash, first slowly
Service (in Canada) at and then rapidly. The rapid flashing
1-800-387-0100. lamp indicates successful program-
ming of the new frequency signal.
왘 When the indicator lamp flashes rapid-
ly, release both buttons.
244
Controls in detail
Useful features
왘 To program the remaining two buttons, Exact location and color of the button Canadian programming
repeat the above steps. may vary by garage door opener brand.
During programming, your hand-held
If there is difficulty locating the trans-
i mitting button, refer to garage door
transmitter may automatically stop trans-
mitting.
If, after several attempts, you do not opener operator’s manual.
successfully program the integrated re- 왘 Continue to press and hold the inte-
왘 Press "training" button on the garage
mote control device to learn the signal grated remote control transmitter but-
door opener motor head unit.
of the hand-held transmitter, the ga- ton (refer to steps two through four in
rage door opener could be equipped The "training light" is activated. the "Programming" portion) while you
with the "rolling code feature". You have 30 seconds time to initiate the press and re-press ("cycle") your
following step. hand-held transmitter every two sec-
Rolling code programming onds until the frequency signal has
왘 Firmly press and release the pro- been learned.
To train a garage door opener (or other roll- grammed integrated remote control
ing code devices) with the rolling code fea- Upon successful training, the indicator
transmit button.
ture, follow these instructions after lamp will flash slowly and then rapidly
왘 Press and release same button a sec- after several seconds.
completing the "Programming" portion of
this text. (A second person may make the ond time to complete the training pro-
following training procedures quicker and cess.
easier.) Some garage door openers may require
you to do this procedure a third time to
왘 Locate training button on the garage
complete the training.
door opener motor head unit.
왘 Confirm the garage door operation by
pressing the programmed button on
the integrated remote control transmit-
ter.
245
Controls in detail
Useful features
Operating the remote control Erasing the remote control memory

왘 Turn key in starter switch to position 1 왘 Turn key in starter switch to position 1
or 2. or 2.
왘 Select and press the appropriate but- 왘 Simultaneously hold down the left and
ton to activate the remote controlled right side buttons for approximately
device. 20 seconds, or until the indicator lamp
The integrated remote control trans- blinks rapidly.
mitter continues to send the signal as The codes of all three channels are
long as the button is pressed – up to erased.
20 seconds.
i
If you sell your vehicle, erase the codes
of all three channels.
246
Operation
The first 1000 miles (1500 km)
Driving instructions
At the gas station
Engine compartment
Tires and wheels
Winter driving
Maintenance
Vehicle care
247
Operation
In the "Operation" section you will find de- The more cautiously you treat your vehicle 앫 Avoid accelerating by kick-down.
tailed information on operating, maintain- during the break-in period, the more satis-
앫 Do not brake the vehicle by shifting to
ing and caring for your vehicle. fied you will be with its performance later
a lower gear using the selector lever.
on.
앫 Select positions 3, 2 or 1 only when
앫 Drive your vehicle during the first
driving at moderate speeds (for hill
1000 miles (1500 km) at varying but
driving).
moderate vehicle and engine speeds.
After 1000 miles (1500 km) you may grad-
앫 During this period, avoid heavy loads ually increase vehicle and engine speeds
(full throttle driving) and excessive en- to the permissible maximum.
gine speeds (no more than 2⁄3 of maxi-
mum rpm in each gear).
248
Operation
Drive sensibly – save fuel Drinking and driving Pedals
Fuel consumption, to a great extent, de-

pends on driving habits and operating con- Warning! G Warning! G
ditions.
Drinking or taking drugs and driving can be Keep driver’s foot area clear at all times. Ob-
To save fuel you should:
a very dangerous combination. Even a small jects stored in this area may impair pedal
앫 Keep tires at the recommended infla- amount of alcohol or drugs can affect your movement.
tion pressures. reflexes, perceptions and judgement.
앫 Remove unnecessary loads. The possibility of a serious or even fatal ac-
cident is sharply increased when you drink
앫 Remove roof rack when not in use.
or take drugs and drive.
앫 Allow engine to warm up under low
Please don’t drink or take drugs and drive or
load use.
allow anyone to drive after drinking or taking
앫 Avoid frequent acceleration and decel- drugs.
eration.
앫 Have all maintenance work performed
at regular intervals by an authorized
Fuel consumption is also increased by driv-
ing in cold weather, in stop-and-go traffic,
on short trips and in hilly country.
249
Operation
Power assistance Brakes

with all wheels off the ground using flatbed
or appropriate wheel lift/dolly equipment. A
Warning! G tow bar must be used if circumstances do

not permit the use of the recommended
Warning! G
towing methods and the vehicle requires
The brake system requires electrical energy After driving in heavy rain for some time
towing with all four wheels on the ground.
for operation. without applying the brakes or through wa-
Towing the vehicle with all four wheels on
A malfunction in the vehicle’s power supply ter deep enough to wet brake components,
the ground is only permissible for distances
or electrical system may impair brake sys- the first braking action may be somewhat
up to 30 miles (50 km) and at a speed not to
tem operation and switch it into its reduced and increased pedal pressure may
exceed 30 mph (50 km/h). For more infor-
limp-home (emergency operation) mode. In be necessary to obtain expected braking ef-
mation, refer to "Towing the vehicle"
such a case, the red brake warning lamp fect. Be sure to maintain a safe distance
(컄 page 348). For more information see
(컄 page 291) and warning messages in the from vehicles in front.
SBC brake system (컄 page 77).
instrument cluster (컄 page 303) light up Resting your foot on the brake pedal will
With the engine not running, there is no
while driving. To brake, the driver must then cause excessive and premature wear of the
power assistance for the steering system. In
apply significantly greater brake pedal pres- brake pads.
this case, it is important to keep in mind that
sure and depress the pedal much further to
a considerably higher degree of effort is nec-
obtain the expected braking effect. If neces-
essary to steer the vehicle.
sary, apply full pressure to the brake pedal.
Brakes are only applied to the front wheels.
Stopping distance is increased! If there is a
malfunction in the SBC brake system, we
recommend that the vehicle be transported
250
Operation
If the parking brake is released and the

It can also result in the brakes overheating,
thereby significantly reducing their effec-
brake warning lamp in the instrument clus- Warning! G
ter stays on, there is a malfunction in the
tiveness. It may not be possible to stop the If other than recommended brake pads are
SBC brake system (컄 page 77) or the
vehicle in sufficient time to avoid an acci- installed, or other than recommended brake
brake fluid level in the reservoir is too low.
dent. fluid is used, the braking properties of the
Brake pad wear or a leak in the system may vehicle can be degraded to an extent that
To help prevent brake disk corrosion after be the reason for low brake fluid in the res- safe braking is substantially impaired. This
driving on wet road surfaces (particularly ervoir. could result in an accident.
salted roads), it is advisable to brake the Have the brake system inspected at an au- Be certain to read and observe the warning
vehicle with considerable force prior to thorized Mercedes-Benz Center immedi- notices on brake pad replacement
parking. The heat generated serves to dry ately. (컄 page 305).
the brakes.
All checks and service work on the brake
If your brake system is normally only sub- system should be carried out by an autho-
jected to moderate loads, you should occa-
!
sionally test the effectiveness of the When driving down long and steep
brakes by applying above-normal braking Only install brake pads and brake fluid rec- grades, relieve the load on the brakes
pressure at higher speeds. This will also ommended by Mercedes-Benz. by shifting into a lower gear to use the
enhance the grip of the brake pads. engine’s braking power. This helps pre-
vent overheating of the brakes and re-
! duces brake pad wear.
Be very careful not to endanger other
road users when you apply the brakes. After hard braking, it is advisable to drive
on for some time, rather than immediately
Refer to the description of the Brake
parking, so that the air stream will cool
Assist System (BAS) (컄 page 74).
down the brakes faster.
251
Operation
Driving off Tires

Warning! G
Apply the brakes to test them briefly after
driving off. Perform this procedure only Do not park this vehicle in areas where com- Warning! G
when the road is clear of other traffic. bustible materials such as grass, hay or
leaves can come into contact with the hot If you feel a sudden significant vibration or
Warm up the engine smoothly. Do not
exhaust system, as these materials could be ride disturbance, or you suspect that possi-
place full load on the engine until the oper-
ignited and cause a vehicle fire. ble damage to your vehicle has occurred,
ating temperature has been reached.
To reduce the risk of personal injury as a re- you should turn on the hazard warning flash-
When starting off on a slippery surface, do sult of vehicle movement, before turning off ers, carefully slow down, and drive with cau-
not allow one drive wheel to spin for an ex- the engine and leaving the vehicle always: tion to an area which is a safe distance from
tended period with the ESP switched off. the road.
Doing so may cause serious damage to the 앫 Keep right foot on brake pedal.
Inspect the tires and under the vehicle for
drive train which is not covered by the 앫 Firmly depress parking brake pedal.
possible damage. If the vehicle or tires ap-
Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty. 앫 Move the selector lever to position P. pear unsafe, have it towed to the nearest
앫 Slowly release brake pedal. Mercedes-Benz Center or tire dealer for re-
Parking
앫 When parked on an incline, turn front pairs.
wheel towards the road curb.
!
앫 Turn the key to starter switch position 0 Tread wear indicators (TWI) are required by
Set the parking brake whenever park- law. These indicators are located in six
and remove, or press KEYLESS-GO*
ing or leaving the vehicle. In addition, start/stop button (vehicles with places on the tread circumference and be-
move selector lever to position P. In ad- KEYLESS-GO*). come visible at a tread depth of approxi-
dition, when parking on hills, always set mately 1⁄16 in (1.5 mm), at which point the
앫 Take the key or the SmartKey with
the parking brake and turn front wheel tire is considered worn and should be re-
KEYLESS-GO* (if so equipped) with you
against curb. and lock vehicle when leaving. placed.
252
Operation
The tread wear indicator appears as a solid Tire traction

band across the tread. Warning! G
The safe speed on a wet, snow covered or
Do not drive with a flat tire. A flat tire affects icy road is always lower than on a dry road.
Warning! G the ability to steer or brake the vehicle. You
You should pay particular attention to the
may lose control of the vehicle. Continued
Do not allow your tires to wear down too far. condition of the road whenever the outside
driving with a flat tire or driving at high
As tread depth approaches 1⁄16 in (1.5 mm), temperatures are close to the freezing
speed with a flat tire will cause excessive
the adhesion properties on a wet road are point.
heat build-up and possibly a fire.
sharply reduced.
Depending upon the weather and/or road
Aquaplaning Warning! G
surface (conditions), the tire traction varies
widely. Depending on the depth of the water layer If ice has formed on the road, tire traction
on the road, aquaplaning may occur, even will be substantially reduced. Under such
Specified tire pressures must be main- at low speeds and with new tires. Reduce weather conditions, drive, steer and brake
tained. This applies particularly if the tires vehicle speed, avoid track grooves in the with extreme caution.
are subjected to high loads (e.g. high road and apply brakes cautiously in the
speeds, heavy loads, high ambient temper- rain. Mercedes-Benz recommends M+S rated
atures). radial-ply tires for the winter season for all
four wheels to insure normal balanced
handling characteristics. On packed snow,
they can reduce your stopping distance
compared to summer tires. Stopping dis-
tance, however, is still considerably great-
er than when the road is not covered with
snow or ice. Exercise appropriate caution.
253
Operation
Tire speed rating Winter driving instructions

Warning! G
The most important rule for slippery or icy
Warning! G roads is to drive sensibly and to avoid On slippery road surfaces, never downshift
abrupt acceleration, braking and steering in order to obtain braking action. This could
Even when permitted by law, never operate maneuvers. Do not use the cruise control result in drive wheel slip and reduced vehi-
a vehicle at speeds greater than the maxi- system under such conditions. cle control. Your vehicle’s ABS will not pre-
mum speed rating of the tires. vent this type of loss of control.
When the vehicle is in danger of skidding,
Exceeding the maximum speed for which move selector lever to position N or in
tires are rated can lead to sudden tire fail- case you have a manual transmission, de- Road salts and chemicals can adversely af-
ure, causing loss of vehicle control and re- clutch. Try to keep the vehicle under con- fect braking efficiency. Increased pedal
sulting in personal injury and possible death. trol by corrective steering action. force may become necessary to produce
the normal braking effect.
Your vehicle is factory equipped with
i We therefore recommend depressing the
"H"-rated tires, which have a speed rating For more information on driving with brake pedal periodically when traveling at
of 130 mph (210 km/h). snow chains, see "Snow chains" length on salt-strewn roads.
(컄 page 274).
An electronic speed limiter prevents your This can bring road salt impaired braking
vehicle from exceeding the speed rating. efficiency back to normal. A prerequisite
Regardless of the tire rating, local speed is, however, that this be done without en-
limits should be obeyed. Use prudent driv- dangering other drivers on the road.
ing speeds appropriate to prevailing condi- If the vehicle is parked after being driven
tions. on salt-treated roads, the braking efficien-
cy should be tested as soon as possible af-
ter driving is resumed while observing the
safety rules in the previous paragraph.
254
Operation
Standing water Passenger compartment

Warning! G
!
If the vehicle becomes stuck in snow, make
Do not drive through flooded areas or Warning! G
sure that snow is kept clear of the exhaust
water of unknown depth.
pipe and from around the vehicle with the Always fasten items being carried as secure-
engine running. Otherwise, deadly carbon If you must drive through standing wa- ly as possible.
monoxide (CO) gases may enter vehicle inter, drive slowly to prevent water from In an accident, during hard braking or sud-
terior resulting in unconsciousness and entering the passenger compartment den maneuvers, loose items will be thrown
death. or the engine compartment. Water in around inside the vehicle, and cause injury
To assure sufficient fresh air ventilation, these areas could cause damage to to vehicle occupants unless the items are
open a window slightly on the side of the ve- electrical components or wiring of the securely fastened in the vehicle.
hicle not facing the wind engine or transmission, or could result
in water being ingested by the engine The trunk is the preferred place to carry ob-
through the air intake causing severe jects.
internal engine damage. Any such dam-
Warning! G age is not covered by the Traveling abroad
Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
The outside temperature indicator is not de-
Abroad, there is a widely-spread
signed to serve as an ice-warning device and
Mercedes-Benz service network at your
is therefore unsuitable for that purpose. In-
disposal. If you plan to travel into areas
dicated temperatures just above the freez-
which are not listed in the index of your
ing point do not guarantee that the road
Mercedes-Benz Center directory, you
surface is free of ice.
should request pertinent information from
your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
For more information on winter driving, see
"Winter driving" (컄 page 273)
255
Operation
Control and operation of radio trans- Telephones and two-way radios Catalytic converter
mitter
Your Mercedes-Benz is equipped with
Warning! G monolithic type catalytic converters, an
COMAND*, radio and telephone* important element in conjunction with the
oxygen sensors to achieve substantial con-
with a built-in or attached antenna (i.e. with-
Warning! G out being connected to an external antenna)
trol of the pollutants in the exhaust emis-
sions. Keep your vehicle in proper
from inside the vehicle while the engine is
Please do not forget that your primary re- operating condition by following our rec-
running. Doing so could lead to a malfunc-
sponsibility is to drive the vehicle. Only op- ommended maintenance instructions as
erate the COMAND (Cockpit Management outlined in your Service Booklet.
sibly resulting in an accident and personal
and Data System), radio or telephone1 if
road and traffic conditions permit.
injury. !
To prevent damage to the catalytic con-
Radio transmitters, such as a portable tele- verters, use only premium unleaded
phone or a citizens band unit should only gasoline in this vehicle.
be used inside the vehicle if they are con-
44 feet (approximately 13.5 m) every sec- Any noticeable irregularities in engine
nected to an antenna that is installed on
ond. operation should be repaired promptly.
the outside of the vehicle.
1 Otherwise, excessive unburned fuel
Observe all legal requirements
Refer to the radio transmitter operation in- may reach the catalytic converter,
structions regarding use of an external an- causing it to overheat, which could
tenna. start a fire.
256
Operation
Emission control
Certain systems of the engine serve to
As with any vehicle, do not idle, park or op- keep the toxic components of the exhaust Inhalation of exhaust gas is hazardous to
erate this vehicle in areas where combusti- gases within permissible limits required by your health. All exhaust gas contains carbon
ble materials such as grass, hay or leaves law. monoxide, and inhaling it can cause uncon-
can come into contact with the hot exhaust sciousness and lead to death.
These systems, of course, will function
system, as these materials could be ignited Do not run the engine in confined areas
properly only when maintained strictly ac-
and cause a vehicle fire. (such as a garage) which are not properly
cording to factory specifications. Any ad-
justments on the engine should, therefore, ventilated. If you think that exhaust gas
be carried out only by qualified fumes are entering the vehicle while driving,
Mercedes-Benz Center authorized techni- have the cause determined and corrected
cians. Engine adjustments should not be immediately. If you must drive under these
altered in any way. Moreover, the specified conditions, drive only with at least one win-
service jobs must be carried out regularly dow fully open.
according to Mercedes-Benz servicing re-
quirements. For details refer to the Service
Booklet.
257
Operation
Coolant temperature
Warning! G
During severe operating conditions and
stop-and-go city traffic, the coolant tem- 앫 Driving when your engine is badly over-
perature may rise close to approx. 248°F heated can cause some fluids, which
(120°C). may have leaked into the engine com-
partment, to catch fire. You could be se-
The engine should not be operated with riously burned.
the coolant temperature over 248°F 앫 Steam from an overheated engine can
(120°C). Doing so may cause serious en- cause serious burns and can occur just
gine damage which is not covered by the by opening the engine hood. Stay away
Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty. from the engine if you see or hear steam
coming from it.
Turn off the engine, get out of the vehicle
cools down.
258
Operation
At the gas station
At the gas station
왘 Only fill your tank until the filler nozzle
Warning! G unit cuts out – do not top up or over-
fill.
Gasoline is highly flammable and poisonous.
It burns violently and can cause serious inju-
ry. Whenever you are around gasoline, avoid Warning! G
inhaling fumes and skin contact, extinguish
Overfilling of the fuel tank may create pres-
all smoking materials. Never allow sparks,
sure in the system which could cause a gas
flame or smoking materials near gasoline!
discharge. This could cause the gas to spray
back out when removing the fuel pump noz-
The fuel filler flap is located on the 왘 Remove the key from the starter zle, which could cause personal injury.
right-hand side of the vehicle towards the switch.
rear. Locking/unlocking the vehicle with 왘 Open the fuel filler flap by pushing at 왘 Replace the fuel cap by turning it to the
the remote control or the SmartKey with the point indicated by the arrow. right.
KEYLESS-GO* automatically locks/un-
locks the fuel filler flap. The fuel filler flap springs open. You will hear when the fuel cap is tight-
왘 Turn the fuel cap to the left and hold on ened.
to it until possible pressure is released. 왘 Close the fuel filler flap.
왘 Take off the cap and set it in the recess
on the fuel filler flap.
To prevent fuel vapors from escaping
into the open air, fully insert filler noz-
zle unit.
259
Operation
At the gas station
i Check regularly and before a long trip Engine oil level

Use only premium unleaded gasoline More information on engine oil can be
with a minimum Posted Octane Rating found in the "Operation" section
of 91 (average of 96 RON/86 MON). (컄 page 262).
Information on gasoline quality can
See also "Opening hood" (컄 page 261).
normally be found on the fuel pump.
More information on gasoline can be Vehicle lighting
found in the Factory Approved Service
Check function and cleanliness. For more
Products Pamphlet.
information on replacing light bulbs, see
the "Practical hints" section (컄 page 332).
i 1 Windshield washer and headlamp See also the section on the exterior lamp
Leaving the engine running and the fuel cleaning system switch (컄 page 112).
cap open can cause the ? lamp to For more information on refilling the
illuminate. reservoir, see the "Operation" section Tire inflation pressure
(컄 page 267).
More information on tire inflation pressure
2 Brake fluid
can be found in the "Operation" section
More information on brake fluid can be
(컄 page 269).
found in the "Technical data" section
(컄 page 368).
3 Coolant level
More information on the coolant level
can be found in the "Operation" section
(컄 page 264).
260
Operation
Engine compartment
Engine compartment
Hood 왘 Pull lever 1 downwards. 왘 Pull handle 2 to its stop out of radiator
grille.
The hood is unlocked and handle 2 will
extend out of the radiator grille. 왘 Pull up on the hood (do not pull up on
Warning! G the handle) and then release it.
!
Do not pull the release lever while the vehi- The hood will be automatically held
To avoid damage to the windshield wip-
cle is in motion. Otherwise the hood could open at shoulder height by gas-filled
ers or hood, never open the hood if the
be forced open by passing air flow. struts.
wiper arms are folded forward away
from the windshield.
Opening Warning! G
To help prevent personal injury, stay clear of
moving parts when the hood is open and the
engine is running. Be sure the hood is prop-
erly closed before driving. When closing the
hood, use extreme caution not to catch
hands or fingers.
The radiator fan may continue to run for ap-
proximately 30 seconds or even restart af-
ter the engine has been turned off. Stay
1 Hood release 2 Handle for opening the hood clear from fan blades.
261
Operation
Engine compartment
Closing Engine oil

Warning! G
The amount of oil your engine needs will
If you see flames or smoke coming from the Warning! G depend on a number of factors, including
engine compartment, or if the coolant tem- driving style. Higher oil consumption can
Be careful that you do not close the hood on
perature gauge indicates that the engine is occur when
anyone.
overheated, do not open the hood. Move
앫 the vehicle is new
away from vehicle and do not open the hood
until the engine has cooled. If necessary, 왘 Let the hood drop from a height of ap- 앫 the vehicle is driven frequently at high-
call a fire department. proximately 1 ft (30 cm). er engine speeds
The hood will lock audibly. Engine oil consumption checks should only
왘
be made after the vehicle break-in period.
Warning! G Check to make sure that the hood is
fully closed.
Checking engine oil level
The engine is equipped with a transistorized If you can raise the hood at a point
ignition system. Because of the high voltage above the headlamps, then it is not When checking the oil level the vehicle
it is dangerous to touch any components (ig- properly closed. Open it again and let it must
nition coils, spark plug sockets, diagnostic drop with somewhat greater force. 앫 be parked on level ground
socket) of the ignition system
앫 be at normal operating temperature
앫 with the engine running
앫 have been stationary for at least five
앫 while starting the engine minutes with the engine turned off
앫 if ignition is "on" and the engine is
turned manually
262
Operation
Engine compartment
You can check the engine oil level on the One of the following messages will sub- Adding engine oil
multifunction display. sequently appear in the indicator:
왘 Turn the key in the starter switch to 앫 Engine oil level ok
position 2.
앫 Add 1.0 qt. to reach max. oil
The standard display (컄 page 121) should level!
appear in the multifunction display. (Canada: 1.0 liter)
왘 Press button k or j, on the
앫 Add 1.5 qts. to reach max. oil
steering wheel until the following mes-
level!
sage is seen in the multifunction dis-
play: (Canada: 1.5 liters)
앫 Add 2.0 qts. to reach max. oil
1 Filler neck
Engine oil level - Measuring now!
Measurement correct only if veh. level! 왘 Unscrew the cap from filler neck 1. Be
level (Canada: 2.0 liters) careful not to overfill with oil.
왘 If necessary, add engine oil. Be careful not to spill any oil when adding.
Avoid environmental damage caused by oil
entering the ground or water.
왘 Screw the cap back on the filler neck.
!
Excessive oil must be siphoned or
drained off. It could cause damage to
the engine and catalytic converter not
covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited
Warranty.
263
Operation
Engine compartment
Other display messages If you see the message: Transmission fluid level
Engine oil level Not when engine on!
If there is excessive engine oil with the en-
The transmission fluid level does not need
gine at normal operating temperature, the 왘 Turn off the engine. If engine is at nor-
to be checked. If you notice transmission
following message will appear: mal operating temperature, wait five
fluid loss or gear shifting malfunctions,
Engine oil level Reduce oil level! minutes before checking oil. If the en-
have an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center
gine is not yet at normal operating tem-
왘 Have excess oil siphoned. check the transmission.
perature, you must wait 30 minutes
If the key is not turned to position 2 in the before checking oil.
starter switch: Coolant level
Turn on ignition to see engine oil i
The engine coolant is a mixture of water
level! If you want to interrupt the checking
and anticorrosion/antifreeze. To check
왘 Switch on the ignition. procedure, press the k or j but-
the coolant level, the vehicle must be
ton on the multifunction steering
If you see the message: parked on level ground and the engine
wheel.
Observe waiting time must be cool.
왘 Wait five minutes before repeating See "Practical hints" (컄 page 299) if the The coolant expansion tank is located on
check procedure. engine oil level indicator lights up in the the driver’s side of the engine compart-
display while the engine is running. ment.
More information on engine oil can be

found in the "Technical data"
(컄 page 368).
264
Operation
Engine compartment
The coolant level is correct if the level:

Warning! G 앫 for cold coolant: reaches the black
In order to avoid any possibly serious burns: top part of the reservoir
앫 Use extreme caution when opening the 앫 for warm coolant: is approx. 0.6 in
hood if there are any signs of steam or (1.5 cm) higher
coolant leaking from the cooling system, 왘 Add coolant as required.
or if the coolant temperature gauge indi-
cates that the coolant is overheated. 왘 Replace and tighten cap.
앫 Do not remove pressure cap on coolant More information on coolant can be found
reservoir if engine temperature is above 1 Coolant expansion tank in the "Technical data" section
194°F (90°C). Allow engine to cool (컄 page 370).
왘 Using a rag, turn the cap slowly approx-
down before removing cap. The coolant
reservoir contains hot fluid and is under imately one half turn to the left to re-
pressure. lease any excess pressure.
앫 Using a rag, slowly open the cap approx- 왘 Continue turning the cap to the left and
imately 1⁄2 turn to relieve excess pres- remove it.
sure. If opened immediately, scalding
hot fluid and steam will be blown out un-
der pressure.
앫 Do not spill antifreeze on hot engine
parts. Antifreeze contains ethylene gly-
col which may burn if it comes into con-
tact with hot engine parts.
265
Operation
Engine compartment
Battery
G Observe E
all safety instructions Wear eye protection.
and precautions when handling
Your vehicle is equipped with two batter-
automotive batteries.
C
ies: Keep children away.
앫 Auxiliary battery (located in the engine A Risk of explosion
D Keep flames or sparks away F
compartment). Follow the instructions in this
Operator's Manual.
앫 Main battery (starter and electrical from battery. Do not smoke.
consumers; located in the trunk).
B Battery acid is caustic. Do not Batteries contain materials that can harm
These batteries should always be suffi- allow it to come into contact the environment if disposed of improperly.
ciently charged in order to achieve their with skin, eyes or clothing. Recycling of batteries is the preferred
rated service life. method of disposal. Many states require
In case it does, immediately
If you use your vehicle mostly for short dis- sellers of batteries to accept old batteries
flush affected area with clear
tance trips, you will need to have the bat- for recycling.
water and seek medical help if
tery charge checked more frequently. necessary.
When replacing batteries, always use bat-
teries approved by Mercedes-Benz.
If you do not intend to operate your vehicle
for an extended period of time, consult an
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center about
steps you need to observe.
266
Operation
Engine compartment
Windshield washer system and Always use washer solvent/antifreeze

headlamp cleaning system* where temperatures may fall below
freezing. Failure to do so could result in
Fluid for the windshield washer system and damage to the washer system/reser-
the headlamp cleaning system is supplied voir.
from the windshield washer reservoir. It
has a capacity of:
Warning! G
앫 Vehicles without headlamp cleaning
system: approx. 4.8 US qt (4.5 l). Washer solvent/antifreeze is highly flam-
앫 Vehicles with headlamp cleaning sys- mable. Do not spill washer solvent/
1 Washer fluid reservoir
tem: approx. 7.4 US qt (7 l). antifreeze on hot engine parts, because it
may burn. You could be seriously burned. !
During all seasons, add MB Windshield
Washer Concentrate "S" to water. Premix Only use washer fluid which is suitable
More information can be found in the for plastic lenses. Improper washer flu-
the windshield washer fluid in a suitable
"Technical data" section (컄 page 372). id can damage the plastic lenses of the
container.
headlamps.
왘 Refill the reservoir with MB Windshield
Washer Concentrate and water (or
commercially available premixed wind-
shield washer solvent/antifreeze, de-
pending on ambient temperatures).
267
Operation
Tires and wheels
Tires and wheels
See your authorized Mercedes-Benz Cen- Important guidelines
ter for information on tested and recom- Warning! G
mended rims and tires for summer and 앫 Use only sets of tires and rims of the
winter operation. They can also offer ad- Worn, old tires can cause accidents. If the same type and make.
vice concerning tire service and purchase. tire tread is badly worn, or if the tires have
앫 Tires must be of the correct size for the
sustained damage, replace them.
rim.
Warning! G When replacing rims, use only genuine
앫 Break in new tires for approximately
Mercedes-Benz wheel bolts specified for the
particular rim type. Failure to do so can re-
60 miles (100 km) at moderate
Replace rims or tires with the same designa- speeds.
tion, manufacturer and type as shown on the sult in the bolts loosening and possibly an
original part. See your authorized accident. 앫 Regularly check the tires and rims for
Mercedes-Benz Center for further informa- damage.
tion. If incorrectly sized rims and tires are Retread tires are not tested or recom- 앫 If vehicle is heavily loaded, check tire
mounted mended by Mercedes-Benz, since previous pressure and correct as required.
앫 the wheel brakes or suspension compo- damage cannot always be recognized on
앫 Do not allow your tires to wear down
nents can be damaged retreads. Mercedes-Benz can therefore
too far. Adhesion properties on wet
not assure the operating safety of the vehi-
앫 the correct operating clearance of the roads are sharply reduced at tread
cle when such tires are used.
wheels and the tires are no longer guar- depths under 1⁄8 in (3 mm).
anteed See your authorized Mercedes-Benz Cen-
앫 When replacing individual tires, you
ter for information on tested and recom-
should mount new tires on the front
mended rims and tires for summer and
wheels first (on vehicles with
winter operation.
same-sized wheels all around).
268
Operation
Tires and wheels
Life of tire Direction of rotation If the tires are warm you should only cor-
rect the tire pressure if it is too low for cur-
The service life of a tire is dependent upon Unidirectional tires offer added advantag- rent operating conditions.
varying factors including but not limited to: es, such as better aquaplaning perfor-
A table on the fuel filler flap lists the spec-
mance. To benefit, however, you must
앫 Driving style ified tire inflation pressures for warm and
ensure that the tires rotate in the direction
앫 Tire pressure cold tires as well as for various operating
specified.
conditions.
앫 Distance driven An arrow on the sidewall indicates the in-
tended direction of tire rotation. i
Warning! G The pressures listed for light loads are
Checking tire inflation pressure minimum values offering high driving
Tires and spare tire should be replaced after comfort.
six years, independently of the remaining
tread. Warning! G Increased inflation pressures listed for
heavier loads may also be used for light
If the tire pressure repeatedly drops:
loads. These higher pressures produce
! favorable handling characteristics. The
앫 Check the tires for punctures from for- ride of the vehicle, however, will be
Keep unmounted tires in a cool, dry eign objects
place with as little exposure to light as somewhat harder. Never exceed the
앫 Check to see whether air is leaking from maximum values or inflate tires below
possible. Protect tires from contact
the valves or from around the rim. the minimum values listed in the fuel
with oil, grease and gasoline.
filler flap.
Regularly check your tire pressure at inter-
vals of no more than 14 days.
Correct the tire pressure only when tires
are cold.
269
Operation
Tires and wheels
Tire pressure changes by approximately

Do not overload the tires by exceeding the i
1.5 psi (0.1 bar) per 18°F (10°C) of air Possible differences between the read-
specified vehicle capacity weight (as indicat-
temperature change. Keep this in mind ings of a tire pressure gauge of an air
ed by the label on the pillar in the driver’s
when checking tire pressure where the hose, e.g. gas station equipment, and
door opening). Overloading the tires can
temperature is different from the outside the vehicle’s control system can occur.
overheat them, possibly causing a blowout.
temperature. The readings issued by the control sys-
Tire temperature and tire pressure are also Checking tire pressure electronically* tem are more precise.
increased while driving, depending on the
The tire inflation pressure monitor only
driving speed and the tire load. 왘 Switch on ignition.
functions on wheels that are equipped with
Check the spare tire periodically for condi- the proper electronic sensors. It monitors 왘 Press the k button until the current
tion and inflation. Spare tires will age and the tire inflation pressure, as selected by inflation pressures for each tire appear
become worn over time even if never used, the driver, in all four tires. A warning is is- in the multifunction display.
and thus should be inspected and replaced sued to alert you to a decrease in pressure
when necessary. in one or more of the tires.
Tire pressure inquiries are made using the
Warning! G multifunction display (컄 page 121).The
present inflation pressures are displayed
Do not overinflate tires. Overinflating tires only after a few minutes’ travel time.
can result in sudden deflation (blowout) be-
cause they are more likely to become punc- You can select the unit of measurement
tured or damaged by road debris, potholes used for the tire inflation pressure by
etc. Follow recommended inflation pres- changing the setting in the control system
sures. (컄 page 136).
270
Operation
Tires and wheels
Activating the tire inflation pressure i

Warning! G monitor If transporting a deflated road wheel or
You must activate the tire inflation pres- additional wheel sensors in the vehicle,
The tire inflation pressure monitor does not
sure monitor in the following cases: the tire inflation pressure monitor
indicate a warning for wrongly selected in-
should not be reactivated until the de-
flation pressures. Always adjust tire inflation 앫 If you have changed the tire pressure
flated wheel or additional wheel sen-
pressure according to the label affixed on
앫 If you have replaced the wheels or tires sors have been removed from the
the fuel filler cap.
앫 If you have installed new wheels or vehicle. Otherwise, the deflated wheel
The tire inflation pressure monitor is not or additional sensors could confuse the
tires
able to issue a warning due to a sudden loss tire inflation pressure monitor system
of pressure (e.g. tire puncture caused by a 왘 Be sure that the tire pressure is cor- and cause it to malfunction.
foreign object). In this case bring the vehicle rectly set.
to a halt by carefully applying the brakes and
왘 Press the ÿ button on the steering 왘 Press the reset knob (컄 page 22).
avoiding abrupt steering maneuvers.
wheel repeatedly until the standard dis-
The following message will appear in
play menu appears (컄 page 126).
the multifunction display:
i 왘 Press the k button until the infla- Check current tire pressure?.
Operating radio transmission equip- tion pressure of each tire appears in
ment (e.g. wireless headsets, two-way 왘 Press the æ button for Yes.
radios) in or near the vehicle could The following message will appear in
cause the tire inflation pressure moni- the multifunction display:
tor to malfunction. Tire pressure
monitor activated
Press. display after
driving a few mins.
271
Operation
Tires and wheels
If you wish to cancel activation: Rotating wheels !

왘 Press the ç button. If your vehicle is equipped with a tire in-
flation pressure monitor*, electronic
If the following message appears in the Warning! G components are located on the wheel.
multifunction display:
To prevent damage or incorrect instal-
Rotate front and rear wheels only if they are
Tire pressure monitoring Reactivate lation, have the tires changed at an au-
of the same size.
or thorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
Tire pressure monitoring Check tires!
On vehicles with the same wheel size all
왘 Check the tire inflation pressures and
correct them if necessary.
around, wheels can be rotated every 3000 Warning! G
to 6000 miles (5000 to 10000 km), or
왘 Restart the activation of the tire infla- sooner if necessary, according to the de- Have the tightening torque checked after
tion pressure monitor. gree of tire wear. The same direction of tire changing a wheel. Wheels could become
rotation must be retained. loose if not tightened with a torque of
Rotate the wheels before the characteris- 96 ft.lb. (130 Nm).
tic tire wear pattern becomes visible Use only genuine Mercedes-Benz wheel
(shoulder wear on front wheels and tread bolts specified for your vehicle's rims.
center wear on rear wheels).
Thoroughly clean the inner side of the
wheels after each rotation. Check and en-
sure proper tire inflation pressure.
272
Operation
Winter driving
Winter driving
Before the onset of winter, have your vehi- Winter tires Always observe the speed rating of the
cle winterized at an authorized winter tires installed on your vehicle. If the
Mercedes-Benz Center. This service in- Always use winter tires at temperatures maximum speed for which your tires are
cludes: below 39°F (4°C) and whenever wintry rated is below the speed rating of your ve-
road conditions prevail. Use of winter tires hicle, you must place a notice to this effect
앫 Check of anticorrosion and antifreeze
is the only way to achieve the maximum ef- where it will be seen by the driver. Such no-
concentration.
fectiveness of the ABS and the ESP in win- tices are available from your tire dealer or
앫 Addition of cleaning concentrate to the ter operation. from any authorized Mercedes-Benz Cen-
water of the windshield and headlamp ter.
For safe handling, ensure that all mounted
cleaning system. Add MB Concentrate
winter tires are of the same make and have
"S" to a premixed windshield washer
solvent/antifreeze which is formulated
the same tread design. Warning! G
for below freezing temperatures
(컄 page 371). Warning! G If you use your spare tire when winter tires
are fitted on the other wheels, be aware that
앫 Battery test. Battery capacity drops the difference in tire characteristics may
Winter tires having a tread depth under
with decreasing ambient temperature. very well impair turning stability and that
0.16 in (4 mm) must be replaced. They are
A well charged battery helps to ensure overall driving stability may be reduced.
no longer suitable for winter operation.
that the engine can be started, even at Adapt your driving style to this.
low ambient temperatures.
Have the spare tire replaced with a winter
앫 Tire change. We recommend M+S rat- tire at the nearest authorized
ed radial-ply tires on all four wheels for Mercedes-Benz Center.
the winter season.
273
Operation
Winter driving
Block heater (Canada only) Snow chains Please observe the following guidelines
when using snow chains:
The engine is equipped with a block heat- When driving with snow chains, always se-
앫 Use of snow chains is not permissible
er. lect the raised level of the level control sys-
with all wheel/tire combinations.
tem AIRMATIC DC* (컄 page 209). Other
The electrical cable may be installed at
settings may result in damage to your vehi- 앫 Chains should only be used on the rear
your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
cle. wheels. Follow the manufacturer's
mounting instructions.
Snow chains should only be driven on
snow-covered roads at speeds not to ex- 앫 Only use snow chains that are ap-
ceed 30 mph (50 km/h). Remove chains proved by Mercedes-Benz. Your autho-
as soon as possible when driving on roads rized Mercedes-Benz Center will be
without snow. glad to advise you on this subject.
i !
When driving with snow chains, you Use of snow chains is not permissible
may wish to deactivate the ESP with tire size 245/45 R17
(컄 page 76) before setting the vehicle (컄 page 361).
in motion. This will improve the vehi-
cle’s traction.
274
Operation
Maintenance
Maintenance
Flexible Service System PLUS Service A due now! i
(FSS PLUS) The additional + after the type of ser-
The type of service due is indicated in the
speedometer display field: vice indicates the degree of wear of the
We strongly recommend that you have
brake pads.
your vehicle serviced by your authorized from Service A
Mercedes-Benz Center, in accordance with The brake pads may reach their wear
(Minor service)
the Service Booklet at the times called for limit in the time period up to the next
by the FSS PLUS to Service H service interval.
(Flexible Service System PLUS). (Major service) Have the brake pads checked and, if
Failure to have the vehicle maintained in necessary, replaced by an authorized
accordance with the Service Booklet at the Mercedes-Benz Center during your
designated times/mileage called for by next service appointment.
the FSS PLUS may result in vehicle dam-
age not covered by the Mercedes-Benz i
Limited Warranty. The interval between services depends
FSS PLUS will notify you when your next on your driving habits. A gentle driving
service is due. style, moderate engine speeds and the
avoidance of short distance trips will
Approximately one month before your next
lengthen the interval between services.
service is due, one of the following mes-
sages will appear in the multifunction dis-
play while you are driving or when you Clearing the service indicator
switch on the ignition (example service A):
You can clear the service indicator
Service A in XXXX miles (km)
왘 Press the j button on the multi-
Service A in XX days
function steering wheel.
Service A in X day
275
Operation
Maintenance
The service indicator is cleared and the Calling up the service indicator Resetting the service indicator
standard display appears in the multi-
function display. 왘 Switch the ignition on. In the event that a service on your vehicle
is not carried out by an authorized
The standard display of the control sys-
Service term exceeded Mercedes-Benz Center, you can reset the
tem appears (컄 page 121).
service indicator yourself.
If you have exceeded the suggested ser- 왘 Press button k or j on the mul-
왘 Switch the ignition on.
vice term, you will see the following mes- tifunction steering wheel until the
sage in the multifunction display: FSS PLUS indicator appears in the mul- The standard display of the control sys-
tifunction display. tem appears (컄 page 121).
Service A exceeded by XXXXX miles (km)
Service A exceeded by XXX days i 왘 Press button k or j on the mul-
Service A exceeded by X day tifunction steering wheel until the
If the battery is disconnected, the days
FSS PLUS indicator appears in the mul-
An authorized Mercedes-Benz Center will of disconnection will not be included in
tifunction display.
reset the service indicator following a com- the count shown by the service indica-
pleted service. tor. To arrive at the true service dead- 왘 Press the reset knob (컄 page 22) for
line, you will need to subtract these about five seconds.
days from the days shown in the ser-
vice indicator.
Do not confuse the service indicator
with the engine oil level indicator :.
276
Operation
Maintenance
The SERVICE MENU appears in the multi- The selection maker is on STANDARD FSS PLUS now recalculates the values.
function display. OIL. You cannot call up the service display or
the service menu during this time.
왘 Press the ÿ button.
The words SERVICE CONFIRMED appear i
in the multifunction display. If the service indicator was inadvertent-
ly reset, have an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center correct it.
왘 Select the CONFIRMATION menu with the Only reset if the proper service has
+ or - button. been performed. Resetting the system
without proper service as called for by
the FSS PLUS will cause the FSS PLUS
The service indicator now displays the The service indicator is reset. to incorrectly determine the next ser-
CONFIRMATION menu. vice interval which will result in engine
왘 Press button è on the multifunction
The selection marker is on CONFIRM. steering wheel until the standard dis- damage not covered by the
play appears in the multifunction dis- Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
play.

The service indicator now displays the
CONFIRM menu.
277
Operation
Maintenance
Setting the date for special works The service indicator now displays the 왘 Press button k or j on the mul-
SPECIAL WORK menu. tifunction steering wheel to set the
You can enter appointments for exhaust month and year.
gas analysis and general inspection over
왘 Select DATE CONFIRMED with the +
FSS PLUS.
or - button.
왘 Switch ignition on.
The standard display of the control sys-
The new date is set.
tem appears (컄 page 121).
왘 Select the EXH.-GAS ANALYSIS or GEN- 왘 Press button è on the multifunction
왘 Press button k or j on the mul- ERAL INSPECTION menu with the + steering wheel until the standard dis-
tifunction steering wheel until the or - button. play appears in the multifunction dis-
FSS PLUS indicator appears in the mul-
왘 Press the ÿ button. play.
tifunction display.
The service indicator now displays the FSS PLUS now recalculates the values.
왘 Press the reset knob (컄 page 22) for
NEXT DUE DATE menu. You cannot call up the service display or
about five seconds.
the service menu during this time.
The SERVICE MENU appears in the multi-
function display.
왘 Select the SPECIAL WORK menu with the
+ or - button.
왘 Select the MONTH and YEAR with the
+ or - button.
278
Operation
Maintenance
Calling up the service data information Calling up the service item menu The service indicator now displays the
ITEMS menu.
왘 Switch ignition on.
FSS PLUS shows the service type (letters
A-H) in the multifunction display approxi- The standard display of the control sys-
mately one month before the service ap- tem appears (컄 page 121).
pointment is due in miles (distance 왘 Press button k or j on the mul-
criterion) or in days (time criterion). tifunction steering wheel until the
This service type is based on the service FSS PLUS indicator appears in the mul-
items to be carried out. The service items tifunction display.
are described in the Service Booklet. i
왘 Press the reset knob (컄 page 22) for The service items to be carried out are
The service items to be carried out under about five seconds.
the corresponding service type can be dis- shown in this menu.
played in the multifunction display. The SERVICE MENU appears in the multi- Please refer to the Service Booklet for
function display (컄 page 121). a description of each service item.
왘 Select the ITEMS menu with the +
or - button. 왘 Press button è on the multifunction
왘 Press the ÿ button. steering wheel until the standard
display appears in the multifunction
display.
279
Operation
Vehicle care
Vehicle care
Cleaning and care of vehicle To avoid paint damage, you should imme- You should check your vehicle from time to
diately remove: time for stone chipping or other damage.
Any damage should be repaired as soon as
앫 Grease and oil
Warning! G possible to prevent the start of corrosion.
앫 Fuel
In doing so, do not neglect the underside of
Many cleaning products can be hazardous.
앫 Coolant the vehicle. A prerequisite for a thorough
Some are poisonous, others are flammable.
앫 Brake fluid check is a washing of the undercarriage
Always follow the instructions on the partic-
followed by a thorough inspection. Dam-
ular container. Always open your vehicle’s 앫 Insects aged areas need to be reundercoated.
doors or windows when cleaning the inside.
앫 Tree resins etc.
Never use fluids or solvents that are not de- Your vehicle has been treated at the facto-
signed for cleaning your vehicle. Frequent washing reduces and/or elimi- ry with a wax-base rustproofing in the body
nates the aggressiveness and potency of cavities which will last for the lifetime of
the above adverse influences. the vehicle. Post-production treatment is
In operation, your vehicle is subjected to neither necessary nor recommended by
varying external influences which, if gone More frequent washings are necessary to
Mercedes-Benz because of the possibility
unchecked, can attack the paintwork as deal with unfavorable conditions, for ex-
of incompatibility between materials used
well as the undercarriage and cause last- ample:
in the production process and others ap-
ing damage. 앫 Near the ocean plied later.
Such damage is caused not only by ex- 앫 In industrial areas (smoke, exhaust We have selected car-care products and
treme and varying climatic conditions, but emissions) compiled recommendations which are
also by: specially matched to our vehicles and
앫 During winter operation
앫 Air pollution which always reflect the latest technology.
You can obtain Mercedes-Benz approved
앫 Road salt
car-care products at your authorized
앫 Tar, gravel and stone chipping Mercedes-Benz Center.
280
Operation
Vehicle care
Scratches, corrosive deposits, corrosion or i Tar stains

damage due to negligent or incorrect care Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO*: Quickly remove tar stains before they dry
cannot always be removed or repaired with If a door handle is hit by a strong jet of and become more difficult to remove. A tar
the car-care products recommended here. water, and a SmartKey with KEY- remover is recommended.
In such cases it is best to seek aid at your LESS-GO* is in close proximity, i.e.
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. within approx. 3 ft. (approx. 1 m), the Paintwork, painted body components
The following topics deal with the cleaning vehicle could be inadvertently locked
Mercedes-Benz approved Paint Care
and care of your vehicle and give important or unlocked.
should be applied when water drops on the
"how-to" information as well as references
paint surface do not"bead up", normally in
to Mercedes-Benz approved car-care prod- ! 3 to 5 months, depending on climate and
ucts. Never use a round nozzle to power washing detergent used.
Additional information can be found in the wash tires. The intense jet of water can
Mercedes-Benz approved Paint Cleaner
booklet entitled "Vehicle Care Guide". result in damage to the tire.
should be applied if the paint surface
Always replace a damaged tire. shows signs of embedded dirt (i.e. loss of
Power washer gloss).
Always keep the jet of water moving
When using a power washer for cleaning across the surface. Do not aim directly Do not apply any of these products or wax
the vehicle always observe the manufac- at electrical parts, electrical connec- if your vehicle is parked in the sun or if the
turer’s operating instructions. tors, seals, or other rubber parts. hood is still hot.
Use the appropriate MB-Touch-Up Stick
for quick and provisional repairs of minor
paint damage (i.e. chips from stones, vehi-
cle doors, etc.).
281
Operation
Vehicle care
Engine cleaning Rinse with clear water and thoroughly wipe Ornamental moldings
dry with a chamois. Do not allow cleaning
Prior to cleaning the engine compartment, For regular cleaning and care of very dirty
agents to dry on the finish.
make sure to protect electrical compo- chrome-plated parts, use a chrome clean-
nents and connectors from contact with Due to the width of the vehicle, fold in outer.
water and cleaning agents. side mirrors prior to running the vehicle
through an automatic car wash to prevent Headlamps, tail lamps, turn signal
Corrosion protection, such as MB Anticor-
damage to the mirrors. lenses
rosion Wax should be applied to the engine
compartment after every engine cleaning. In the winter, thoroughly remove all traces Use a mild car wash detergent, such as
Before applying, all control linkage bush- of road salt as soon as possible. Mercedes-Benz approved Car Shampoo,
ings and joints should be lubricated. The When washing the undercarriage, do not with plenty of water.
poly-V-belt and all pulleys should be pro- forget to clean the inner sides of the To prevent scratches, never apply strong
tected from any wax. wheels. force and use only a soft, non-scratchy
cloth when cleaning the lenses. Do not at-
Vehicle washing i tempt to wipe dirty lenses with a dry cloth
Do not use hot water or wash your vehicle Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO*: or sponge.
in direct sunlight. Use only a mild car wash If a door handle is hit by a strong jet of
detergent, such as Mercedes-Benz ap- water, and a SmartKey with KEY-
proved Car Shampoo. LESS-GO* is in close proximity, i.e.
within approx. 3 ft. (approx. 1 m), the
Thoroughly spray the vehicle with a dif-
vehicle could be inadvertently locked
fused jet of water. Direct only a very weak
or unlocked.
spray towards the ventilation intake. Use
plenty of water and rinse the sponge and
chamois frequently.
282
Operation
Vehicle care
Wiper blades Window cleaning Cleaning the Distronic* system sensor

cover
Clean the wiper blade inserts with a clean Use a window cleaning solution on all glass
cloth and detergent solution. surfaces. An automotive glass cleaner is
recommended.
i
For safety reasons, switch off wipers i
and remove key from starter switch be- For safety reasons, switch off wipers
fore cleaning the wiper blades. Other- and remove key from starter switch be-
wise the wiper motor can suddenly turn fore cleaning the windshield. Other-
on and cause injury. wise the wiper motor can suddenly turn
on and cause injury.
!
1 Distronic system sensor cover
Fold the windshield wiper arms away !
from the windshield in a vertical posi- Fold the windshield wiper arms away Use a mild car wash detergent, such as
tion only. They could otherwise dam- from the windshield in a vertical posi- Mercedes-Benz approved Car Shampoo,
age the hood (컄 page 337). tion only. They could otherwise dam- with plenty of water to clean sensor
age the hood (컄 page 337). cover 1.
Fold the windshield wiper arms back
onto the windshield before turning the Fold the windshield wiper arms back
key in the starter switch. onto the windshield before turning the
key in the starter switch.
283
Operation
Vehicle care
To prevent scratches, never apply strong Cleaning the Parktronic* system Light alloy wheels
force and use only a soft, non-scratchy sensors
Mercedes-Benz approved Wheel Care
cloth when cleaning the sensor cover. Do
should be used for regular cleaning of the
not attempt to wipe dirty sensors with a
light alloy wheels.
dry cloth or sponge.
If possible, clean wheels once a week with
i Mercedes-Benz approved Wheel Care, us-
Restart the engine after cleaning sen- ing a soft bristle brush and a strong spray
sor cover 1. of water.
Follow the instructions on the container.
i
1 Parktronic* sensors Use only acid-free cleaning materials.
Use a mild car wash detergent, such as Acid could lead to corrosion.
Mercedes-Benz approved Car Shampoo
with plenty of water.
When using a steam cleaner or power
washer, aim nozzle only briefly from a min-
imum distance of 4 in. (10 cm) at
sensors 1.
To prevent scratches, never apply strong
force and use only a soft, non-scratchy
cloth when cleaning the sensor. Do not at-
tempt to wipe dirty sensors with a dry cloth
or sponge.
284
Operation
Vehicle care
Instrument cluster Headliner and shelf below rear window Leather upholstery
Use a gentle dishwashing detergent or Clean with a soft bristle brush, or use a Using aftermarket seat covers or wearing
mild detergent for delicate fabrics as a dry-shampoo cleaner in case of excessive clothing that have the tendency to give off
washing solution. Wipe with a cloth moist- dirt. coloring (e.g. when wet, etc.) may cause
ened in a lukewarm solution. Do not use the upholstery to become permanently dis-
scouring agents. Seat belts colored. By lining the seats with a proper
intermediate cover, contact-discoloration
The webbing must not be treated with
Steering wheel and gear selector lever will be prevented.
chemical cleaning agents. Use only clear,
Wipe with a damp cloth and dry thoroughly lukewarm water and soap. Do not dry the Wipe leather upholstery with a damp cloth
or clean with Mercedes-Benz approved webbing at temperatures above 176°F and dry thoroughly or clean with
Leather Care. (80°C) or in direct sunlight. Mercedes-Benz approved Leather Care.
Exercise particular care when cleaning per-
Cup holder
Warning! G forated leather as its underside should not
become wet.
Use a gentle dishwashing detergent or
mild detergent for delicate fabrics as a Do not bleach or dye seat belts as this may
washing solution. Wipe with a cloth moist- severely weaken them. In a crash they may MB Tex upholstery
ened in lukewarm solution. Do not use not be able to provide adequate protection. Pour Mercedes-Benz approved Interior
scouring agents. Care onto a soft, lint-free cloth and apply
with light pressure.
Hard plastic trim items
Plastic and rubber parts
Pour Mercedes-Benz approved Interior
Care onto a soft, lint-free cloth and apply Do not use oil or wax on these parts.
with light pressure.
285
286
Practical hints
What to do if …
Where will I find ...?
Unlocking/locking in an emergency
Opening/closing in an emergency
Replacing bulbs
Replacing wiper blades
Flat tire
Batteries
Jump starting
Towing the vehicle
Fuses
287
Practical hints
What to do if …
What to do if …
Lamps in instrument cluster General information: turning the SmartKey in the starter switch
If a bulb in the instrument cluster fails to to position 2, have it checked and replaced
light up during the bulb self-check when if necessary.
Problem Possible cause Suggested solution

v The yellow ESP warning lamp The ESP is deactivated. Risk of accident! 왘 Turn the ESP back on (컄 page 77).
lights up while driving. Adapt your speed and driving to the prevail-
If the ESP cannot be turned back on, have
ing road conditions.
the system checked at an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as possi-
ble.
v The yellow ESP warning lamp The ESP or traction control has come into op- 왘 When driving off, apply as little throt-
flashes while driving. eration because of detected traction loss in tle as possible.
at least one tire. Distronic* is deactivated.
왘 While driving, ease up on the acceler-
DISTRONIC* is switched off. ator.
왘 Adapt your speed and driving to the
prevailing road and weather condi-
tions.
왘 Do not deactivate the ESP.
Exceptions: (컄 page 77).
Failure to follow these instructions in-
creases the risk of accidents.
288
Practical hints
What to do if …

- The yellow ABS malfunction indi- The ABS has detected a malfunction and has 왘 Continue driving with added caution.
cator lamp comes on while driv- switched off. The BAS and the ESP are also Wheels will lock during hard braking,
ing. switched off (see messages in display). reducing steering capability.
The SBC brake system is still functioning nor- 왘 Have the system checked at an autho-
mally but without the ABS available. rized Mercedes-Benz Center as soon
as possible.
creases the risk of accidents.
l The red DTR indicator lamp lights You are too close to the vehicle in front of you 왘 Apply the brakes immediately to in-
up while driving. to maintain selected speed. crease the following distance.
l The red DTR indicator lamp 앫 You are gaining too rapidly on the vehicle 왘 Apply the brakes immediately.
comes on while driving and you ahead of you.
hear a warning sound. 왘 Carefully observe the traffic situation.
앫 The distance warning system has recog-
nized a stationary obstacle on your prob- You may need to brake or maneuver
able line of travel. to avoid hitting an obstacle.
289
Practical hints
What to do if …

1 The red SRS indicator lamp lights There is a malfunction in the restraint sys- 왘 Drive with added caution to the near-
up while driving. tems. The airbags or emergency tensioning est authorized Mercedes-Benz Cen-
devices (ETDs) could deploy unexpectedly or ter.
fail to activate in an accident.
Warning! G
In the event a malfunction of the SRS is indi-
cated as outlined above, the SRS may not be
operational. For your safety, we strongly
recommend that you visit an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center immediately to have
the system checked; otherwise the SRS may
not be activated when needed in an acci-
dent, which could result in serious or fatal
injury, or it might deploy unexpectedly and
unnecessarily which could also result in inju-
ry.
290
Practical hints
What to do if …

3 (Canada only)
; (USA only)
The red brake warning lamp You are driving with the parking brake set. 왘 Release the parking brake.
lights up while driving and you
or
hear a warning sound.
There is a malfunction in the SBC brake sys- 왘 Read and observe the message in the
tem. display.
The red brake warning lamp There is insufficient brake fluid in the reser- 왘 Risk of accident! Carefully stop the
lights up while driving. voir. vehicle and notify an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center. Do not add
brake fluid! This will not solve the
problem.
!
Warning! G Don’t add brake fluid before checking the
brake system. Overfilling the brake fluid res- If you find that the brake fluid in the
ervoir can result in spilling brake fluid on hot brake fluid reservoir has fallen to the
Driving with the last message displayed can
engine parts and the brake fluid catching minimum mark or below, have the
result in an accident. Have your brake sys-
fire. You can be seriously burned. brake system checked for brake pad
tem checked immediately if the brake warn-
thickness and leaks.
ing lamp stays on.
291
Practical hints
What to do if …

D The red coolant warning lamp There is insufficient coolant in the reservoir. 왘 Immediately add coolant to prevent
lights up when the engine is run- engine from overheating
ning. (컄 page 264).
If this warning lamp lights up frequently, 왘 Have the cooling system checked.
there is a leak in the cooling system.
If the coolant level is correct, the electric ra- 왘 If the coolant temperature is below
diator fan may be broken. 257°F (125°C), you can continue
driving to the nearest authorized
왘 Avoid high engine loads (e.g. driving
uphill) and stop-and-go driving.
D The red coolant warning lamp The coolant temperature has exceeded 왘 Stop as soon as possible and allow
lights up while driving and you 257°F (125°C). the engine and coolant to cool down.
hear a warning sound.
Warning! G catch fire. You could be seriously burned. Turn off the engine, get out of the vehicle
Steam from an overheated engine can cause
Driving when your engine is badly overheat- serious burns and can occur just by opening cools down.
ed can cause some fluids which may have the engine hood. Stay away from the engine
leaked into the engine compartment to if you see or hear steam coming from it.
292
Practical hints
What to do if …

? The yellow "CHECK ENGINE" There is a malfunction in: 왘 Have the vehicle checked as soon as
malfunction indicator lamp possible by an authorized
앫 The fuel injection system
comes on while driving. Mercedes-Benz Center.
앫 The ignition system An on-board diagnostic connector is
앫 The exhaust system used by the service station to link the
vehicle to the shop diagnostics sys-
앫 The fuel system tem. It allows the accurate identifica-
Such malfunctions may result in excessive tion of system malfunctions through
emissions values and may switch the engine the readout of diagnostic trouble
to its limp-home (emergency operation) codes. It is located in the front left
mode. area of the footwell next to the park-
ing brake.
Your gas tank is empty. 왘 After refuelling, start the engine three
or four times in succession.
The limp-home mode is canceled. You do
not need to have your vehicle checked.
< The red seat belt warning lamp The warning lamp reminds you to fasten seat 왘 Fasten your seat belt.
blinks for a brief period after belts.
starting the engine.
W The yellow fuel tank reserve The fuel level has gone below the reserve 왘 Refuel at the next gas station
warning lamp lights up while mark. (컄 page 259).
driving.
Gas cap not closed tight. 왘 Close gas cap
293
Practical hints
What to do if …
Lamp in center console

TM
PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF A BabySmart child seat is installed on the
The indicator lamp lights up. front passenger seat. Therefore, the front
passenger airbag is switched off.
The system is malfunctioning when there is 왘 Have the system checked as soon as
no BabySmartTM child seat installed on the possible by an authorized
front passenger seat. Mercedes-Benz Center.
PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF The system is malfunctioning. 왘 Make sure that there is nothing be-
tween seat cushion and child seat and
The indicator lamp does not light up with a
check installation of the child seat.
BabySmartTM child seat properly installed
on the front passenger seat. 왘 If the light remains out, have the sys-
tem checked as soon as possible by
an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
Do not use the BabySmartTM restraint
to transport children on the front pas-
senger seat until the system has been
repaired.
294
Practical hints
What to do if …
Messages in the display i

Warning! G Turning the key in the starter switch to
The control system shows warning and
position 2, or pressing the KEY-
malfunction messages in the multifunction All messages contain important information
LESS-GO* start/stop button twice to
display. which should be taken note of and, where a
position 2 causes all lamps as well as
malfunction is indicated, addressed as soon
Certain warning and malfunction messag- the multifunction display to come on.
as possible at an authorized Mercedes-Benz
es are accompanied by an audible signal. Ensure that they are all in working or-
Center.
Address these messages accordingly and der before starting your journey.
Failure to repair condition noted may cause
follow the additional instructions given in damage not covered by the Mercedes-Benz
this Operator’s Manual. On the pages that follow, you will find a
Limited Warranty, or result in property dam-
compilation of all the messages that may
Selecting the malfunction memory menu in age or personal injury.
appear in the display.
the control system (컄 page 121) displays
both cleared and uncleared messages.
High-priority messages appear in the mul- Warning! G
tifunction display with a red background.
No messages will be displayed if either the
instrument cluster or the multifunction dis-
play is inoperative.
Contact your nearest authorized
295
Practical hints
What to do if …
Display Possible cause Suggested solution

ABS defective! The ABS has detected a malfunction and 왘 Continue driving with added caution.
Visit workshop! has switched off. The ESP and the BAS are Wheels will lock during hard braking,
also deactivated. The SBC brake system is reducing steering capability.
still functioning normally but without the
왘 Have the system checked at an au-
ABS available.
thorized Mercedes-Benz Center as
soon as possible.
creases the risk of accident.
Display defective The ABS or the ABS display is malfunction- 왘 Continue driving with added caution.
Visit workshop! ing. 왘 Visit an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as
possible.
296
Practical hints
What to do if …

ABS Braking system The charging voltage has fallen below 왘 When the voltage is above this value
not working! 10 volts and the ABS has switched off. again, the ABS is operational again.
The brake system is still functioning nor- 왘 Continue driving with added caution.
mally but without the ABS available. Wheels will lock during hard braking,
reducing steering capability.
왘 Have the system checked at an au-
thorized Mercedes-Benz Center as
soon as possible.
BAS defective! The BAS has detected a malfunction and 왘 Continue driving with added caution.
Visit workshop! switched off. The SBC brake system is still
왘 Visit an authorized Mercedes-Benz
functioning normally but without the BAS
Center as soon as possible.
available.
BAS Display malfunction The BAS or the BAS display is malfunction- 왘 Continue driving with added caution.
Visit workshop! ing.
297
Practical hints
What to do if …

BAS not available! The charging voltage has fallen below 왘 When the voltage is above this value
See operator’s manual 10 volts and the BAS has switched off. again, the BAS is operational again.
The brake system is still functioning nor- 왘 Have the system checked at an au-
mally but without the BAS available. thorized Mercedes-Benz Center if
you see the warning message for a
longer period of time.
ESP Malfunction! The ESP is deactivated because of a mal- 왘 With the vehicle stationary, turn the
Visit workshop! function or interrupted power supply. The steering wheel completely to the left
SBC brake system is still functioning nor- and then to the right to synchronize
mally. The ABS may still be operational. the ESP.
If the ESP message does not go out:
왘 Continue driving with added caution.
왘 Visit an authorized
possible.
298
Practical hints
What to do if …

ESP Display defective The BAS or the BAS display is malfunction- 왘 Continue driving with added caution.
Visit workshop! ing.
ESP not available! The ESP is deactivated because of a mal- 왘 With the vehicle stationary, turn the
See operator‘s manual function or interrupted power supply. The steering wheel completely to the left
SBC brake system is still functioning nor- and then to the right to synchronize
mally. The ABS may still be operational. the ESP.
If the ESP message does not go out:
왘 Continue driving with added caution.
왘 Visit an authorized
possible.
: Engine oil level There is no oil in the engine. There is a dan- 왘 Carefully bring the vehicle to a halt
Stop, engine off! ger of engine damage. as soon as possible.
왘 Turn off the engine.
왘 Add engine oil.
299
Practical hints
What to do if …

: Engine oil level The engine oil level is too low. 왘 Check the engine oil level
Check level! (컄 page 262) and add oil as required.
: Engine oil level You have added too much engine oil. There 왘 Have oil siphoned. Observe all legal
Reduce oil level! is a risk of damaging the engine or the cat- requirements with respect to its dis-
alytic converter. posal.
Engine oil The engine oil has dropped to a critical lev- 왘 Check the engine oil level
Visit workshop! el. (컄 page 262) and add oil as required.
왘 If you must add engine oil frequently,
have the engine checked for possible
leaks.
There is water in the oil. 왘 Have the oil checked.
Engine oil level The measuring system is malfunctioning. 왘 Have the measuring system checked
Visit workshop! by an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center.
Distronic External interference The Distronic* is switched off and is tem- 왘 Try activating the Distronic* again
Reactivate! porarily unavailable. later.
Clean sensor! The Distronic* is switched off because the 왘 Clean the Distronic* cover in the ra-
see oper. Manual Distronic* cover in the radiator grille is diator grille (컄 page 283).
dirty. 왘 Restart the vehicle.
Visit workshop! The Distronic* is malfunctioning or the dis- 왘 Visit an authorized Mercedes-Benz
play is malfunctioning. Center as soon as possible.
300
Practical hints
What to do if …

P Gear selector lever in P You have turned off the engine with the 왘 Place the selector lever in position P.
KEYLESS-GO* start/stop button* and
opened the driver’s door.
Cruise control Visit workshop! Cruise control or Distronic* is malfunction- 왘 Have the cruise control or Distronic*
ing. checked by an authorized
1 Restraint system The system is malfunctioning. 왘 Drive with added caution to the near-
malfunction est authorized Mercedes-Benz Cen-
Visit workshop! ter.
@ Vehicle rising! Your vehicle is adjusting to your level selec-
tion.
Level selec. canceled The "Raised" level setting is canceled at ve- 왘 Reactivate the "Raised" level setting.
hicle speeds of over 75 mph (120 km/h).
Warning! G SRS may not be activated when needed in

an accident, which could result in serious or
In the event a malfunction of the SRS is indi- fatal injury, or it might deploy unexpectedly
cated as outlined above, the SRS may not be and unnecessarily which could also result in
operational. For your safety, we strongly injury.
recommend that you visit an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center immediately to have
the system checked; otherwise the
301
Practical hints
What to do if …

@ Stop, car too low! The car level control is malfunctioning. Avoid excessive steering input. The fend-
er or tires could otherwise be damaged.
Listen for scraping noises.
Do not drive faster than 50 mph
(80 km/h).
왘 Drive to the side of the road and se-
lect a higher vehicle level. Depending
on the type of malfunction, this may
raise the vehicle’s level.
There is otherwise danger of an acci-
dent.
Visit workshop! The system is functional only to a limited 왘 Do not drive faster than 50 mph
extent. (80 km/h).
The system display or the system is mal- 왘 Have the vehicle checked at an au-
functioning. thorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
( Backrest, The rear seat backrest is not engaged. 왘 Adjust the rear seat backrest until it
rear right is fully engaged in position.
not locked
( Backrest, The rear seat backrest is not engaged. 왘 Adjust the rear seat backrest until it
rear left is fully engaged in position.
not locked
302
Practical hints
What to do if …

G Display defective The instrument cluster display is malfunc- 왘 Continue driving with added caution.
tioning.
G Display defective The displays for several systems have mal- 왘 Have the electronic systems
Visit workshop! functioned. Some systems themselves may checked by an authorized
also have malfunctioned. Mercedes-Benz Center.
L Visit workshop! One or more main functions of the Tele Aid 왘 Have the Tele Aid system checked by
system are malfunctioning. an authorized Mercedes-Benz Cen-
ter.
# Malfunction The consumer battery has insufficient volt- The electrical consumers will come back
Electrical consumers age and can no longer supply the conve- online as soon as on-board voltage is
switched off nience functions such as seat ventilation*. sufficient.
# Battery/Alternator The battery is malfunctioning. 왘 Stop the vehicle as soon as it is safe
Stop vehicle! to do so. Adjust driving to be consis-
The SBC brake system requires electrical
tent with reduced braking respon-
energy and therefore has only limited oper-
siveness.
ation. Considerably greater brake pedal
force is required and the stopping distance 왘 Notify an authorized Mercedes-Benz
is increased. Center.
# Undervoltage The battery has insufficient voltage. 왘 Start the engine (컄 page 43).
Charge battery
303
Practical hints
What to do if …

# Undervoltage The battery has insufficient voltage. 왘 Turn off unnecessary electrical con-
Switch off sumers.
consumers
– Battery/Alternator The battery was charged with a battery 왘 Have the battery checked at a ser-
Visit workshop! charger or jump started. vice station.
The battery is no longer charging. Possible 왘 Stop immediately and check the
causes: poly-V-belt.
앫 Alternator malfunctioning If it is broken:
앫 Broken poly-V-belt 왘 Do not continue to drive. Notify
an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Do not forget that the brake system re-
Center.
quires electrical energy and may be operat-
ing with restricted capability. Considerably If it is in order:
greater brake pedal force is required and
왘 Drive immediately to the nearest
the stopping distance is increased.
authorized Mercedes-Benz Cen-
ter. Adjust driving to be consis-
tent with reduced braking
responsiveness.
304
Practical hints
What to do if …

2 Brake wear The brake pads have reached their wear 왘 Brake pad thickness must be visually
Visit workshop! limit. inspected at the intervals specified in
the Service Booklet.
왘 Have the brake pads replaced as
soon as possible.
T Brake malfunction The SBC brake system is in the limp-home 왘 Do not drive any further.
Stop vehicle (emergency operation) mode. Consider-
왘 Significantly greater force must be
ably greater brake pedal force is required
applied to the brake pedal.
and the stopping distance is increased.
왘 Call for roadside assistance.
Do not exceed a speed of 55 mph
(90 km/h).
Except Canada: Reduced braking effect The battery has insufficient voltage and 왘 Start the engine.
; Start engine! cannot supply sufficient power to the SBC
The message disappears when suffi-
Canada only: brake system.
Increased braking dis- cient voltage is available
3 tance
Start engine!
305
Practical hints
What to do if …

Except Canada: Reduced braking effect The SBC brake system is in the limp-home 왘 Continue driving with added caution.
; Visit workshop! (emergency operation) mode. Consider-
왘 Adjust driving to be consistent with
Canada only: able brake pedal force is required and the
Increased braking dis- reduced braking responsiveness.
3 tance
stopping distance is increased.
Visit workshop!
Brake fluid There is insufficient brake fluid in the reser- 왘 Risk of accident! Stop the vehicle
Visit workshop! voir. and notify an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center. Do not add
brake fluid! This will not solve the
problem.
Except Canada: Service brake There are malfunctions, but the SBC brake 왘 Visit an authorized Mercedes-Benz
; Visit workshop! system is operating normally. Center as soon as possible.
Canada only:
3
306
Practical hints
What to do if …

Except Canada: Brakes overheated! The brake system is overheated due to an 왘 Relieve the load on the brake sys-
; Drive carefully! excessive load on the brakes. tem.
Canada only:
왘 Drive more smoothly and think
3 ahead to avoid unnecessary braking.
왘 When driving down slopes, shift into
a lower gear to use the engine’s brak-
ing power (컄 page 153).
왘 Cautiously continue driving so that
the air stream will cool down the
brakes.
Warning! G recommended towing methods and the ve-

hicle requires towing with all four wheels on
brake pedal pressure and depress the pedal
much further than normal to obtain braking
Driving while these messages are displayed the ground. Towing the vehicle with all four effect. If necessary, apply full pressure to
can result in an accident. Have your brake wheels on the ground is only permissible for the brake pedal. Brakes are only applied to
system checked immediately. distances up to 30 miles (50 km) and at a the front wheels. Stopping distance is in-
speed not to exceed 30 mph (50 km/h). For creased!
If there is a malfunction in the SBC brake more information, refer to "Towing the vehi-
system, we recommend that the vehicle be Low brake fluid in the reservoir may cause
cle" (컄 page 348). the braking system to fail!
transported with all wheels off the ground
using flatbed or appropriate wheel lift/dolly If the SBC brake system enters its Don’t add brake fluid before checking the
equipment. A tow bar must be used if cir- limp-home (emergency operation) mode, brake system. Overfilling the brake fluid
cumstances do not permit the use of the the driver must apply significantly greater
307
Practical hints
What to do if …
reservoir can result in spilling brake fluid on

hot engine parts and the brake fluid catch-
ing fire. You can be seriously burned.
i
If you find that the brake fluid in the
brake fluid reservoir has fallen to the
minimum mark or below, have the
brake system checked for brake pad
thickness and leaks.
!
Brake pad thickness must be visually
inspected at the intervals specified in
the Service Booklet.
308
Practical hints
What to do if …

F Key The batteries in the KEYLESS-GO* 왘 Change the batteries (컄 page 328).
Check battery! key are discharged.
Key The KEYLESS-GO* key is not recog- 왘 Stop the vehicle as soon as it is safe to do
not recognized! nized while the engine is running be- so.
cause
왘 Search for the card or continue to operate
앫 the card is not in the vehicle the vehicle with the key.
앫 there is strong radio-frequency Otherwise the vehicle cannot be centrally
interference locked nor can the engine be started again
after the engine is stopped.
The KEYLESS-GO* key is momen- 왘 Change the position of the card in the vehi-
tarily not recognized. cle.
왘 Operate the vehicle with the key if neces-
sary.
ì Function This display appears if button ì
Not available! or í on the multifunction steer-
ing wheel is pressed and the vehicle
is not equipped with a telephone.
309
Practical hints
What to do if …

F Key recognized A KEYLESS-GO* key left in the vehi- 왘 Take the key out of the vehicle.
in vehicle! cle was recognized while locking the
vehicle from the outside.
Key The KEYLESS-GO* system is mal- 왘 Visit an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center
Visit workshop! functioning. as soon as possible.
Key This display appears (for a maximum 왘 Insert key in the starter switch.
do not forget key of 60 seconds) if the driver’s door is
opened with the engine shut off and
no key in the starter switch.
This message is only a reminder.
_ Entry position Seat, mirrors and steering wheel 왘 Wait until the seat, mirrors and steering
Do not drive! have not yet moved to their preset wheel have moved to their driving positions.
driving positions.
The message disappears.
Except Canada: Release park. brake! You are driving with the parking 왘 Release the parking brake (컄 page 45).
; brake set.
Canada only:
!
< Visit workshop! The seat belt system is malfunction- 왘 Visit an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center
ing. as soon as possible.
Ê Trunk open! This message will appear whenever 왘 Close the trunk lid.
the trunk lid is open.
310
Practical hints
What to do if …

W Washer fluid The fluid level has dropped to about 왘 Add washer fluid (컄 page 267).
1
Check level /3 of total reservoir capacity.
B Coolant The coolant level is too low. 왘 Add coolant (컄 page 264).
Check level
왘 If you have to add coolant frequently, have
the cooling system checked by an autho-
Ï Coolant The cooling fan for the coolant is 왘 Observe the coolant temperature display.
Visit workshop! malfunctioning.
왘 Have the fan replaced as soon as possible.
! Do not drive without sufficient amount

Warning! G Do not ignore the low engine coolant of coolant in the cooling system. The
level warning. Extended driving with engine will overheat causing major en-
Do not spill antifreeze on hot engine parts.
the message and symbol displayed gine damage.
Antifreeze contains ethylene glycol which
may cause serious engine damage not
may burn if it comes into contact with hot
engine parts. You can be seriously burned.
Warranty.
311
Practical hints
What to do if …

Ï Coolant The coolant is too hot. 왘 Stop the vehicle.
Stop, engine off!
왘 Only start the engine again after the mes-
sage disappears. You could otherwise dam-
age the engine.
왘 Stop immediately and check the
The poly-V-belt could be broken. poly-V-belt.
왘 If it is broken, do not drive any further.
Notify an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center.
If it is in order, drive immediately to the
nearest authorized Mercedes-Benz Cen-
ter.
Warning! G catch fire. You could be seriously burned.

Steam from an overheated engine can cause
cools down. The engine should not be oper-
Driving when your engine is badly overheat- serious burns and can occur just by opening ated with the coolant temperature above
ed can cause some fluids which may have the engine hood. Stay away from the engine 266°F (130°C). Doing so may cause serious
leaked into the engine compartment to if you see or hear steam coming from it. engine damage which is not covered by the
Turn off the engine, get out of the vehicle Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
312
Practical hints
What to do if …

A Reserve fuel The fuel level has dropped below the 왘 Refuel at the next gas station (컄 page 259).
reserve mark.
Y Hood open! You are driving with the hood open. 왘 Close the hood (컄 page 261).
I Remove key! You have forgotten to remove the 왘 Remove the key from the starter switch.
key.
Replace key There is no additional code available 왘 Visit an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center
for SmartKey or SmartKey with as soon as possible.
KEYLESS-GO*.
. Lamp sensor The lamp sensor is malfunctioning. 왘 In the control system, set lamp operation to
Visit workshop! The headlamps switch on automati- manual mode (컄 page 130).
cally.
왘 Switch on headlamps using the exterior
lamp switch.
Low beam, left The left low beam lamp is malfunc- 왘 Visit an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center
tioning. as soon as possible.
Low beam, right The right low beam lamp is malfunc- 왘 Visit an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center
tioning. as soon as possible.
313
Practical hints
What to do if …

. Display defective The display for the lamps or the system 왘 Visit an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Visit workshop! is malfunctioning. Center as soon as possible.
Turn signal, rear left The left rear turn signal lamp is malfunc- 왘 Replace the bulb as soon as possi-
Substitute lamp on! tioning. A backup bulb is being used. ble.
Turn signal, rear right The right rear turn signal lamp is mal- 왘 Replace the bulb as soon as possi-
Substitute lamp on! functioning. A backup bulb is being ble.
used.
Turn sig. left mirror The left turn signal in the side mirror is 왘 Have the LEDs replaced as soon as
malfunctioning. This message will only possible.
appear if all light emitting diodes have
stopped working.
Marker light, The front left side marker lamp is mal- 왘 Replace the bulb as soon as possi-
front left functioning. ble.
Marker light The front right side marker lamp is mal- 왘 Replace the bulb as soon as possi-
front right functioning. ble.
Re, left marker lamp The rear left side marker lamp is mal- 왘 Replace the bulb as soon as possi-
functioning. ble.
Re, right marker lamp The rear right side marker lamp is mal- 왘 Replace the bulb as soon as possi-
functioning. ble.
314
Practical hints
What to do if …

. Turn sig. right mirror The right turn signal in the side mir- 왘 Have the LEDs replaced as soon as possi-
ror is malfunctioning. This message ble.
will only appear if all light emitting
diodes have stopped working.
Turn sig. front left The left front turn signal lamp is mal- 왘 Replace the bulb as soon as possible.
Back-up light on! functioning. A backup bulb is being
used.
Turn sig. front right The right front turn signal lamp is 왘 Replace the bulb as soon as possible.
Back-up light on! malfunctioning. A backup bulb is be-
ing used.
Brake light Stop lamp illumination is delayed or 왘 Visit an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center
Visit workshop! lamp is permanently on. as soon as possible.
Turn off lamps! Lamps have been turned on al- 왘 Visit an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center
though the key in the starter switch as soon as possible.
is in position 0.
Brake light, left The left brake lamp is malfunction- 왘 Visit an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center
ing. A backup bulb is being used. as soon as possible.
Brake light, right The right brake lamp is malfunction- 왘 Visit an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center
ing. A backup bulb is being used. as soon as possible.
315
Practical hints
What to do if …

. 3rd stop lamp The high mounted brake lamp is mal- 왘 Visit an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center
functioning. as soon as possible.
High beam, left The left high beam lamp is malfunc- 왘 Replace the bulb as soon as possible.
tioning.
High beam, right The right high beam lamp is malfunc- 왘 Replace the bulb as soon as possible.
tioning.
License plate lamp, The left license plate lamp is mal- 왘 Replace the bulb as soon as possible.
left functioning.
License plate lamp, The right license plate lamp is mal- 왘 Replace the bulb as soon as possible.
right functioning.
Front foglight, left The left front fog lamp is malfunc- 왘 Replace the bulb as soon as possible.
tioning.
Front foglight, right The right front fog lamp is malfunc- 왘 Replace the bulb as soon as possible.
tioning.
Rear foglight The rear fog lamp is malfunctioning. 왘 Replace the bulb as soon as possible.
A backup bulb is being used.
Back-up lamp, left The left backup lamp is malfunction- 왘 Replace the bulb as soon as possible.
ing.
316
Practical hints
What to do if …

. Back-up lamp, right The right backup lamp is malfunc- 왘 Replace the bulb as soon as possible.
tioning.
Tail light, left The left tail lamp is malfunctioning. A 왘 Visit an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center
backup bulb is being used. as soon as possible.
Tail light, right The right tail lamp is malfunctioning. 왘 Visit an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center
A backup bulb is being used. as soon as possible.
Park. light, The left parking lamps are malfunc- 왘 Visit an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center
front left tioning. A backup bulb is being used. as soon as possible.
Back-up light on!
Park. light, The right parking lamps are malfunc- 왘 Visit an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center
front right tioning. A backup bulb is being used. as soon as possible.
Back-up light on!
< Seat belt system The seat belt system is malfunction- 왘 Visit an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center
Visit workshop! ing. as soon as possible.
317
Practical hints
What to do if …

< Front passenger seat The display reminds you and your pas- 왘 Fasten the seat belts.
belt sengers to fasten seat belts.
Please fasten belt!
Driver‘s seat belt The display reminds you and your pas- 왘 Fasten the seat belts.
Fasten seat belt! sengers to fasten seat belts.
_ Steering oil The steering gear oil level is too low. 왘 Have the system checked by an autho-
Visit workshop! There is a danger of steering gear dam- rized Mercedes-Benz Center.
age.
Warning! G Do not add steering oil without checking the

steering system.
If the level of steering gear oil in reservoir is Do not drive the vehicle. Have the system
too low, the steering power assistance could checked at your authorized Mercedes-Benz
fail. Much greater effort will then be needed Center as soon as possible.
to turn the steering wheel.
318
Practical hints
What to do if …
Display Possible cause Possible solution

H Tire pressure monitor- The tire pressure is being checked.
ing activated
Tire pressure monitor- The tire inflation pressure monitor* is de- 왘 Activate the tire inflation pressure moni-
ing Reactivate activated. tor* (컄 page 271).
Tire pressure monitor- The tire inflation pressure monitor* is un- 왘 Check the tire pressure at the next ser-
ing currently inactive able to monitor the tire pressure due to vice station.
앫 the presence of several wheel sensors
in the vehicle.
앫 excessive wheel sensor temperatures.
앫 a nearby radio interference source.
앫 unrecognized wheel sensors mounted.
Warning! G You may lose control of the vehicle. Contin-

ued driving with a flat tire will cause exces-
Do not drive with a flat tire. A flat tire affects sive heat build-up and possibly a fire.
the ability to steer or brake the vehicle.
319
Practical hints
What to do if …

H Tire pressure monitor- The tire inflation pressure monitor is mal- 왘 Have the tire inflation pressure monitor
ing functioning. checked by an authorized
Visit workshop!
A wheel without proper sensor was in- Mercedes-Benz Center.
stalled. 왘 Change the wheel.
Tire pressure, rear left The left rear tire is rapidly deflating. 왘 Carefully bring the vehicle to a halt,
Caution tire defect! avoiding abrupt steering and braking ma-
neuvers.
왘 Change the wheel (컄 page 338).
Tire pressure, rear left The left rear tire pressure is low. 왘 Carefully bring the vehicle to a halt.
Check tires!
왘 Check the tire pressure.
Warning! G Continued driving with a flat tire will cause

excessive heat build-up and possibly a fire.
Do not drive with a flat tire. A flat tire affects
the ability to steer or brake the vehicle. You
may lose control of the vehicle.
320
Practical hints
What to do if …

H Tire pressure, rear The right rear tire is rapidly deflating. 왘 Carefully bring the vehicle to a halt,
right avoiding abrubt steering and braking ma-
Caution tire defect! neuvers.
Tire pressure, rear The right rear tire pressure is low. 왘 Carefully bring the vehicle to a halt.
right
Check tires!
Tire pressure, front The left front tire is rapidly deflating. 왘 Carefully bring the vehicle to a halt,
left avoiding abrupt steering and braking ma-
Warning! G may lose control of the vehicle. Continued

driving with a flat tire will cause excessive
Do not drive with a flat tire. A flat tire affects heat build-up and possibly a fire.
the ability to steer or brake the vehicle. You
321
Practical hints
What to do if …

H Tire pressure, front The right rear tire pressure is low. 왘 Carefully bring the vehicle to a halt.
left
Check tires!
Tire pressure, front The right front tire is rapidly deflating. 왘 Carefully bring the vehicle to a halt,
right avoiding abrubt steering and braking ma-
Tire pressure, front The right front tire pressure is low. 왘 Carefully bring the vehicle to a halt.
right
Check tires!
Warning! G You may lose control of the vehicle. Contin-

ued driving with a flat tire will cause exces-
Do not drive with a flat tire. A flat tire affects sive heat build-up and possibly a fire.
the ability to steer or brake the vehicle.
322
Practical hints
What to do if …

I Remove key! You have forgotten to remove the key. 왘 Remove the key from the starter switch.
Replace key The batteries in the key are dead. 왘 Change the batteries (컄 page 328).
Automat. light on 왘 Remove the key from the starter switch.
Remove key!
A Reserve fuel The fuel level has dropped below the re- 왘 Refuel at the next filling station
serve mark. (컄 page 259).
J Door open You are attempting to drive with one or 왘 Close the doors.
more doors open.
? Visit workshop! There may be a malfunction in the: 왘 Have the measuring system checked by
앫 fuel injection system
앫 ignition system
앫 exhaust system
앫 fuel system
± Display defective Certain electronic systems are unable to 왘 Have the electronic systems checked by
Visit workshop! relay information to the control system. an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
The following systems may have failed:
앫 Coolant temperature display
앫 Tachometer
앫 Cruise control display
323
Practical hints
First aid kit Spare wheel Removing the spare wheel
왘 Turn luggage bowl counterclockwise.
The first aid kit is in the storage compart- The spare wheel is located under the trunk
ment at the front edge of the front passen- floor. 왘 Remove spare wheel 2.
ger seat.
왘 Lift the trunk floor and engage the han-
Storing the spare wheel
dle in the upper edge of trunk.
왘 Place spare wheel 2 in wheel well.
왘 Remove the luggage box (컄 page 325).
왘 Turn luggage bowl clockwise to its stop
to secure the spare wheel.
!
Always lower trunk floor before closing
trunk lid.
왘 Pull tab 1 upward.

왘 Fold the covering forward.
왘 Remove the first aid kit. 1 Toolkit
Wheel bolt wrench
i Jack
Check expiration dates and contents 2 Spare wheel
for completeness at least once a year
and replace missing/expired items.
324
Practical hints
Minispare wheel More information can be found in the Install luggage box
"Technical data" section (컄 page 362).
Warning! G Luggage box
The dimensions of the Minispare* wheel are
different from those of the road wheels. As Remove luggage box
a result, the vehicle handling characteristics
change when driving with a Minispare*
wheel mounted.
The spare wheel should only be used tempo-
rarily, and replaced with a regular road 왘 Insert luggage box into trunk so that
wheel as quick as possible. fastening clips are in line with fastening
bolts.
In the case of a flat tire, you may tempo-
왘 Push front edge of luggage box in direc-
rarily use the Minispare* wheel when ob-
tion of arrow under cover of trunk sill.
serving the following restrictions:
1 Fastening clip 왘 Press fastening clips onto fastening
앫 Do not exceed a vehicle speed of 2 Luggage box bolts until they lock into place.
50 mph (80km/h).
왘 Turn fastening clips 1 to the left up-
앫 Drive to the nearest tire repair facility wards from fastening bolts.
to have the flat tire repaired or re-
왘 Lift luggage box in the area of the fas-
placed as appropriate.
tening bolts and remove it from trunk.
앫 Do not operate vehicle with more than
one spare wheel mounted.
325
Practical hints
Vehicle tool kit
The vehicle tool kit is located in the storage

tray on top of the spare wheel
(컄 page 324).
The following is included:
앫 Vehicle tool kit
앫 Towing eye bolt
앫 Wheel wrench
앫 Alignment bolt
앫 Vehicle jack
앫 Special fuse extractor
앫 Spare fuses
326
Practical hints
Unlocking the vehicle 왘 Move locking tab 1 in the direction of i
the arrow and slide mechanical key 2 Unlocking your vehicle with the me-
In case of a malfunction in the central lock- out of the housing. chanical key will trigger the anti-theft
ing system, you can unlock the trunk sepa-
alarm system. To cancel the alarm, do
rately (컄 page 88).
one of the following:
Unlocking the driver’s door 앫 Press button Œ or ‹ on the
SmartKey.
If you are unable to unlock the driver’s
door using the SmartKey, open the door 앫 Insert the key in the starter switch.
using the mechanical key.
3 Unlocking
4 Locking
왘 Unlock the door with the mechanical
key. To do so, push the mechanical key
in the lock until it stops and turn it to
the left 4.
1 Mechanical key locking tab

2 Mechanical key
327
Practical hints
Unlocking the trunk Locking the vehicle Changing batteries

The trunk can no longer be locked with the
If you are unable to lock the vehicle with If the batteries in the SmartKey are dis-
key.
the SmartKey, lock it with the mechanical charged, the vehicle can no longer be
Lock and unlock the trunk with the me- key as follows: locked or unlocked. It is recommended to
chanical key as follows: have the batteries replaced at an autho-
왘 Close the passenger doors and the
trunk.
왘 Press the central locking switch in the
cockpit (컄 page 100). Warning! G
왘 Check to see whether the locking Keep the batteries out of reach of children.
knobs on the passenger doors are still
If a battery is swallowed, seek medical help
visible. If necessary, push them down
immediately.
manually.
왘 Lock the driver’s door with the me- Batteries contain materials that can harm
Trunk lid lock chanical key (컄 page 327). the environment if disposed of improperly.
1 Unlocking 왘 Check if the trunk is locked. If neces- Recycling of batteries is the preferred
2 Locking sary lock the trunk with the mechanical method of disposal. Many states require
key (컄 page 98). sellers of batteries to accept old batteries
왘 Insert the mechanical key in the trunk for recycling.
lid lock.
왘 Turn the key to the left in position 1
and hold it in this position.
왘 Pull on the trunk lid handle and lift the
trunk lid.
328
Practical hints
i 왘 Remove mechanical key 1 왘 Remove the batteries.

When changing batteries, always re- (컄 page 327).
왘 Using a lint-free cloth, insert new bat-
place both batteries. 왘 Insert the mechanical key in the side teries under the contact spring with the
The required replacement batteries are opening and push the gray slide. plus (+) side facing up.
available at any authorized Battery compartment 2 is unlatched. 왘 Return battery compartment into hous-
Mercedes-Benz Center. ing until it locks into place.
왘 Pull battery compartment 2 out of the
key housing in direction of arrow.
SmartKey/SmartKey with KEY- Fuel filler flap emergency release
LESS-GO*
3 Battery
4 Contact spring 1 Release knob
1 Mechanical key
2 Battery compartment 왘 Remove right-side tail trim.
Replacement batteries: Lithium, type 왘 Turn release knob 1 clockwise (arrow).
CR 2025 or equivalent. The fuel filler flap can know be opened.
329
Practical hints
Manually unlocking the transmission 왘 Open the storage compartment in the i

selector lever center console (컄 page 229). The selector lever is locked again when
왘 Take out the cup holder*. moving it to position P.
In the case of power failure, the transmis-
sion selector lever can be manually un- Using two fingers in the horizontal slot
locked, e.g. to tow the vehicle. at the upper rear side of the cup holder,
lift cup holder upwards to remove.
왘 Hold the cover at a 45° angle.
왘 Insert a suitable object 1 (e.g. a pin)
through the hole and press the pin
downward.
왘 Remove pin 1.
1 Pin
The selector lever can be manually un-
locked from position P in the event of an
electrical failure, e.g. to tow the vehicle.
330
Practical hints
Sliding/pop-up roof* or panorama The sliding/pop-up roof must be resyn-
sliding/pop-up roof* chronized after being operated manually
(컄 page 189).
You can open or close the sliding/pop-up
roof manually should an electrical malfunc-
tion occur.
The sliding/pop-up roof drive is located
behind lens 1 of the interior overhead
light.
i
Do not disconnect the electrical con-
nectors.
왘 Obtain crank 2.
왘 Insert crank 2 through hole 1.
왘 Turn crank 2 clockwise to:
1 Screen 앫 Slide roof closed
왘 Fold screen 1 down. 앫 Raise roof at the rear
왘 Turn crank 2 counterclockwise to:
앫 slide roof open
앫 lower roof at the rear
331
Practical hints
Replacing bulbs
Replacing bulbs
Safe vehicle operation depends on proper Bulbs Front lamps
exterior lighting and signaling. It is there-
fore essential that all bulbs and lamp as- Lamp Type
semblies are in good working order at all 1 Additional turn sig- LED
times. nal lamps
Correct headlamp adjustment is extremely 2 Turn signal lamp 1156 NA
important. Have headlamps checked and
3 Side marker lamp W5W
readjusted at regular intervals and when a
bulb has been replaced. See your autho- 4 Low beam H7 (55 W)
rized Mercedes-Benz Center for headlamp Bi-Xenon*1
adjustment. D2S-35 W
5 High beam H7 (55 W)
i
Parking and stand- W5W
Backup bulbs will be brought into use
ing lamps
when the following lamps malfunction:
6 Fog lamp HB4/9006
앫 Standing lamps
(55 W)
1
앫 Tail lamps Vehicles with Bi-Xenon headlamps*: Low beam
and high beam use the same D2S-35W lamp. For
safety reasons (high voltage), do not replace the
Bi-Xenon bulb yourself. See your authorized Mer-
cedes-Benz Center.
332
Practical hints
Replacing bulbs
Rear lamps Notes on bulb replacement 앫 Use only 12-volt bulbs of the same type
and with the specified watt rating.
Lamp Type
Warning! G 앫 Switch lights off before changing a bulb
7 High mounted brake LED to prevent short circuits.
lamp Keep bulbs out of reach of children.
앫 Always use a clean lint-free cloth when
8 Tail, parking and HiP Bulbs and bulb sockets can be very hot. Al- handling bulbs.
standing lamp low the lamp to cool down before changing
앫 Your hands should be dry and free of oil
9 License plate lamps C 5 W a bulb.
and grease.
Halogen lamps contain pressurized gas. A
앫 If the newly installed bulb does not light
bulb can explode if you:
up, visit an authorized Mercedes-Benz
앫 touch or move it when hot Center.
앫 drop the bulb
앫 Have the LEDs and bulbs for the follow-
앫 scratch the bulb ing lamps replaced by an authorized
Wear eye and hand protection. Mercedes-Benz Center:
Because of high voltage in Bi-Xenon lamps, 앫 Additional turn signal lamps in the
it is dangerous to replace the bulb or repair exterior rear view mirrors
the lamp and its components. We recom-
앫 High mounted brake lamp
mend that you have such work done by a
qualified technician. 앫 Bi-Xenon lamps
앫 Front fog lamps
333
Practical hints
Replacing bulbs
Replacing bulbs for front lamps 왘 Turn the locking mechanism counter- 왘 Switch off the lights.
clockwise and take out the high beam
왘 Open the hood (컄 page 261).
bulb 2.
왘 Press the clamp and remove headlamp
왘 Insert the new high beam bulb so that
cover.
the base is in the recess of the holder.
왘 Pull electrical connector off.
왘 Turn the locking mechanism clockwise.
왘 Turn the locking mechanism counter-
왘 Plug the connector onto the high beam
clockwise and take out the high beam
bulb.
bulb 2.
왘 Align headlamp cover and click into
왘 Insert the new high beam bulb so that
place.
the base is in the recess of the holder.
1 Bulb socket for turn signal lamp
2 High beam bulb High beam bulb (Bi-Xenon* headlamps 왘 Turn the locking mechanism clockwise.
3 Bulb socket for parking and standing only) 왘 Plug the connector onto the high beam
lamp bulb.
High beam bulb (Halogen headlamps

Warning! G 왘 Align headlamp cover and click into
only) place.
Because of high voltage in Bi-Xenon lamps,
왘 Switch off the lights. it is dangerous to replace the bulb or repair
the lamp and its components. We recom-
왘 Open the hood (컄 page 261).
mend that you have such work done by a
왘 Press the clamp and remove headlamp qualified technician.
cover.
왘 Pull electrical connector off.
334
Practical hints
Replacing bulbs
Front turn signal lamp bulb Parking and standing lamp bulb Side marker lamp bulb
왘 Switch off the lights. 왘 Switch off the lights.
왘 Open the hood (컄 page 261). 왘 Open the hood (컄 page 261).
왘 Twist bulb socket 1 counterclockwise 왘 Press the clamp and remove headlamp
and pull out. cover.
왘 Push bulb into socket, turn counter- 왘 Pull out the bulb socket 3 with the
clockwise and remove. bulb.
왘 Insert new bulb in socket, push in and 왘 Pull the bulb out of the bulb socket.
twist clockwise. 왘 Insert a new bulb in the socket.
왘 Switch off the lights.
왘 Reinsert bulb socket in lamp and twist
왘 Reinstall the bulb socket.
clockwise. 왘 Carefully slide lamp towards front.
왘 Align headlamp cover and click into
왘 Remove rear end first.
place.
왘 Twist bulb socket counterclockwise
and pull out.
왘 Pull bulb out of the bulb socket.
왘 Insert new bulb in socket.
왘 Reinstall bulb socket, push in and twist
clockwise.
왘 To reinstall lamp, set rear end in
bumper and let front end snap into
place.
335
Practical hints
Replacing bulbs
! License plate lamp

To prevent scratches, we recommend
that you have the sidemarker bulb re-
placed by an authorized Mer-
cedes-Benz Center.
Replacing bulbs for rear lamps
Tail lamp assemblies

The tail lamps are equipped with HiP bulbs.
1 Screw
Warning! G 왘 Switch off the lights.

왘 Loosen both screws 1 and remove
The bulbs in the tail lamps cannot be re- lamp.
placed individually. The tail lamp bulbs are
왘 Replace the tubular lamp and reinstall
under pressure and could explode during an
attempt to replace them. lamp.
If the tail lamps are malfunctioning, have 왘 Retighten the screws.

them exchanged at an authorized Mer-
cedes-Benz Center.
336
Practical hints
Replacing wiper blades You should hear it snap into place. Installation
왘 Turn the wiper blade at a right angle to 왘 Slide wiper blade onto wiper arm until
! wiper arm. it locks in place.
To avoid damage to the hood, the wiper
왘 Rotate wiper blade into position paral-
arms should only be folded forward
lel to wiper arm.
when in the vertical position.
왘 Fold wiper arm back so that blade rests
Removal on windshield.
왘 Turn key in starter switch to position 1. !

왘 Turn combination switch to wiper Never open the hood when the wiper
setting II (컄 page 47). arm is folded forward.
왘 With wiper arm in the vertical position Do not allow the wiper arms to contact
(see above), turn key in starter switch 왘 Slide the wiper blade sideways out of the windshield glass without a wiper
to position 0. the retainer. blade inserted.
For your convenience, we recommend
Warning! G that you have this work carried out by
For safety reasons, remove key from starter
switch before replacing a wiper blade, other-
wise the motor could suddenly turn on and
cause injury.
왘 Fold the wiper arm forward.
337
Practical hints
Flat tire
Flat tire
Preparing the vehicle Mounting the spare wheel When changing wheel on a hill:
왘 Place chocks on the downhill side
왘 Park the vehicle as far as possible from
Preparing the vehicle blocking both wheels of the other axle.
moving traffic on a hard surface.
Prepare the vehicle as described under 왘 Take the two-piece wheel wrench and
왘 Turn on the hazard warning flashers.
"Preparing the vehicle" on this page. the jack out of the trunk (컄 page 326).
왘 Engage the steering wheel lock in the Assemble wheel wrench.
왘 Take the spare wheel out of the trunk
straight-ahead position and set the
(컄 page 324).
parking brake.
Warning! G
왘 Move the selector lever to P. Lifting the vehicle
왘 Have any passenger exit the vehicle at The jack is designed exclusively for jacking
왘 Prevent the vehicle from rolling away
a safe distance from the roadway. up the vehicle at the jack take-up brackets
by blocking wheels with wheel chocks
built into either side of the vehicle. To help
(not included) or other sizable objects.
avoid personal injury, use the jack only to lift
When changing wheel on a level surface: the vehicle during a wheel change. Never
왘 Place one chock in front of and one be- get beneath the vehicle while it is supported
hind the wheel that is diagonally oppo- by the jack. Keep hands and feet away from
site to the wheel being changed. the area under the lifted vehicle. Always
firmly set parking brake and block wheels
before raising vehicle with jack.
Do not disengage parking brake while the
vehicle is raised. Be certain that the jack is
338
Practical hints
Flat tire
always vertical (plumb line) when in use, es-

pecially on hills. Always try to use the jack
on level surface. Be sure that the jack arm is
fully seated in the jack take-up bracket. Al-
ways lower the vehicle onto sufficient ca-
pacity jackstands before working under the
vehicle.
1 Jack take-up bracket Make sure that the foot of the jack is di-
2 Jack rectly under the take-up bracket so that it
3 Crank is always vertical (plumb-line) as seen from
왘 Position jack 2 on firm ground under the side, even if the vehicle is parked on an
the respective jack take-up bracket 1. incline
왘 Turn crank 3 until the tire is a maxi-
mum of 1.2 in (3 cm) off the ground.
Never start engine while vehicle is
왘 On wheel to be changed, loosen but do raised.
not yet remove the wheel bolts (ap-
proximately one full turn with wrench).
The jack take-up brackets are located di-
rectly behind the front wheel housing and
in front of the rear wheel housing.
339
Practical hints
Flat tire
Removing the wheel Mounting the Minispare wheel

Warning! G 왘 Clean contact surfaces of wheel and
Position the jack only on the jack take-up wheel hub.
brackets designed for this purpose. 왘 Guide the spare wheel onto the align-
If the jack is not properly positioned, the ve- ment bolt and push it on.
hicle may slip off of the jack.
왘 Insert wheel bolts and tighten them
slightly.
Warning! G !
To avoid paint damage, place wheel flat
The jack is intended only for lifting the vehi- 1 Alignment bolt against hub and hold it there while in-
cle briefly for wheel changes. It is not suited stalling first wheel bolt.
for performing maintenance work under the 왘 Unscrew the upper-most wheel bolt
vehicle. Never lie down under the raised ve- and remove.
hicle. Do not start the engine when the vehi- 왘 Replace this wheel bolt with alignment
cle is raised. bolt 1 supplied in the tool kit.
왘 Remove the remaining bolts.
!
Do not place wheel bolts in sand or dirt.
This could result in damage to the bolt
and wheel hub threads.
왘 Remove the wheel.
340
Practical hints
Flat tire
Warning! G Warning! G Warning! G

Always replace wheel bolts that are dam- Use only genuine equipment The dimensions of the Minispare* wheel are
aged or rusted. Mercedes-Benz wheel bolts. They are identi- different from those of the road wheels. As
Never apply oil or grease to wheel bolts. fied by the Mercedes star. Other wheel bolts a result, the vehicle handling characteristics
may come loose. change when driving with a Minispare*
Damaged wheel hub threads should be re- wheel mounted.
paired immediately. Do not continue to drive Do not tighten the wheel bolts when the ve-
under these circumstances! Contact an au- hicle is raised. Otherwise the vehicle could The spare wheel should only be used tempo-
thorized Mercedes-Benz Center or call tip over. rarily, and replaced with a regular road
Roadside Assistance. wheel as quick as possible.
Incorrect mounting bolts or improperly

tightened mounting bolts can cause the In the case of a flat tire, you may tempo-
wheel to come off. This could cause an acci- rarily use the Minispare* wheel when ob-
dent. Be sure to use the correct mounting serving the following restrictions:
bolts. 앫 Do not exceed a vehicle speed of
50 mph (80km/h).
앫 Drive to the nearest tire repair facility
to have the flat tire repaired or re-
placed as appropriate.
왘 Unscrew the alignment bolt, install last 앫 Do not operate vehicle with more than
wheel bolt and tighten slightly. one spare wheel mounted.
341
Practical hints
Flat tire
Lowering the vehicle

왘 Lower vehicle by turning crank coun-
Warning! G
terclockwise until vehicle is resting ful- Have the tightening torque checked after
ly on its own weight. changing a wheel. The wheels could come
왘 Remove the jack. loose if they are not tightened to a torque of
96 ft lb (130 Nm).
왘 Before storing the jack in the trunk, it

should be fully collapsed.
i
Wrap the faulty wheel in the protective
film that comes with the spare wheel
and put the wheel in the trunk.
You can also place the faulty wheel
1-5 Wheel bolts
down into the spare wheel well. In this
왘 Tighten the five wheel bolts evenly, fol- case, you must stow the holder from
lowing the diagonal sequence illustrat- the spare wheel well in the trunk.
ed (1 to 5), until all bolts are tight.
Do not activate the tire inflation pres-
Observe a tightening torque of 96 ft lb
sure monitor until the depressurized
(130 Nm).
tire is no longer in the vehicle.
342
Practical hints
Batteries
Batteries
Your vehicle is equipped with two batter- The main battery is in the trunk under the
ies: luggage box. Remove the luggage box Warning! G
(컄 page 325).
앫 Auxiliary battery (back-up battery; en- Failure to follow these instructions can re-
ables vehicle to shut down electrical sult in severe injury or death.
systems in a controlled manner should
the main battery fail; auxiliary battery is Never lean over batteries while connecting,
located in the engine compartment) you might get injured.
Battery fluid contains sulfuric acid. Do not
앫 The main battery (battery for starter
allow this fluid to come in contact with eyes,
and electrical consumers; located in
skin or clothing. In case it does, immediately
the trunk).
flush affected area with water and seek
medical help if necessary.
Main battery in trunk A battery will also produce hydrogen gas,

which is flammable and explosive. Keep
1 Negative terminal flames or sparks away from battery, avoid
2 Positive terminal improper connection of jumper cables,
smoking etc.
Warning! G
Jump starting must only be done using the
main battery in the trunk.
343
Practical hints
Batteries
! 왘 Remove cover 2 from the positive ter-

Never loosen or detach battery termi- Warning! G minal.
nal clamps while the engine is running 왘 Disconnect the battery positive lead.
With a disconnected battery
or the key is in the starter switch. Oth-
erwise the alternator and other elec- 앫 the brake boosting effect is not avail- Removing the battery
tronic components could be severely able.
damaged. You need more power to brake and 왘 Remove the screw-nuts securing the
brake pedal travel is increased. If neces-
Have the battery checked regularly by battery.
sary, you must depress the brake pedal
an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. with full power. 왘 Remove the battery bracket.
Contact your authorized 앫 you can no longer turn the ignition key 왘 Take out the battery.
Mercedes-Benz Center for further infor- or, in cars with KEYLESS-GO*, pressing
mation. the KEY-LESS-GO button* on the gear Charging and reinstalling the battery
selector lever has no effect.
앫 the gear selector lever is locked in 왘 Charge battery in accordance with the
Warning! G position P. instructions of the battery charger
manufacturer.
Do not place metal objects on the battery as
Disconnecting the battery 왘 Reinstall the charged battery. Follow
this could result in a short circuit.
the previously described steps in re-
Use leak-proof battery only to avoid the risk 왘 Depress the parking brake firmly or verse order.
of acid burns in the event of an accident. move the gear selector lever to
position P.
왘 Open the trunk (컄 page 261).
왘 Disconnect battery negative lead 1.
344
Practical hints
Batteries
i Batteries contain materials that can harm

Warning! G The following procedures must be car- the environment if disposed of improperly.
ried out following any interruption of Large 12-volt storage batteries contain
Never charge a battery while still installed in lead. Recycling of batteries is the preferred
battery power (e.g. due to reconnec-
the vehicle. Gases may escape during charg- method of disposal. Many states require
tion):
ing and cause explosions that may result in sellers of batteries to accept old batteries
paint damage, corrosion or personal injury. 앫 Set the clock (컄 page 136) (vehi- for recycling.
cles with COMAND*: see COMAND
Reconnecting the batteries operator’s manual).
앫 Resynchronize the front seat head
왘 Turn off all electrical consumers. restraints (컄 page 104).
왘 Connect the positive lead and fasten its 앫 Resynchronize the ESP
cover. (컄 page 75).
왘 Connect the negative lead. 앫 Re-enter the radio code (see radio
operating instructions).
!
NEVER invert the terminal connections! 앫 Resynchronize the side windows
(컄 page 186).
The battery, its filler caps and the vent
tube must always be securely installed 앫 Resynchronize the sliding/pop-up
when the vehicle is in operation. roof* (컄 page 189).
345
Practical hints
Jump starting
Jump starting
If the battery is discharged, the engine can !
Warning! G be started with jumper cables and the bat- Jump starting may only be performed
tery of another vehicle. Observe the follow- on the main battery installed in the
Failure to follow these directions will cause ing: trunk.
damage to the electronic components, and
앫 Jump starting should only be performed Avoid repeated and lengthy starting at-
can lead to a battery explosion and severe
injury or death. when the engine and catalytic convert- tempts.
er are cold.
Never lean over batteries while connecting Do not attempt to start the engine us-
or jump starting, you might get injured. 앫 Do not start the engine if the battery is ing a battery quick charge unit.
frozen. Let the battery thaw out first.
Battery fluid contains sulfuric acid. Do not If the engine does not run after several
allow this fluid to come in contact with eyes, 앫 Only jump start from batteries with the unsuccessful starting attempts, have it
skin or clothing. In case it does, immediately same voltage rating. checked at the nearest authorized
flush affected area with water, and seek 앫 Use only jumper cables with sufficient Mercedes-Benz Center.
medical help if necessary. cross-section, insulated terminal Excessive unburned fuel generated by
A battery will also produce hydrogen gas, clamps and polarity reversal protec- repeated failed starting attempts may
which is flammable and very explosive. Keep tion. damage the catalytic converter.
flames or sparks away from battery, avoid
improper connection of jumper cables, i Make sure the jumper cables do not
smoking etc. Jumper cables with polarity reversal have loose or missing insulation.
protection are available at any autho- Make sure the cable clamps do not
Read all instructions before proceeding.
rized Mercedes-Benz Center. touch any other metal part while the
other end is still attached to a battery.
346
Practical hints
Jump starting
왘 Start the engine of the disabled vehi-

Warning! G cle.
Keep flames or sparks away from battery. i

Do not smoke. The message Malfunction - electric
Observe all safety instructions and precau- consumers switched off may appear
tions when handling automotive batteries in the instrument cluster. It will disap-
(컄 page 266). pear as soon as the battery is suffi-
ciently charged.
The battery is located in the trunk on the
1 Positive terminal of charged battery Now you can again turn on the electrical
right hand side underneath the luggage
2 Positive terminal of discharged battery consumers. Do not turn on the lights under
box (컄 page 325). Only jump start the ve-
3 Vehicle ground any circumstances.
hicle from the battery in the trunk.
4 Negative terminal of charged battery
왘 Remove the jumper cables first from
왘 Make sure that the two vehicles do not
왘 Connect positive terminals 1 and 2 of vehicle ground 3 and negative
touch.
the batteries with the jumper cables. terminal 4 and then from positive
왘 Turn off all electrical consumers. Clamp cable to charged battery 1 first. terminals 1 and 2.
왘 Apply parking brake. 왘 Start engine of the vehicle with the 왘 Have the battery checked at the next
왘 Shift selector lever to position P. charged battery and run at idle speed. authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
왘 Connect negative terminal 4 of the
!
charged battery and vehicle ground 3
(lock ring of the trunk lid lock) in the Vehicles with automatic transmission:
trunk with the jumper cable. Clamp ca- Do not tow-start the vehicle.
ble to charged battery 4 first.
347
Practical hints
Towing the vehicle
Towing the vehicle
Towing the vehicle to have the vehicle moved to a safe loca- !
tion where the recommended towing To be certain to avoid a possibility of
Mercedes-Benz recommends that the vehi- methods can be employed. damage to the transmission, however,
cle be transported with all wheels off the we recommend the drive shaft be dis-
ground using flatbed or appropriate wheel !
connected at the rear axle drive flange
lift/dolly equipment. If the vehicle is towed with the front
for any towing beyond a short tow to a
axle raised, the engine must be shut off
! nearby garage.
(key in starter switch position 0 or 1).
Use flatbed or wheel lift/dolly equip- Otherwise, the ESP will immediately be
ment with key in starter switch turned engaged and will apply the rear wheel
to position 0. brakes.
Do not tow with sling-type equipment. When towing the vehicle with all wheels
Towing with sling-type equipment over on the ground, the selector lever must
bumpy roads will damage radiator and be in position N and the key must be in
supports. starter switch position 2. When towing
To prevent damage during transport, the vehicle with all wheels on the
do not tie down vehicle by its chassis or ground, the vehicle may be towed only
suspension parts. for distances up to 30 miles (50 km)
and at a speed not to exceed 30 mph
Switch off the tow-away alarm and the (50 km/h).
automatic central locking
When circumstances do not permit the

recommended towing methods, the vehi-
cle may be towed with all wheels on the
ground or front wheels raised only so far as
348
Practical hints
Towing the vehicle
i
Warning! G To signal turns while being towed with
Warning! G
the hazard warning flasher in use, turn
If circumstances require towing the vehicle The brake system requires electrical power
key in starter switch to position 2 and
with all wheels on the ground, always tow to operate.
activate the combination switch for the
with a tow bar if: A malfunction in the vehicle’s power supply
left or right turn signal in the usual
앫 the engine will not run manner – only the selected turn signal or electrical system may impair brake sys-
앫 there is a malfunction in the SBC brake will operate. tem operation and switch it into its
system limp-home (emergency operation) mode. To
Upon canceling the turn signal, the haz- brake, the driver must then apply signifi-
앫 there is a malfunction in the power sup- ard warning flasher will operate again.
ply or in the vehicle’s electrical system cantly greater brake pedal pressure and de-
press the pedal much further to obtain the
as that will be necessary to adequately con-
expected braking effect. If necessary, apply
trol the towed vehicle.
full pressure to the brake pedal. Brakes are
Prior to towing the vehicle with all wheels on only applied to the front wheels. Stopping
the ground, make certain that the key is in distance is increased! Adapt your driving
starter switch position 2. style accordingly. SBC brake system
If the key is left in the starter switch (컄 page 77).
position 0 for an extended period of time, it With the engine not running, there is no
can no longer be turned in the switch. In this power assistance for the steering system. In
case, the steering is locked. To unlock, re- this case, it is important to keep in mind that
move key from starter switch and reinsert. a considerably higher degree of effort is nec-
essary to steer the vehicle. Adapt your driv-
ing accordingly.
349
Practical hints
Towing the vehicle
! i To remove cover:
When towing the vehicle with all wheels The selector lever will remain locked in 왘 Press mark on cover in direction of ar-
on the ground, please note the follow- position P and the key will not turn in row.
ing: the starter switch if the battery is dis-
왘 Lift cover off to reveal threaded hole for
With the automatic central locking acti- connected or discharged. See notes on
towing eye bolt.
vated and the key in starter switch the battery (컄 page 343) or on jump
starting (컄 page 346). The towing eye bolt is supplied with the
position 2, or KEYLESS-GO* start/stop
tool kit (located in the storage compart-
button (if so equipped) in position 2,
Installing towing eye bolt ment under the trunk floor).
the vehicle doors lock if the left front
wheel as well as the right rear wheel 왘 Screw towing eye bolt in to its stop and
are turning at vehicle speeds of approx. Front of vehicle tighten with lug wrench.
9 mph (15 km/h) or more. To reinstall cover:
To prevent the vehicle door locks from 왘 Fit cover and snap into place.
locking, deactivate the automatic cen-
tral locking (컄 page 99).
Towing of the vehicle should only be
done using the properly installed tow-
ing eye bolt. Never attach tow cable,
tow rope or tow rod to the vehicle chas-
sis, frame or suspension parts.
1 Cover on right side of front bumper
350
Practical hints
Towing the vehicle
Rear of vehicle The towing eye bolt is supplied with the

tool kit (located in the storage compart-
ment under the trunk floor).
왘 Screw towing eye bolt in to its stop and
tighten with lug wrench.
To reinstall cover:
왘 Fit cover and snap into place.
2 Cover on right side of rear bumper

To remove cover:
왘 Pull cover in the direction of the arrow.
왘 Fold cover down to reveal threaded
hole for the towing eye bolt.
351
Practical hints
Fuses
Fuses
i Fuse box in passenger compartment Opening
Only install fuses that have been tested 왘 Pull cover 1 open with a screwdriver or
and approved by Mercedes-Benz and similar tool.
that have the specified amperage rat-
왘 Remove cover 1 rearward.
ing.
Never attempt to repair or bridge a Closing
blown fuse. Have the cause determined
왘 Attach cover 1 in the front.
and remedied by an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center. 왘 Fold cover 1 in until it engages.
1 Cover
352
Practical hints
Fuses
Fuse chart i
The fuse chart is found in the fuse box in Only install fuses that have been tested
the passenger compartment. The amper- and approved by Mercedes-Benz and
ages of the fuses are also given there. that have the specified amperage rat-
ing.
Spare fuses Never attempt to repair or bridge a
Spare fuses are found in the vehicle tool kit blown fuse. Have the cause determined
in the trunk. and remedied by an authorized
2 An additional fuse box is located on the Fuse extractor
left-hand side of trunk. The fuse extractor is found in the vehicle
tool kit in the trunk.
353
354
Technical data
Spare parts service
Warranty coverage
Identification labels
Layout of poly-V-belt drive
Engine
Rims and tires
Electrical system
Main dimensions
Weights
Fuels, coolants, lubricants etc.
Consumer information
355
Technical data
Spare parts service
Spare parts service
The "Technical data" section provides the All authorized Mercedes-Benz Centers !
necessary technical data for your vehicle. maintain a stock of original spare parts re- The use of non-genuine parts and ac-
quired for maintenance and repair work. In cessories not authorized by
addition, strategically located parts distri- Mercedes-Benz could damage the vehi-
bution centers provide quick and reliable cle, which is not covered by the
parts service. Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty, or
More than 300 000 different spare parts could compromise the vehicle’s dura-
for Mercedes-Benz models are available. bility or safety.
Mercedes-Benz original spare parts are
subjected to stringent quality inspections.
Each part has been specifically developed,
manufactured or selected for and adapted
to Mercedes-Benz vehicles.
Therefore, Mercedes-Benz original spare
parts should be installed.
356
Technical data
Warranty coverage
Warranty coverage
Your vehicle is covered under the terms of Replacement parts and accessories are Loss of Service and Warranty
the warranties printed in the Service and covered by the Mercedes-Benz Spare Parts Information Booklet
Warranty Information Booklet. Your and Accessories Warranties, copies of
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center will ex- which are available at any authorized Mer- Should you lose your Service and Warranty
change or repair any defective parts origi- cedes-Benz Center. Information Booklet, have your authorized
nally installed on the vehicle in accordance Mercedes-Benz Center arrange for a re-
with the terms of the following warranties: placement. It will be mailed to you.
앫 New Car Limited Warranty
앫 Emission System Warranty
앫 Emission Performance Warranty
앫 California, Maine, Massachusetts, and
Vermont Emission Control System
Warranty
357
Technical data
1 Certification label 2 Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) 3 Information label, California version
Vacuum line routing for emission con-
trol system
4 Engine number (engraved on engine)
5 Emission control label
When ordering spare parts, please specify
vehicle identification and engine numbers.
358
Technical data
E 320/E 500
1 Automatic belt tensioner

2 Power steering pump
3 Air conditioner compressor
4 Crankshaft
5 Coolant pump
6 Generator (alternator)
7 Idler pulley
359
Technical data
Engine
Engine
Model E 320 (211.0651) E 500 (211.0701)
Engine 112 113
Mode of operation 4-stroke engine, gasoline injection 4-stroke engine, gasoline injection
No. of cylinders 6 8
Bore 3.54 in (89.90 mm) 3.82 in (97.00 mm)
Stroke 3.31 in (84.00 mm) 3.31 in (84.00 mm)
3
Total piston displacement 195.2 cu.in. (3199 cm ) 302.9 cu.in. (4966 cm3)
Compression ratio 10:1 10:1
Output acc. to SAE J 1349 221 hp/5700 rpm 302 hp/5600 rpm
(165 kW/5700 rpm) (225 kW/5600 rpm)
Maximum torque acc. to SAE J 1349 232 ft.lb/3000 rpm 339 ft.lb/2700 rpm
(315 Nm/3000 rpm) (460 Nm/2700 rpm)
Maximum engine speed 6000 rpm 6000 rpm
Firing order 1-4-3-6-2-5 1-5-4-2-6-3-7-8
Poly-V-belt 7 ft 10 in (2390 mm) 7 ft 10 in (2390 mm)
1
The quoted data apply only to the standard vehicle. See an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center for the corresponding data of all special bodies and special equipment.
360
Technical data
Rims and tires
Rims and tires
Use only tires and rims which have been ! i
specifically developed for your vehicle and Moreover, tires and rims not approved Further information on tires and rims is
tested and approved by Mercedes-Benz. by Mercedes-Benz may under load ex- available at any authorized
Other tires and rims can have detrimental hibit dimensional variations and differ- Mercedes-Benz Center. A tire inflation
effects, such as: ent tire deformation characteristics pressure table is located on the fuel fill-
앫 Poor handling characteristics that could cause them to come into er cap of the vehicle. The tire pressure
contact with the vehicle body or axle should only be adjusted on cold tires.
앫 Increased noise
parts. Damage to the tires or the vehi- Follow the tire manufacturer’s mainte-
앫 Increased fuel consumption cle can be the result. nance recommendation included with
the vehicle.
Same-sized tires
E 320 E 500
Rims (light alloy) 8J x 16 ET 39 8½J x 17 ET 38
Wheel offset 1.53 in (39 mm) 1.5 in (38 mm)
Summer tires (radial-ply tires) 225/55 R 16 95 H 245/45 R 17 95 H1
Winter tires (radial-ply tires) 225/55 R 16 95 H M+S 245/45 R 17 95 H M+S1
1
Must not be used with snow chains.
361
Technical data
Rims and tires
Minispare wheel Sport package
E 320 / E 500 E 320*/ E 500*

Rim 4J x 17 ET 34 Same-sized
Wheel offset 1.34 (34 mm) tires
Tire T 155/70 R 171 Rims 8J x 17 ET 38

(light alloy)
1 Must not be used with snow chains.
Wheel offset 1.5 in (38 mm)
Summer tires 245/45 R 17 95 H1
(radial-ply tires)
Winter tires 245/45 R 17 95 M+S1
(radial-ply tires)
1 Must not be used with snow chains.
362
Technical data
Electrical system
Electrical system
Model E 320 E 500
Generator (alternator) 14 V/120 A 14 V/120 A
Starter motor 14 V/1.4 KW 14 V/1.7 KW
Battery (auxiliary) 12 V/12 Ah 12 V/12 Ah
Battery (main) 12 V/95 Ah 12 V/95 Ah
Spark plugs Bosch F8 DPP 332U Bosch F8 DPP 332U
NGK PFR 5R-11 NGK PFR 5R-11
Electrode gap 0.039 in (1.00 mm) 0.039 in (1.00 mm)
Tightening torque 18.5 - 22 ft.lb (25 - 30 Nm) 18.5 - 22 ft.lb (25 - 30 Nm)
363
Technical data
Main dimensions
Main dimensions
Model E 320 E 500
Overall vehicle length 189.7 in (4818 mm) 189.7 in (4818 mm)
Overall vehicle width 78.3 in (1990 mm) 78.3 in (1990 mm)
Overall vehicle height 57.2 in (1452 mm)
Overall vehicle height (AIRMATIC DC*) 56.2 in (1428 mm) 56.3 in (1430 mm)
(optional on E320; standard on E500)
Wheelbase 112.4 in (2854 mm) 112.4 in (2854 mm)
Track, front 62.1 in (1577 mm) 62.1 in (1577 mm)
Track, rear 61.8 in (1570 mm) 61.8 in (1570 mm)
364
Technical data
Weights
Weights
Roof load max. 220 lb (100 kg)
Trunk load max. 220 lb (100 kg)
365
Technical data
Capacities Vehicle components and their respective Please refer to the Factory Approved Ser-
lubricants must match. Therefore use only vice Products Pamphlet, or inquire at your
brands tested and recommended by us. authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
Model Capacity Fuels, coolants, lubricants etc.

Engine with oil filter E 320 8.5 US qt (8.0 l) Recommended engine oils
E 500 8.0 US qt (7.5 l)
Automatic transmission 8.0 US qt (7.5 l) MB Automatic Transmission Oil1
Rear axle E 320 1.06 US qt (1 l) Hypoid gear oil SAE 85 W 90
E 500 1.37 US qt (1.3 l)
Power steering approx. 1.1 US qt (1.0 l) MB Power Steering Fluid (Pentosin
CHF 11S)
Front wheel hubs approx. 3.0 oz (85 g) each High temperature roller bearing grease
Brake system 0.64 US qt (0.6 l) MB Brake Fluid (DOT 4+)
Cooling system E 320 approx. 10.7 US qt (10 l) MB 325.0 Anticorrosion/Antifreeze
E 500 approx. 11.9 US qt (11.3 l)
Fuel tank including a reserve of 21.12 US gal (80.0 l) Premium unleaded gasoline:
2.38 US gal (9.0 l) Posted Octane 91 (Avg. of 96
RON/86 MON)
Air conditioner system R-134a refrigerant and special PAG lu-
bricant oil (never R-12)
1 MB part no. 001 989 21 03 10
366
Technical data
Model Capacity Fuels, coolants, lubricants etc.

Windshield washer E 320, E 500 4.8 US qt (4.5 l) MB Windshield Washer Concentrate1
Windshield washer and headlamp cleaning E 320, E 500 7.4 US qt (7.0 l) MB Windshield Washer Concentrate1
system
1
Use MB Windshield Washer Concentrate “S” and water for temperatures above freezing or MB Windshield Washer Concentrate “S” and commercially available pre-
mixed windshield washer solvent/antifreeze for temperatures below freezing. Follow suggested mixing ratios (컄 page 372).
367
Technical data
Engine oils Engine oil additives Brake fluid
Engine oils are specifically tested for their Do not blend oil additives with engine oil. During vehicle operation, the boiling point
suitability in our engines. Therefore, use They may be harmful to the engine opera- of the brake fluid is continuously reduced
only engine oils recommended by tion. through the absorption of moisture from
Mercedes-Benz. Information on recom- the atmosphere. Under extremely strenu-
Damage or malfunctions resulting from
mended brands is available in the Factory ous operating conditions, this moisture
blending oil additives are not covered by
Approved Service Products Pamphlet, or at content can lead to the formation of bub-
the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. bles in the system, thus reducing the sys-
tem’s efficiency.
Please follow FSS recommendations for Air conditioner refrigerant
scheduled oil changes. Failure to do so Therefore, the brake fluid must be re-
could result in engine damage not covered R-134a (HFC) refrigerant and special PAG placed every two years, preferably in the
by the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty. lubricating oil is used in the air conditioner spring.
system.
Only brake fluid approved by
Never use R-12 (CFC) or mineral-based lu- Mercedes-Benz is recommended. Your au-
bricating oil. Otherwise damage to the thorized Mercedes-Benz Center will pro-
system will occur. vide you with additional information.
368
Technical data
Premium unleaded gasoline Fuel requirements Gasoline additives
! Use only premium unleaded gasoline A major concern among engine manufac-
meeting ASTM standard D 439: turers is carbon build-up caused by gaso-
To maintain the engine’s durability and
line. Mercedes-Benz recommends only the
performance, premium unleaded gaso- 앫 The octane number (posted at the
use of quality gasoline containing additives
line must be used. If premium unleaded pump) must be 91 min. It is an average
that prevent the build-up of carbon depos-
gasoline is not available and low octane of both the Research (R) Octane Num-
its.
fuel is used, follow these precautions: ber and the Motor (M) Octane Number:
(R+M)/2). This is also known as the After an extended period of using fuels
앫 Have the fuel tank only partially
ANTI-KNOCK INDEX. without such additives, carbon deposits
filled with unleaded regular and fill
can build up especially on the intake valves
up with premium unleaded as soon Unleaded gasoline containing oxygenates
and in the combustion area, leading to en-
as possible such as ethanol, IPA, IBA and TBA can be
gine performance problems such as:
used provided the ratio of any one of these
앫 Avoid full throttle driving and abrupt
oxygenates to gasoline does not exceed 앫 Warm-up hesitation
acceleration
10%; MTBE is not to exceed 15%. 앫 Unstable idle
앫 Do not exceed an engine speed of
The ratio of methanol to gasoline must not
3000 rpm if the vehicle is loaded 앫 Knocking/pinging
exceed 3% plus additional cosolvents.
with a light load such as two per- 앫 Misfire
sons and no luggage Using mixtures of ethanol and methanol is
not allowed. Gasohol, which contains 10% 앫 Power loss
앫 Do not exceed 2/3 of maximum ac-
ethanol and 90% unleaded gasoline, can be Do not blend any specific fuel additives
celerator pedal position if the vehi-
used. with fuel. This only results in unnecessary
cle is fully loaded or operating in
mountainous terrain These blends must also meet all other fuel costs and may be harmful to the engine op-
requirements, such as resistance to spark eration.
knock, boiling range, vapor pressure, etc.
369
Technical data
Damage or malfunctions resulting from If the antifreeze mixture is effective to To provide important corrosion protection,
poor fuel quality or from blending specific -22°F (-30°C), the boiling point of the cool- the solution must be at least 45% anticor-
fuel additives are not covered by the ant in the pressurized cooling system is rosion/antifreeze [equivalent to freeze
Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty. reached at approximately 266°F (130°C). protection to approx. - 22°F (-30°C)]. If
you use a solution that is more than 55%
The coolant solution must be used
Coolants anticorrosion/antifreeze [freeze protec-
year-round to provide the necessary corro-
tion to approx. - 49°F (-45°C)], the engine
sion protection and increase boil-over pro-
The engine coolant is a mixture of water temperature will increase due to the lower
tection. You should have it replaced every
and anticorrosion/antifreeze, which pro- heat transfer capability of the solution.
15 years or 150 000 miles (250 000 km),
vides: Therefore, do not use more than this
whichever comes first.
앫 Corrosion protection amount of anticorrosion/antifreeze.
Coolant system design and coolant used
앫 Freeze protection stipulate the replacement interval. The
앫 Boiling protection (by increasing the above replacement interval is only applica-
boiling point) ble if MB 325.0 anticorrosion/antifreeze
solution or other Mercedes-Benz approved
The cooling system was filled at the factory products of equal specification (see Facto-
with a coolant providing freeze protection ry Approved Service Products pamphlet)
to approximately -22°F (-30°C) and corro- are used to renew the coolant concentra-
sion protection. tion or bring it back up to the proper level.
370
Technical data
If the coolant level is low, water and MB Anticorrosion/antifreeze Therefore, the following product is strongly
Anticorrosion/Antifreeze should be used recommended for use in your vehicle:
Your vehicle contains a number of alumi-
to bring it up to the proper level (have cool- Mercedes-Benz 325.0 Anticorrosion/Anti-
num parts. The use of aluminum compo-
ing system checked for signs of leakage). freeze Agent.
nents in motor vehicle engines
The water in the cooling system must meet necessitates that anticorrosion/antifreeze Before the start of the winter season (or
minimum requirements, which are usually coolant used in such engines be specifical- once a year in hot southern regions), you
satisfied by normal drinking water. If you ly formulated to protect the aluminum should have the anticorrosion/antifreeze
are not sure about the water quality, con- parts. (Failure to use such anticorro- concentration checked. The coolant is also
sult your authorized Mercedes-Benz sion/antifreeze coolant will result in a sig- regularly checked each time you bring your
Center. nificantly shortened service life.) vehicle to your authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center for service.
Anticorrosion/antifreeze quantity
Model Approx. freeze protection

– 35°F (– 37°C) – 49°F (– 45°C)
E 320 5.3 US qt (5.0 l) 5.9 US qt (5.5 l)
E 500 6.0 US qt (5.65 l) 6.6 US qt (6.2 l)
371
Technical data
Windshield and headlamp washer 왘 Refill the reservoir with MB Windshield Windshield and headlamp washer fluid
system Washer Concentrate and water (or con- mixing ratio
centrate and commercially available
For temperatures above freezing, use
Both the windshield and headlamp washer premixed windshield washer
MB Windshield Washer Concentrate "S"
systems are supplied from the windshield solvent/antifreeze, depending on am-
and water:
washer fluid reservoir. bient temperatures).
앫 1 part "S" to 100 parts water
The washer fluid reservoir has a capacity of
approx.: Warning G [40 ml "S" to 1 gallon (4 liters) water].
앫 7.4 US qt. (7 l) in vehicles with a head- For temperatures below freezing use
lamp cleaning system* or heated reser- Washer solvent/antifreeze is highly flamma- MB Windshield Washer Concentrate "S"
voir ble. Do not spill washer solvent/antifreeze and commercially available premixed
on hot engine parts, because it may burn. windshield washer solvent/antifreeze:
앫 4.8 US qt. (4.5 l) in vehicles without a You can be seriously burned.
headlamp cleaning system 앫 1 part "S" to 100 parts solvent
[40 ml "S" to 1 gallon (4 liters) solvent].
372
Technical data
The following text is published as required Tread wear Traction
of all manufacturers of passenger cars un-
The tread wear grade is a comparative rat- The traction grades, from highest to low-
der Title 49, Code of U.S. Federal Regula-
ing based on the wear rate of the tire when est, are AA, A, B, and C. Those grades rep-
tions, Part 575 pursuant to the "National
tested under controlled conditions on a resent the tire’s ability to stop on wet
Traffic and Motor Vehicle Safety Act of
specified government test course. For ex- pavement as measured under controlled
1966".
ample, a tire graded 150 would wear one conditions on specified government test
and one-half (1½) times as well on the gov- surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire
Uniform tire quality grading
ernment course as a tire graded 100. The marked C may have poor traction perfor-
relative performance of tires depends mance.
Quality grades can be found, where appli-
upon the actual conditions of their use,
cable, on the tire sidewall between tread
shoulder and maximum section width. For
however, and may depart significantly
from the norm due to variations in driving
Warning G
example:
habits, service practices and differences in The traction grade assigned to this tire is
Tread wear Traction Temperature road characteristics and climate. based on straight ahead braking traction
200 AA A tests, and does not include acceleration,
cornering, hydroplaning, or peak traction
characteristics.
All passenger car tires must conform to
federal safety requirements in addition to
these grades.
373
Technical data
Temperature
The temperature grades are A (the high-
Warning G
est), B, and C, representing the tire’s resis- The temperature grade for this tire is estab-
tance to the generation of heat and its lished for a tire that is properly inflated and
ability to dissipate heat when tested under not overloaded. Excessive speed, underin-
controlled conditions on a specified indoor flation, or excessive loading, either sepa-
laboratory test wheel. Sustained high tem- rately or in combination, can cause
perature can cause the material of the tire excessive heat build-up and possible tire
to degenerate and reduce tire life, and ex- failure.
cessive temperature can lead to sudden
tire failure. Grade C corresponds to a level
of performance which all passenger car
tires must meet under the Federal Motor
Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B
and A represent higher levels of perfor-
mance on the laboratory test wheel than
the minimum required by law.
374
Technical terms
ABS BabySmartTM compatible child seats CAC

(Antilock Brake System) Special restraint system for children. (Customer Assistance Center)
Prevents the wheels from locking up The sensor system for the passenger Mercedes-Benz customer service cen-
during braking so that the vehicle can seat prevents deployment of the pas- ter which can help you with any ques-
continue to be steered. senger side airbag if a BabySmartTM tions about your vehicle and provide
compatible child seat is installed. assistance in the event of a break-
Alignment bolt
down.
Metal pin with thread. The centering BAS
pin is an aid used when changing a tire (Brake Assist System) CAN system
to align the wheel with the wheel hub. System for potentially reducing braking (Controller Area Network)
distances in emergency braking situa- Data bus network serving to control ve-
BabySmartTM airbag deactivation
tions. The system is activated when it hicle functions such as door locking or
system
senses an emergency based on how windshield wiping.
This system detects if a special system
fast the brake is applied.
compatible child restraint seat is in- Cockpit
stalled on the front passenger seat. The Bi-Xenon headlamps* All instruments, switches, buttons and
system will automatically deactivate Headlamps which use an electric arc as indicator/warning lamps in the passen-
the passenger front airbag when such a a light source and produce a more in- ger compartment needed for vehicle
seat is properly installed tense light than filament headlamps. operation and monitoring.
(PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicator Bi-Xenon headlamps produce low
lamp located in the center console beam and high beam.
lights up). See your authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center for availability.
375
Technical terms
Control system Distronic* Engine number

The control system is used to call up A driving convenience cruise control The number set by the manufacturer
vehicle information and to change system which helps the driver maintain and placed on the cylinder block to
component settings. Information and a pre-selected speed: uniquely identify each engine pro-
messages appear in the multifunction duced.
앫 If there is no vehicle directly ahead,
display. The driver uses the buttons on
the system operates in the same Engine oil viscosity
the multifunction steering wheel to
way as conventional ->cruise con- Measurement for the inner friction (vis-
navigate through the system and to ad-
trol. cosity) of the oil at different tempera-
just settings.
tures. The higher the temperature an
앫 If a slower moving vehicle is ahead,
Cruise control oil can tolerate without becoming thin,
Distronic will reduce your vehicle
Driving convenience system for auto- or the lower the temperature it can tol-
speed to the extent permitted by re-
matically maintaining the vehicle speed erate without becoming viscous, the
duced throttle and up to 20% brak-
set by the driver. better the viscosity.
ing power to maintain the preset
minimum following distance. ESP
DTR (Electronic Stability Program)
(->Distronic*) Improves vehicle handling and direc-
tional stability.
376
Technical terms
ETD GPS Kickdown

(Emergency Tensioning Device) (Global Positioning System) Depressing the accelerator past the
Device which deploys in certain frontal Satellite-based system for relaying point of resistance shifts the transmis-
and rear collisions exceeding the sys- geographic location information to and sion down to the lowest possible gear.
tem's threshold to tighten the seat from vehicles equipped with special re- This very quickly accelerates the vehi-
belts. ceivers. Employs CD digital maps for cle and should not be used for normal
->SRS navigation. acceleration needs.
FSS Instrument cluster Lock button
(Flexible Service System) The displays and indicator/warning Button on the door which indicates
Service indicator in the multifunction lamps in the driver’s field of vision, in- whether the door is locked or un-
display that informs the driver when cluding the tachometer, speedometer locked. Pushing the lock button down
the next vehicle maintenance service is and fuel gauge. on an individual door from inside will
due. lock that door.
Gear range Memory function*
Number of gears which are available to Used to store three individual seat,
the automatic transmission for shifting. steering wheel and mirror positions for
The automatic gear shifting process each key.
can be adapted to specific operating
conditions using the selector lever.
377
Technical terms
Menu Multifunction display Power train

The control system displays are ar- The display field in the instrument clus- Collective term designating all compo-
ranged in menus. Each menu contains ter used to present information provid- nents used to generate and transmit
a number of commands for particular ed by the control system. motive power to the drive axles, includ-
systems. In the Audio menu, for exam- ing:
ple, you will find the commands
Steering wheel with buttons for operat- 앫 Engine
SELECT RADIO STATION or OPERATE CD
ing the control system.
PLAYER. Using commands you can di- 앫 Clutch/torque converter
rectly change the settings for your ve- Overspeed range 앫 Transmission
hicle. Engine speeds within the red marking
of the tachometer dial. Avoid this en- 앫 Transfer case*
MON
gine speed range, as it may result in se- 앫 Drive shaft
(Motor Octane Number)
rious engine damage that is not
The Motor Octane Number for gasoline 앫 Axle shafts/axles
as determined by a standardized meth-
Warranty. Program mode selector switch
od. It is an indication of a gasoline's
Poly-V-belt drive Used to switch the automatic transmis-
ability to resist undesired detonation
Drives engine-components (alternator, sion between standard operation S and
(knocking). The average of both the
AC compressor, etc.) from the engine. winter operation W.
MON (Motor Octane Number) and
->RON (Research Octane Number) is Remote Vehicle Diagnostics
posted at the pump, also known as Transmission of vehicle data and cur-
ANTI-KNOCK INDEX. rent location to the Mercedes-Benz
Customer Assistance Center for sub-
scribers to the Tele Aid service.
378
Technical terms
Restraint systems Shift lock The Tele Aid system is operational pro-
Seat belts, belt tensioners, airbags and When the vehicle is parked, this lock viding that the vehicle’s battery is
child restraint systems. As indepen- prevents the transmission selector le- charged, properly connected, not dam-
dent systems, their protective func- ver from being moved out of position P aged and cellular and GPS coverage is
tions complement one another. without key turned and brake pedal de- available.
pressed.
RON Telematics*
(Research Octane Number) SRS A combination of the terms "telecom-
The Research Octane Number for gaso- (Supplemental Restraint System) munications" and "informatics".
line as determined by a standardized Seat belts, emergency tensioning de-
Tightening torque
method. It is an indication of a gaso- vice and airbags. Though independent
Force times lever arm (e.g. a lug
line's ability to resist undesired detona- systems, they are closely interfaced to
wrench) with which threaded fasteners
tion (knocking). The average of both provide effective occupant protection.
such as wheel bolts are tightened.
the ->MON (Motor Octane Number)
Tele Aid System Tire speed rating
and RON (Research Octane Number) is
(Telematic Alarm Identification on De- Part of a tire designation; indicates the
posted at the pump, also known as
mand) speed range for which a tire is ap-
ANTI-KNOCK INDEX.
The Tele Aid system consists of three proved.
SBC types of response: automatic and man-
(Sensotronic Brake Control) ual emergency, roadside assistance Traction
Electronically controlled hydraulic and information. Tele Aid is initially ac- Force exerted by the vehicle on the
braking system for increased braking tivated by completing a subscriber road via the tires.
safety and comfort. agreement and placing an acquain-
tance call.
379
Vehicle level control VIN Voice recognition system*
The ground clearance of the vehicle is (Vehicle Identification Number) Voice control system for car phones,
automatically controlled according to a The number set by the manufacturer portable cell phones and audio sys-
selected setting and speed.The driver and placed on the body to uniquely tems (radio, CD, etc.).
can set the ground clearance manually identify each vehicle produced.
for example on very rough roads.
380
Index
A High beams 115 Seat height 35

ABS 73, 375 Ignition 31 Seats 34
Malfunction indicator lamp 289 Ignition with KEYLESS-GO* start/stop Steering column height 38
Messages in display 296 button 33 Steering column length 38
Warning lamp 289 Immobilizer 52, 81 Steering wheel 37
Accelerator position, automatic Rear fog lamp 113 Air conditioner (cooling)
transmission 156 Rear window defroster 169, 180 Turning off 170, 181
Accident Residual heat 171, 182 Turning on 170, 181
In case of 49 Tow-away alarm 83 Air distribution
Activating Windshield wipers 47 Adjusting 166, 177
Air conditioning (cooling) 170, 181 Adjustable air outlets, rear passenger Air outlets, rear passenger compartment
Air recirculation mode 168, 178 compartment 182 Adjustable 182
Anti-theft alarm system 82 Adjusting 34 Air recirculation mode 167, 178
Automatic climate control 174 Air distribution 166, 177 Activating 168, 178
Central locking (control system) 142 Air volume 166, 177 Deactivating 168, 179
Charcoal filter 180 Backrest tilt 36 Air volume
Climate control 164 Exterior rear view mirror 39 Adjusting 166, 177
Defrost 167 Head restraint height 36 Airbags 57
Distance warning function* 206 Head restraint tilt 36 BabySmartTM airbag deactivation
Distronic* 202 Inside rear view mirror 38 system 67, 375
Easy-entry/exit feature* 143 Instrument cluster illumination 118 Children 58
ESP 77 Mirrors 38 Front 60
Exterior headlamps 46 Multicontour seat* 104 Passenger 60
Exterior lamps 113 Seat cushion depth 105 Safety guidelines 59
Hazard warning flasher 115 Seat cushion tilt 36 Side impact 61
Headlamps 46 Seat fore and aft adjustment 35 Window curtain 61
381
Index
AIRMATIC DC (Dual Control) 209 Automatic central locking Gear selector lever position 154
Alarm Activating/deactivating (control Gear shifting malfunctions 156
Audible 72, 82 system) 142 Kickdown 156
Canceling 82 Automatic climate control One-touch gearshifting 152
Visual 82 Temperature sensor 27 Program mode selector switch 155
Alarm system Automatic climate control* 172 Selector lever position 151
Anti-theft 82 Adjusting air distribution 177 Starting the engine 43
Alignment bolt (vehicle tool kit) 340, 375 Adjusting air volume 166, 177 Winter program mode 155
Antiglare Air recirculation mode 178
B
Automatic 157 Defrosting 178
BabySmartTM
Antilock brake system (ABS) 375 Rear window defroster 169, 180
Compatible child seats 375
Anti-theft alarm system Residual heat utilization 182
Self-test 68
Arming 82 Residual ventilation 182
BabySmartTM airbag deactivation
Canceling alarm 82 Setting the temperature 176
system 67, 375
Disarming 82 Automatic headlamp mode 113
Backrest
Anti-theft systems 81 Automatic lighting control
Folding forward 220
Anti-theft alarm system 82 Activating 116
Folding rearward 221
Immobilizer 81 Deactivating 116
BAS 74, 375
Tow-away alarm 82 Automatic locking when driving 99
Messages in display 297, 298
Ashtray 231 Automatic transmission 151
Batteries, SmartKey
AUDIO menu 126 Accelerator position 156
Changing 329
Selecting radio station 127 Emergency operation (Limp Home
Check lamp 87
Automatic antiglare for rear view Mode) 156
Checking 88
mirror 157 Gear ranges 153
382
Index
Batteries, vehicle C Central locking switch 100

Charging 344 CAC (Customer Assistance Center) 375 Changing
Disconnecting 344 Calling up Batteries (SmartKey) 329
Messages in display 303, 304 Distronic* settings 128 Key setting 143
Reconnecting 345 Range (distance to empty) 147 Vehicle level 210
Removing 344 CAN system 375 Charcoal filter 180
Service 343 Cargo area see Trunk 88 Charging
Battery discharged Cargo tie-down rings 225 Vehicle batteries 344
Jump starting 346 Cassette player Child safety 65
Bi-Xenon headlamps* 375 Operating 128 Airbags 58
Blocking CD player* Infant and child restraint systems 61,
Rear window operation 71 Operating 127, 128 65
Brake assist system (BAS) 375 Center console Child safety switch see Blocking of rear
Brake pads Lower part 26 window operation 71
Message in display 305 PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicator Cigarette lighter 232
Brakes lamp 294 Cleaning
Warning lamp 291 Upper part 25 Headlamps 158
Bulbs, replacing Centigrade Parktronic* system sensor 284
Front lamps 332, 334 Setting temperature units 134 Windshield 48
High beam bulb (Bi-Xenon* headlamps Central locking Cleaning and care of the vehicle
only) 334 Automatic 99 Distronic system sensor 283
License plate lamps 336 From inside 100 MB Tex upholstery 285
Parking lamps 335 Switch 100 Climate control 162
Standing lamps 335 Switching on/off (control Adjusting 166
Tail lamp assemblies 336 system) 142 Defrosting 167
Unlocking from inside 100 Setting the temperature 165
383
Index
Clock 137 Functions 125 Canceling 195

Closing Instrument cluster submenu 134, Driving downhill 195
Glove box 226 136 Driving uphill 195
Side windows 184 Lighting submenu 138 Fine adjustment 196
Side windows with KEYLESS-GO* 92 Malfunction memory menu 129 Lever 201
Sliding/pop-up roof* 187 Menus 124, 125, 378 Saving current speed 195
Sliding/pop-up roof* with Multifunction display 121 Setting speeds 196
KEYLESS-GO* 92 Multifunction steering wheel 122 Cruise control lever 194
Sliding/pop-up roof* with Selecting radio system 127 Customer Assistance Center (CAC) 375
SmartKey 188, 192 Settings menu 130
D
Trunk lid 96 Standard display menu 126
Daytime running lamp mode 114
Windows 184 Submenus 123, 125
Setting 139
Windows with SmartKey 185 TEL* menu 147
Deactivating
Cockpit 20, 375 Trip computer menu 145
Air conditioner 170
COMAND* see separate operating instruc- Vehicle submenu 142
Air recirculation mode 168, 179, 180
tions Convenience submenu 143
Alarm 82
Combination switch 115 Activating easy-entry/exit
Anti-theft alarm system 82
High beam flasher 47 feature* 143
Automatic climate control 169, 174
Turn signals 46 Setting key dependency 144
Central locking (control system) 142
Windshield wipers 47 Setting parking position for exterior
Climate control 164
Consumer information 373 rear view mirror 144
Cruise control 195
Control system 121, 376 Coolant
Defrost 167, 178
AUDIO menu 126 Messages in display 311, 312
Distance warning function* 206
Convenience submenu 143 Temperature display 119
Distronic* 204
Display digital speedometer 126 Warning lamp 292, 311
Engine with KEYLESS-GO* 53
Distronic* menu 128 Cruise control 194, 376
Engine with the key 52
384
Index
ESP 76 Display Cover 283

Exterior lamps 113 Selecting 135, 136 Cruise control lever 201
Hazard warning flasher 115 Displays Deactivated 201
Headlamps 51 Digital speedometer 126 Deactivating 204
Immobilizer 81 Distronic* 199 Deceleration 200
Interior lighting delayed Messages 264 Decreasing distance 205
switch-off 141 Selecting 135 Displays in the speedometer dial 199
Rear window defroster 169, 180 Service indicator 275 Distance warning function 205
Residual heat 171 Showing malfunctions 130 Driving hints 206
Tow-away alarm 83 Distance Fine adjustment 203
Deceleration Decreasing in Distronic* 205 Increasing distance 205
With Distronic* 200 Increasing in Distronic* 205 Intermittent signal tone 199
Defogging Warning function 205 Menu 200
Windshield 166, 177 Distance to empty (range) Messages in display 300
Defrosting 167, 178 Calling up 145 Resetting stored speed 203
Delayed switch-off Distance warning function* 205 Setting a higher speed 202
Interior lighting 141 Activating 206 Setting a slower speed 203
Dialing Deactivating 206 Setting the current speed 202
A number (telephone) 149 DTR* warning lamp 205 Setting the following distance in
Difficulties Intermittent warning sound 205 Distronic 204
While driving see Problems while Symbol in multifunction display 129 Warning and indicator lamps 199
driving 48 Distronic* 197, 376 Door entry lamps 117
With starting 44 Activated 201 Door unlock
Digital speedometer 126 Activating 202 With Tele Aid* 241
Discharged battery Calling up settings 128, 200
Jump starting 346 Cleaning sensors 283
385
Index
Doors Dual control Emergency tensioning device 377

Message in display 323 AIRMATIC DC 209 Emergency tensioning device see
Opening from inside vehicle 93 ETD 377
E
Opening from outside 87, 91 Ending
Easy-entry/exit
Downhill driving A call (telephone) 149
Message in display 310
Cruise control 195 Engine 360
Easy-entry/exit feature* 102
Downshifting 152 Starting 43
Activating 143
Driving Starting with KEYLESS-GO* 44
Interrupting movement 102, 143
General instructions 40 Starting with the key 44
Electrical fuses 352
Problems 48 Turning off with the key 52
Electrical system 363
Safety systems 73 Engine number 376
Electronic Stability Program see ESP 75,
With Distronic* 206 Engine oil
376
Driving hints Adding 263
Emergency call system* 235
SBC brake system 79 Additives 368
Emergency calls
Driving safety systems Checking level 262
Initiating an emergency call 237
ABS 73 Display messages 299, 300
With Tele Aid* 236
BAS 74 Filler neck 263
Emergency operation (Limp Home
ESP 75, 376 Messages in display 264, 300
Mode) 156
SBC brake system 77 Viscosity 376
Emergency operations
Driving systems 194 ESP 75, 376
Releasing trunk lid from inside 97
AIRMATIC DC 209 Switching off 76
Remote door unlock 241
Cruise control 194 Switching on 77
Sliding/pop-up roof* or panorama slid-
Distronic* 197 Warning lamp 288
ing/pop-up roof* 331
Driving safety systems 73 ETD 377
Unlocking the vehicle 327
Vehicle level control 209 Safety guidelines 59
DTR see Distronic* 376 Exterior lamp switch 112
386
Index
Exterior rear view mirrors Front seats G

Adjusting 39 Heater* 107 Garage door opener 27, 243
Parking position for 144 FSS (Flexible Service System) 275, 377 Erasing in remote control 246
Fuel 260 Integrated remote control 244
F
Premium unleaded gasoline 260 Rolling code programming 245
Fahrenheit
Fuel consumption statistics Gasoline see Fuel 260
Setting temperature units 134
After start 146 Gear range 377
Fastening the seat belts 40
Since last reset 146 Automatic transmission 153
Fine adjustment
Fuel filler flap 259 Limiting 153
Cruise control 196
Locking 259 Shifting into optimal 152
Distronic* 203
Unlocking 259 Gear range limit
First aid kit 324
Fuel reserve tank Canceling 152
Flat tire 338
Message in display 313, 323 Gear selector lever
Spare wheel 338
Fuel tank Position 154
Flexible Service System (FSS) 275, 377
Filler flap 259 Global
Fog lamp, rear 114
Fuels, coolants, lubricants etc. 366 Locking 87
Fog lamps, front 114
Functions (control system) 125 Locking with KEYLESS-GO* 91
Messages in display 316
Resetting 131 Unlocking 87
Replacing bulbs 332
Fuse chart 353 Unlocking with KEYLESS-GO* 91
Switching on 114
Fuses 352 Global Positioning System (GPS) 377
Front airbags 60
Fuse chart 353 Glove box 226
Front lamps 332
Fuse extractor 353 Closing 226
Spare fuses 353 Opening 226
Replacing bulbs 334
Good visibility 157
Switching on 112
GPS 377
Front seat head restraints
GPS see COMAND* 243
Power seat 103
387
Index
Grarage door opener 27 Hood 261 Selecting language 135

Closing 261 Instrument lighting 118, 119
H
Message in display 313 Integrated remote control
Hand-held transmitter
Opening 261 Canadian programming 245
Programming integrated remote
Erasing memory 246
control 244 I
Hand-held transmitter 244
Hazard warning flasher 115 Identification labels 358
Operating 246
Switching off 115 Ignition 31, 33
Rolling code programming 245
Switching on 115 Switching on 44
Interior lighting 116
Head restraints 103 Immobilizer 81
Activating automatic control 116
Headlamps Activating 81
Deactivating automatic control 116
Automatic control 113 Deactivating 81
Delayed switch-off 141
Bi-Xenon 375 Indicator lamps see Lamps, indicator and
Manual operation 116
Cleaning system* 158 warning
Interior storage spaces 226
Switching off 51 Infant and child restraint systems 65
Glove box 226
Switching on 46 Info services 242
Heated seats* 107 Information J
Height adjustment About service and warranty 10 Jump starting 346
Head restraints 36 Button for Tele Aid* 239
K
Steering wheel 37 Inside rear view mirror
Key (SmartKey)
Vehicle level 209 Adjusting 38
Changing the batteries 329
High beam flasher 47, 115 Instrument 22
Key dependency memory
High beam headlamps 332 Instrument cluster 118, 377
Settings 144
Messages in display 316 Coolant temperature display 119
Key positions in starter switch 31
Switching on 115 Illumination 118
Key, electronic
Multifunction display 121
Outside temperature indicator 120
388
Index
Key, Mechanical 327 Locking the vehicle 92 ESP 288

Key, SmartKey Remote controls 89 SBC 77
Battery check lamp 87 Starting the engine 44 Seat belts 293
Checking the batteries 88 Turning off engine 53 SRS 56
Factory setting 87 Unlocking with 32 Language
Global locking 87 Unlocking, trunk lid 92 Multifunction display 135
Global unlocking 87 KEYLESS-GO* card Setting 135
Loss of 89 Messages in display 309 Layout of poly-V-belt drive 359
Positions in starter switch 31 Keys 86 Level control system
Remote controls 86 Kickdown 156, 377 AIRMATIC DC 209
Restoring to factory setting 87 Kilometers/miles in speedometer 134 Lever
Selective setting 87 Km/h or mph in speedometer 134 Cruise control 201
Starting the engine 44 License plate lamps 333
L
Turning off the engine 52 Messages in display 316
Lamp bulbs, exterior 332
Unlocking the trunk lid 88 Replacing bulbs 336
Lamps, exterior
Unlocking with 30 Light sensor 313
Front 332
Key, SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* Lighter see Cigarette lighter 232
Light sensor 313
Turning off the engine 53 Lighting 112
Messages in display 313–??
KEYLESS-GO* Automatic headlamp mode 113
Replacing bulbs for rear 333, 336
Activating ignition with 33 Combination switch 115
Lamps, indicator and warning
Closing side windows 92 Daytime running lamp mode 114
ABS 289
Closing sliding/pop-up roof* 92 Door entry lamps 117
Airbag Off 61
Factory setting 91 Exterior lamp switch 112
Battery (SmartKey) 87
Global locking 91 Front fog lamps 114
Brakes 291
Global unlocking 91 High beams 115
Coolant 292
Important notes 90 Instrument cluster illumination 118
DTR* 199
389
Index
Instruments 118, 119 Global with KEYLESS-GO* 91 Storing exterior rear view mirror park-
Interior 116 Global, SmartKey 87 ing positions 111
Locator lighting 114 Separately the trunk 98 Storing key dependent settings 110
Low beam 112 Vehicle with KEYLESS-GO* 92 Menus 124
Manual headlamp mode 113 Loss of keys 89, 93 AUDIO 126
Night security illumination 114 Low beam headlamps 332 Control system 378
Parking lamps 112 Messages in display 313 Distronic* 128, 200
Rear fog lamp 114 In control system 124, 125
M
Settings (control system) 138 Malfunction memory 129
Main Dimensions 364
Trunk lamp 117 Settings menu 130
Maintenance 12
Limiting the gear range 153 Standard display 126
Malfunction
Limp Home Mode 156 Submenus 123
Displaying 130
Loading 216 TEL* 147
Malfunction memory 129
Cargo tie-down rings 225 Trip computer 145
Calling up 129
Instructions 224 Miles/kilometers in speedometer
Clearing 130
Roof rack 216 Setting 134
Manual headlamp mode 113
Ski sack* 216 Mirrors
Manual operations
Split rear bench seat 219 Adjusting 38
Interior lighting control 116
Locator lighting 114 Automatic antiglare for rear view
Locking the trunk 98
Setting 139 mirror 157
Unlocking the driver’s door 327
Lock button 377 Automatic antiglare* for inside
MB Tex upholstery
Door handle (KEYLESS-GO*) 53 mirror 157
Cleaning 285
Locking 50, 86 Exterior rear view mirror 39
Mechanical key 327
Automatic while driving 99 Exterior rear view mirror parking
Memory function 109, 377
Centrally from inside 100 positions 144, 158
Recalling positions from
Fuel filler flap 259 Inside rear view mirror 38
memory 110
390
Index
Storing exterior mirror parking SBC brake system 305, 306 Upshifting 152
position 111 Seat belts 310 Opening 331
MON 260 Steering gear oil level 318 Ashtray 231
MON (Motor Octane Number) 378 Telephone* 309 Doors from the inside 93
Mph or km/h in speedometer 134 Trunk lid 310 Glove box 226
Multicontour seat* 104 Washer fluid 311 Side windows 184
Multifunction display 121, 378 Multifunction steering wheel 24, 122, Sliding/pop-up roof* 187
Selecting language 135 378 Sliding/pop-up roof* with
Standard display 125 Buttons 122 SmartKey 188, 192
Multifunction display messages Trunk 88, 96
N
ABS 296 Trunk from the inside 94
Network provider 148
BAS 297, 298 Windows 184
Night security illumination 114
Batteries 303, 304 Windows with SmartKey 185
Brake pads 305 O Operating
Coolant 311, 312 Occupant safety 56 Cassette player 128
Coolant level 311 Airbags 57 CD player* 127, 128
Distronic* 300 Children and airbags 58 Garage door opener 246
Doors 323 Children in the vehicle 65 Integrated remote control 246
Easy-entry/exit feature 310 Fastening the seat belt 40 Radio 127
Engine oil level 300 Infant and child restraint systems 65 Safety 16
Fuel reserve tank 313, 323 Seat belts 40, 59 Telephone* 147
Hood 313 Oil Vehicle outside the USA and
Key 313, 323 Viscosity 376 Canada 13
KEYLESS-GO* card 309 One-touch gearshifting 152 Operating safety 16
Lamps 313–?? Canceling gear range limit 152 Operator’s Manual 10
Parking brake 310 Downshifting 152 Outside temperature indicator 120
391
Index
Overhead control panel 27 Phone book* Practical hints

Garage door opener 243 Loading 149 Lamp in center console 294
Overspeed range 378 Quick search 149 Problems
Phone number* While driving 48
P
Dialing 149 With vehicle 17
Panic alarm 72
Redialing 149 Product information 9
Panic button on SmartKey 72
Poly-V-belt drive 378 Program mode selector switch 378
Parking 50
Positions (Memory function) Automatic transmission 155
Parking brake 45, 50
Recalling from memory 110
Engaging 50 Q
Positions (Memory function*)
Message in display 310 Quick search
Storing into memory 110
Releasing 45 Phone book* 149
Power seat
Parking lamps 332
Adjusting backrest tilt 36 R
Replacing the bulbs 335
Adjusting head restraint height 36 Radio
Switching on 112
Adjusting head restraint tilt 36 Selecting stations 127
Parking position
Adjusting seat cushion tilt 36 Range (distance to empty)
Exterior rear view mirrors 111, 144,
Adjusting seat height 35 Calling up 147
158
Memory function 109 Rear bench seat
Parktronic*
Removing/installing head Foldable 219
Sensor 284
restraints 103 Rear fog lamp
PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicator
Seat fore and aft adjustment 35 Switching on 114
lamp 294
Power train 378 Rear lamps see Tail lamps
Passenger compartment
Power windows 184 Rear passenger compartment
Inside rear view mirror 38
Blocking of rear window operation 71 Adjustable air outlets 182
Interior lighting 116
Side windows 184 Rear seat head restraints
Passenger safety see Occupant
Synchronizing 186 Folding back with switch 104
safety 56
392
Index
Placing upright 104 License plate lamp bulbs 336 Occupant 56

Rear seats 103 Rear lamp bulbs 333, 336 Safety belts see Seat belts 40
Rear seats Wiper blades 337 Safety defects
Rear seat head restraints 103 Reporting Reporting 18
Rear view mirror automatic antiglare 157 Safety defects 18 Safety systems
Rear view mirrors see Mirrors Reset knob in the instrument cluster 131 Driving 73
Rear window Resetting Saving current speed 195
Blocking operation 71 All functions (control system) 131 SBC 77
Rear window defroster 169, 180 All functions of a submenu 131 SBC brake system 379
Rear window sunshade* 160, 161 Fuel consumption 146 Activation 78
Regular driving style 212 Service indicator (FSS) 276, 278, Deactivation 79
Remote controls 279 Driving hints 79
Integrated 244 Stored speed in Distronic* 203 Messages in display 305, 306
SmartKey 86 Trip odometer 119 Self-check 79
SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* 89 Residual heat utilization 171, 182 Warning lamp 77
Remote door unlock Residual ventilation 171, 182 Seat belt force limiter 64
With Tele Aid* 241 Restraint system see Infant and child re- Seat belts 61
Remote Vehicle Diagnostics 378 straint systems 65 Fastening 40
Removing Rims and Tires 361 Message in display 310
Ski sack 219 Roadside assistance 12 Proper use of 42, 63
Replacing Rolling code programming 245 Safety guidelines 59
Bulbs 332 RON (Research Octane Number) 260, Warning lamp 293
Front lamp bulbs 334 379 Seat cushion depth
Fuses 353 Roof rack 216 Adjusting 105
High beam bulb (Bi-Xenon* headlamps Seats 102
S
only) 334 Adjusting 34
Safety
393
Index
Easy entry/exit feature* 102 Setting Slower speed in Distronic* 203

Heater* 107 Convenience functions 132, 143 Speed in cruise control 196
Multicontour seat 104 Cruise control 195 Speed in Distronic* 202
Split rear bench seat 219 Daytime running lamp mode 139 Speedometer display mode 134
Ventilation 108 Exterior rear view mirror parking Temperature (interior) 165, 176
Securing cargo position 111 Temperature indicator 134
Cargo tie-down rings 225 Higher speed in cruise control 196 Tire inflation pressure 136
Selecting Higher speed in Distronic* 202 Units
Display 135 Hours (clock) 137 Speedometer 134
Selecting display 136 Individual vehicle settings 130 Temperature 134
Selector lever Instrument lighting 118, 119 Tire inflation pressure 136
Lock 43 Interior lighting delayed Vehicle level control 209
Position 151 switch-off 141 Settings
Self-test Key dependent memory 144 Calling up Distronic* 128, 200
BabySmartTM airbag deactivation Lamps and lighting (control Convenience functions 143
system 68 system) 138 Factory, KEYLESS-GO* 91
Tele Aid* 235 Language, multifunction display 135 Factory, SmartKey 87
Service Locator lighting 139 Individual (SmartKey) 144
Batteries 343 Lower speed in cruise control 196 Lighting (control system) 138
Calling up the service indicator 276 Lower speed in Distronic* 203 Menus and submenus 123
Overdue 276 Miles/kilometers in Resetting all (control system) 131
When due 275 speedometer 134 Resetting in the submenu 131
Service and warranty information 10 Minutes (clock) 137, 138 Selective 87
Service indicator 275 Parking position for exterior rear view Settings menu
Clearing 275 mirrors 144 Functions in 130
Service System see FSS 275 Slower speed in cruise control 196 Individual vehicle settings 130
394
Index
Submenus 131 Sliding/pop-up roof* 187 Spare parts service 356

Shift lock 379 Closing 187 Spare wheel 324
Shifting Closing with KEYLESS-GO* 92 Speed
Gear selector lever positions 154 Closing with SmartKey 188, 192 Resetting stored speed in
Into optimal gear range (automatic Opening 187 Distronic* 203
transmission) 152 Opening with SmartKey 188, 192 Saving current 195
Side impact airbags 61 Stopping 188 Speed settings
Side marker lamps 332, 336 Synchronizing 189 Cruise control 196
Side windows Sliding/pop-up roof* or panorama slid- Distronic* 202, 203
Automatic opening 184 ing/pop-up roof* Speedometer
Closing 184, 185 Emergency operations 331 Displaying gear range 153
Closing with KEYLESS-GO* 92 SmartKey Displays 199
Closing with SmartKey 185 Locking and unlocking 86 Settings units 134
Opening 184, 185 Opening and closing the slid- Speedometer display mode
Opening fully 184 ing/pop-up roof* with 188, 192 Selecting 134
Opening with SmartKey 185 Opening and closing windows Split rear bench seat 219
Stopping 185 with 185 Sporty driving style 212
Synchronizing power windows 186 Unlocking with 30 SRS 63, 379
Signal strength (telephone*) 148 SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* Indicator lamp 290
Simultaneous wiping and washing Global locking and unlocking 91 Standing lamps 112
Windshield wipers 48 Locking the vehicle 92 Replacing bulbs 335
Single wipe 48 Loss of 93 Starter switch 31
Ski sack* 216 Remote controls 89 Positions 31
Removing 219 Unlocking with 32 Starting difficulties 44
Unfolding and loading 216 Snow chains 274 Starting position 31
Unloading and folding 218 Spare fuses 353 Starting the engine 43
395
Index
Steering column Selecting 131 Symbol (Distronic*)

Height adjustment 38 Settings menu 131 Distance warning function* 129
Length adjustment 38 Vehicle 142 Synchronizing
Steering gear oil Sun visors 158 Power windows 186
Message in display 318 Supplemental Restraint System Sliding/pop-up roof* 189
Steering wheel (SRS) 379
T
Adjusting 37 Suspension tuning
Tachometer 120
Electrical adjustment 38 For regular driving style 212
Overspeed range 120
Height adjustment 38 For sporty driving style 212
Tail lamps 333, 336
Stolen vehicle Switching off
Tele Aid System 379
Tracking services 242 Automatic central locking (control
Tele Aid* 234
Stopping system) 142
Emergency calls 236
Sliding/pop-up roof* 188 Engine 51
Info services 242
Windows 185 ESP 76
Information 239
Storage compartments Hazard warning flasher 115
Initiating an emergency call
Glove box 226 Headlamps 51
manually 237
Storing (Memory function*) Switching on
Remote door unlock 241
Positions into memory 110 Automatic central locking (control
Roadside assistance 238
Submenus system) 142
SOS button 237
Convenience 143 ESP 77
Stolen vehicle tracking services 242
For settings 123 Front fog lamps 114
System self-check 235
In control system 125 Hazard warning flasher 115
Tele Aid System 235
Instrument cluster 134, 136 Headlamps 46
Upgrade signals 240
Lighting 138 High beams 115
Telematics* 379
Resetting functions in Control Rear fog lamp 114
Telephone* 24, 233
system 131 Windshield wipers 47
Answering a call 148
396
Index
Dialing a number from the phone Disarming for transport 82 Turning off
book 149 Towing eye bolt (vehicle tool kit) Engine 51
Ending a call 149 Installing 350
U
Loading phone book* 149 Towing the vehicle 348
Units
Messages in display 309 Tracking services
Setting speedometer units 134
Operating 147 For stolen vehicle 242
Setting temperature units 134
Redialing 149 Traction 155, 379
Setting tire inflation pressure
Temperature Trip computer 145
units 136
Display mode 134 Trip odometer
Unlocking 30, 86, 327
Sensor 27 Resetting 119
Centrally from inside 100
Setting interior temperature 165, Trunk
Driver’s door in an emergency 327
176 Closing the lid 96
Fuel filler flap 259
Setting units in display 134 Lamp 117
Global 87
Tie-down rings (trunk) 225 Lock button, KEYLESS-GO* 92
Global with KEYLESS-GO* 91
Tightening torque 342, 379 Message in display 310
Selective settings 87
Time Opening 88, 96
Trunk lid with KEYLESS-GO* 92
Setting hours 137 Opening from inside vehicle 94
Vehicle in an emergency 241
Setting minutes 137, 138 Separately locking 98
With KEYLESS-GO* 32
Tire inflation pressure Tie-down rings 225
With the SmartKey 30
Setting units 136 Trunk lid emergency release 97
Upgrade signals
Tire speed rating 379 Unlocking with KEYLESS-GO* 92
Tele Aid* 240
Tires 373 Trunk lid
Uphill driving
Tools 326 Closing 96
Cruise control 195
Tow-away alarm 82 Turn signals 46
Upshifting 152
Arming 82 Additional in mirrors 332
Useful features 226
Disarming 82 Front bulbs 332
Ashtrays 231
397
Index
Cigarette lighter 232 W Windshield wipers 47

Garage door opener 243 Warning lamps see Lamps, indicator and Fast wiper speed 47
Tele Aid* 234 warning Intermittent wiping 47
Telephone* 233 Warning sounds Replacing wiper blades 337
Distance warning function* 205 Single wipe 48
V
Distronic* 199 Switching on 47
Vehicle
Drivers seat belts 61 Wiping with windshield washer
Individual settings 130, 132
Parking brake 45 fluid 48
Proper use of 16
Warranty coverage 357 Winter driving
Towing 348
Weights 365 Block heater 274
Vehicle care
Wheel change 338 Snow chains 274
Parktronic* system sensor 284
Tightening torque 342 Tires 273
Vehicle level
Window curtain airbags 61 Transmission program mode 155
Changing 210
Windshield Wiping
Setting 210
Defogging 166, 177 And washing simultaneously 48
Automatic 210
Windshield washer fluid Interval 47
Manual 210
Message in display 311 With windshield washer fluid 48
Vehicle level control system
Wiping with 48
AIRMATIC DC 209 X
Vehicle tool kit 326 Xenon headlamps
VIN (Vehicle Identification Number) 380 Bi-Xenon 375
Voice recognition system* 380
398
Service and Literature
Your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center has trained technicians and original Mercedes-Benz parts to service your vehicle properly. For
expert advice and quality service, see your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
If your are interested in obtaining service literature for your vehicle, please contact your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. We con-
sider this the best way for you to obtain accurate information for your vehicle.
For further information you can find us on the Mercedes-Benz web-site www.mbusa.com or www.mercedes-benz.ca.
Warning G
To help avoid personal injury, be extremely careful when performing any service work or repairs. Improper or incomplete service or the use of
incorrect or inappropriate parts or materials may damage the vehicle or its equipment, which may in turn result in personal injury.
If you have any question about carrying out some service, turn to the advice of an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
We reserve the right to modify the technical details of the vehicle as given in the data and illustrations of this Operator’s Manual. Re-
printing, translation and copying, even of excerpts, is not permitted without our prior authorization in writing.
Title illustration no. P00.01-2282-31
Press time 07/04/02
GSP/SIP
Printed in Germany

2003 Mercedes Benz e Class

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

2003 Mercedes Benz e Class

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

2003 Mercedes Benz e Class

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

E 320

Problems while driving.................... 48

Lighting.............................................. 112 One-touch gearshifting ................ 152

Tires and wheels ................................ 268 Replacing bulbs ................................. 332

Fuels, coolants, lubricants etc............ 366

Maintenance Roadside Assistance Change of address or ownership

Reporting safety defects

Item Page Item Page Item Page

앫 Turn signals 46 wheel 122 19 Glove box 226

앫 Windshield wipers 47 12 Horn 20 Center console 25

앫 High beam 47 13 Lever for voice recognition

Item Page Item Page Item Page

6 Opening/closing button 227

Lower part Item Page Item Page

SmartKey with remote control

Starter switch positions !

Unlocking with KEYLESS-GO* i 왘 Grasp the door handle.

Warning! G Your seat must be adjusted so that you can

Seat adjustment 왘 Open the driver’s or passenger door.

Seat cushion tilt 왘 Press the switch up or down in the di-

Steering wheel adjustment Steering column, lengthen or shorten Mirrors

왘 Press the KEYLESS GO* start/stop

According to accident statistics, children

Starting the engine Automatic transmission

Starting with the key Starting difficulties

왘 Get a jump start (컄 page 346). i

High beam Windshield wipers 0 Windshield wipers off

Single wipe ! Problems while driving

Switching off headlamps

Turning off with the key

Turning off with KEYLESS-GO*

More information can be found in the

앫 Occupants, especially children, should

When you sell your vehicle we strongly

Information on fastening seat belts is

Warning! G Warning! G 앫 Never wear the shoulder belt under your

Emergency tensioning device (ETD), In an impact, emergency tensioning devic-

! Children in the vehicle All lap-shoulder belts except the driver’s

A statement by the child restraint man-

Special BabySmartTM compatible child

BabySmartTM is a trademark of Siemens Automotive

Self-test BabySmartTM without special

Not foldable rear seat backrest Foldable rear seat backrest*

Children too big for child restraint systems

Continuos steady brake pedal pressure BAS

More information can be found in the

! Switching off the ESP

The SBC brake system is automatically ac-

i The SBC brake servo assistance switches

앫 After driving on wet or snow-covered

Anti-theft alarm system Arming the alarm system With KEYLESS-GO*

Factory setting Selective setting Restoring to factory setting

! Checking the batteries Unlocking the trunk lid

i Loss of SmartKey or mechanical key SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO*

system, the vehicle cannot be locked Factory setting Global locking

Unlocking the trunk lid i Locking the vehicle

i Opening the trunk from the inside !

Trunk lid opening/closing system* i Activating opening height restriction of

If the vehicle was previously separately

1 Remote control switch